JP2020068943A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To avoid deterioration of appearance by an attention calling display arranged on a game machine.SOLUTION: A game machine that can execute a game on the basis of the establishment of a predetermined condition includes attention calling display means capable of displaying a predetermined attention calling display, and position specification means for specifying the position of the attention calling display means.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 119

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Among conventional gaming machines, there is known a gaming machine provided with a caution display in a game area for alerting a player or a person involved in a hall (for example, refer to Patent Document 1).

JP, 2013-226261, A

However, in the conventional gaming machine, since the alerting display is performed in a conspicuous place, there is a possibility that it may not match the motif of the gaming machine, a decorative member, or the like, which may impair the appearance.

It is an object of the present invention to avoid deterioration of aesthetics due to a warning display arranged on a gaming machine.

In a typical embodiment of the present invention, in a gaming machine capable of executing a game when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a caution display unit capable of displaying a predetermined caution display and a position of the caution display unit are specified. And possible position specifying means.

According to one aspect of the present invention, it is possible to avoid a decrease in aesthetics due to a warning display arranged on a gaming machine.

It is the perspective view which looked at the game machine from diagonally right above. It is the front view which saw the game machine from the front. It is the left side view which looked at the game machine from the left. It is an exploded perspective view of a game machine. It is the perspective view (a) seen from the diagonally right upper side of the lower plate unit, and the perspective view (b) seen from the diagonally left upper side. It is a top view of a lower plate unit (a), a sectional view in the AA line (b), and an expanded sectional view (c) (d). It is an exploded perspective view of the glass frame which removed the decoration device (top unit). A front view (a) of the glass frame excluding the decoration device (top unit), a cross-sectional view (b) taken along the line AA, a front view (c) of the glass frame excluding the speaker decoration member, and a rear view (d). Is. It is an expanded sectional view (a) of a sound output part, and a figure (b) showing how a sound outputted from an upper speaker is transmitted. It is a perspective view of the game machine seen from the right diagonal. It is the side view (a) of the speaker decoration member in the state attached to the game machine, and the perspective view (b) seen from the diagonally left upper side of the speaker decoration member. It is the front view (a) of a speaker decoration member and the perspective view (b) seen from the right diagonal of a speaker decoration member. It is a partially expanded front view of a front frame. It is a front view (a) and a perspective view (b) of a ball launching device, and a perspective view (c) of a cutting blade. It is a front view (a) and an exploded perspective view (b) of a foul ball catch unit. It is a back view (a) and a back perspective view (b) of a foul ball catch unit. It is sectional drawing (a) in the horizontal direction (AA line) of a foul ball catch unit, and sectional drawing (b) in the horizontal direction of a part member. It is the perspective view which looked at the foul ball catch unit from diagonally above. It is a partially expanded front view of the front frame which removed the foul ball catch unit. It is the perspective view (a) of the upper tray unit in the state which removed the production button unit from the upper tray unit main body, and the top view (b) of the upper tray unit. It is an exploded perspective view of an upper plate unit (upper plate unit main body). It is an exploded perspective view of an effect button unit (effect button). It is a front view (a) and a perspective view (b) of an effect button unit (effect button). It is the top view (a) which looked at the effect button unit (effect button) from the upper part, and the perspective view (b) which removes the effect button unit and the button installation part of the right side in the operation panel. A front view (a) of the upper plate unit, a cross-sectional view (b) of the cross section taken along the line AA of the front view (a) seen from the side, and an enlarged view of a main part of the cross-sectional view (b). It is (c). Sectional view (a) of the top view of the upper plate unit (similar to FIG. 18 (b)) taken along the line AA of the upper plate unit from the back side, and a front view of a state in which some of the members constituting the upper plate unit are removed. It is (b). Sectional view (a) of the top view of the upper plate unit (similar to FIG. 18 (b)) taken along the line A-A from the front, and an enlarged view of an essential part (b) of an enlarged main part of the sectional view (a). ). An enlarged view of a right side main part (a) showing an enlarged right side of a cross section obtained by cutting the effect button unit and its peripheral portion along the diametrical direction, and an enlarged view of a left side main part shown by enlarging the left side (b), and a button. It is a top view (c) and (d) which shows the principal part of a base. It is a front view explaining an outlet. It is the back view (a) and sectional top view (b) of an outer side unit (or front frame). It is an exploded perspective view of an outside unit (or front frame). It is an exploded perspective view of a ball channel unit. It is a back view (a) and a see-through front view (b) of a ball channel unit base. It is a right side view (a) of the glass frame and its partial enlarged view (b), and the perspective view (c) seen from the lower diagonal of the glass frame and its partial enlarged view (d). It is the exploded perspective view (a) which separated the projection production unit (decoration device) from the glass frame, and the exploded perspective view (b) of the projection production unit. It is a front view of a protrusion effect unit. It is a front view of a game board of the game machine according to the second embodiment (normal game state). It is a front view of the game board of the game machine according to the second embodiment (a state suggesting a specific mode). It is a front view (specific game state) of a game board of the game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 38 (a) is a schematic diagram showing a lighting mode of the accessory lamp, FIG. 38 (a) shows a lighting mode in which a lighting part orbits during fluctuation, and FIG. 38 (b) shows a lighting mode in which two lighting states are alternately repeated during fluctuation. FIG. 38 (c) shows a lighting mode in which the lighting part changes so as to draw a figure 8 when changing. FIG. 39 (a) is a schematic view of the general winning opening unit and the collective display device, FIG. 39 (b) is a detailed view of the collective display device, and FIG. 39 (c) is a seal for decorating the general winning opening unit. FIG. 39D shows a schematic diagram of the position information and related information displayed on the sticker, respectively. It is a figure explaining operation | movement of a accessory unit and a falling accessory unit, a display mode in a display device, etc., FIG.40 (a-1) is an example in the case of a normal game state, FIG.40 (a-2) is 40 (b-1) shows an example of the case where the drop accessory unit operates in the state of FIG. 40 (a-1), and FIG. 40 (b-1) shows an example of the case of suggesting a specific mode. 2C is an example of the case where the drop accessory unit operates in the state of FIG. 40B-1, FIG. 40C-1 is an example of the specific game state, and FIG. 40) shows examples of cases where the falling accessory unit operates in the state of FIG. 40 (c-1). It is an exploded perspective view of a movable accessory. It is a detailed exploded perspective view of a movable accessory. It is an exploded view of a biasing member unit that constitutes the movable accessory main body. FIG. 45A is a perspective view showing the operation of the lower movable part that guides the movement of the movable accessory body, FIG. 44A shows the case where the biasing member is in the initial state, and FIG. 44B shows the case where the biasing member is extended. The case of each is shown. It is a front view (initial position) of a movable accessory main body. FIG. 46 is a back view of FIG. 45. It is a front view (middle position) of a movable accessory main body. FIG. 48 is a back view of FIG. 47. It is a front view (maximum position) of a movable accessory main body. FIG. 50 is a back view of FIG. 49. It is a rear view of the game machine according to the third embodiment. It is the disassembled perspective view of the sub baseplate box which houses the production control control equipment. It is a front view of the box upper member to which a cover member is attached. FIG. 54 is a partial detailed view of FIG. 53 (enlarged view of a portion surrounded by a rectangular broken line in FIG. 53), FIG. 54 (a) shows a case without a cover member, and FIG. 54 (b) shows a cover member attached. It is a figure of a case. It is sectional drawing in the AA line of FIG. 53, and is a figure when a cover member is attached, and its partial detail view. It is sectional drawing in the BB line of FIG. 53, and is a figure when a cover member is attached, and its partial detail view. It is a perspective view of a cover member. It is a back view which shows the mounting surface of a cover member. It is a front view of a cover member. It is a left side view of a cover member. FIG. 60 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIGS. 58 and 59. It is sectional drawing in the BB line of FIG. 58 and FIG. It is a figure showing the cutting field of the 1st cutting part of a cover member, Drawing 63 (a) is a front view and Drawing 63 (b) is a back view. It is a figure showing the cutting field of the 2nd cutting part (and the 1st cutting part) of a cover member, Drawing 64 (a) is a front view and Drawing 64 (b) is a back view. It is a figure which shows the attachment process of a cover member, FIG.65 (a) shows the process of attaching a fastening screw, and FIG.65 (b) shows the state before attaching a cover member, respectively. FIG. 66C is a diagram showing a step of attaching the cover member, FIG. 66C shows a state where the cover member is being attached to the box upper member, and FIG. 66D shows a state where the cover member is attached to the box upper member. FIG. 67A is a diagram showing a step of removing the cover member, FIG. 67A shows a step of cutting the cutting portion, and FIG. 67B shows a step of removing the fastening screw. FIG. 68C is a diagram showing a step of removing the cover member, FIG. 68C shows a state in which the cover member is being removed from the box upper member, and FIG. 68D shows a state in which the cover member has been removed from the box upper member. It is sectional drawing of the 1st modification of a cover member. FIG. 70 (a) is a front view and FIG. 70 (b) is a rear view showing a second modification of the cover member. It is an exploded perspective view of a game board and the like of a game machine according to a fourth embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view of a special winning opening unit. FIG. 73A is a perspective view showing the operation of the special winning edge portion drive mechanism of the special winning opening unit, FIG. 73A (a) shows an initial state, and FIG. 73A (b) shows a winning possible state to the V switch or the remaining ball switch. .. 73B is a plan view of the movable portion drive mechanism of the special winning opening unit, FIG. 73B (a) shows the remaining ball switch winning state (initial state), and FIG. 73B (b) shows the V switch winning state. It is a front view of the special winning opening unit and is a diagram showing a V switch winning prohibition state. It is sectional drawing in the AA line of FIG. It is a front view of the special winning opening unit and is a diagram showing a V switch winning state. FIG. 77 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 76. It is a front view (specific game state) of a game board of the game machine according to the fourth embodiment. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a game control system of a game machine concerning a 5th embodiment. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a production control system of a game machine concerning a 5th embodiment. It is a figure explaining a transition state at the time of turning on a power supply of a game machine according to a fifth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the first half of the main processing of game control. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of the main processing of game control. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a timer interruption process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of probability setting change / confirmation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the starting opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special process starting port switch common process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 game processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 game processing (the first half). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 game processing (the latter half). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special processing 1 normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special processing 2 normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the falling lottery processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big hit flag 1 setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big hit flag 2 setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the big hit judging processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a small hit determination process. It is a table exemplifying a big hit probability, a small hit probability, and a falling probability. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 information setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 information setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of change start information setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing during special figure 1 change. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing during change in special figure 2. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing (first half) during fanfare / interval. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing (half) in fanfare / interval. It is the flowchart which shows the main processing of the production control control equipment. It is a flow chart which shows reception command check processing. It is a flow chart which shows received command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows single-shot system command processing. It is a flow chart which shows symbol system command processing. It is a flow chart which shows variable system command processing. It is a flow chart which shows change production setting processing. It is the perspective view which looked at the game machine from diagonally right above. It is an exploded perspective view of a game machine. It is an exploded perspective view of the glass frame which removed the decoration device (top unit). A front view (a) of the glass frame excluding the decoration device (top unit), a cross-sectional view (b) taken along the line AA, a front view (c) of the glass frame excluding the speaker decoration member, and a rear view (d). Is. FIG. 116A is a plan view of the gaming machine (a view from directly above), FIG. 116 (a) shows a state before the front frame and the glass frame are rotated in front of the gaming machine, and FIG. 116 (b) is a front frame. And the state after rotating the glass frame in front of the game machine. It is the sectional view on the AA line of FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of a caution display part. FIG. 1 is a cross-sectional view (a portion surrounded by a dashed ellipse in FIG. 117) showing a positional relationship between a wall portion and a decoration device (top unit). It is a back view which shows the arrangement | positioning relationship of a wall part and a hinge. FIG. 121 (a) is a cross-sectional view showing a modified example of the wall portion (a portion surrounded by an ellipse of a broken line in FIG. 117), in which the inclination angle of the upper surface of the wall portion is lower than the inclination angle of the upper surface of the decoration device. , 121 shows a case where the upper surface of the wall portion is lower than the same plane including the upper surface of the decoration device. 121 (c) shows the case where the upper surface of the decoration unit coincides with the same plane including the upper surface of the decoration device, and FIG. 121 (c) shows that the inclination angle of the upper surface of the wall portion is higher than the inclination angle of the upper surface of the decoration device and It is lower than the same plane including the upper surface of the device, and further shows the case where the same plane including the upper surface of the wall portion contacts the rear end of the decoration device. 122A is a cross-sectional view showing a modified example of the wall portion (a portion surrounded by a dashed ellipse in FIG. 117), and FIG. 122A shows a case where the bottom surface is inclined rearward in the arrangement shown in FIG. 119. 122 (b) shows the case where the upper surfaces of the front wall and the side wall form the same plane as the upper surface of the front frame in the arrangement shown in FIG. 122 (a). It is a back view which shows the modification of a wall part. It is a top view (the figure seen from right above) which shows the modification of a wall part. It is a figure which shows the example of the sheet | seat attached to a decoration device.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. The front, rear, left and right in the description of the gaming machine refer to the direction viewed by the player who is playing the game.

[Overall view of gaming machines]
1, 2, and 3 are diagrams illustrating a game machine. 1, FIG. 2, and FIG. 3 are a perspective view, a front view, and a left side view of a gaming machine.

The gaming machine 10 is provided with an opening / closing frame attached to a frame 11 fixed to the island facility so as to be openable and closable via hinges 16a and 16b. The open / close frame is the front frame 12 (main body frame) and the glass frame 15.
(Front frame unit). The frame 11 and the front frame 12 form an outer frame unit 17.

A game board 30 (see FIG. 35) is arranged on the front frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 for covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached. The cover glass 14 is
The game area 32 (see FIG. 35) formed on the game board 30 functions as a game visual recognition area. The cover glass 14 is shown as an example of a transparent member, and a plastic cover may be used instead of the cover glass 14. The glass frame 15 functions as a transparent member holding frame that holds the transparent member.

The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be individually opened. For example, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed by rotating and opening only the glass frame 15 via the hinges 12a and 12b (FIG. 4). Further, by rotating the front frame 12 through the hinges 16a and 16b to open it while the glass frame 15 is not open, the game control device 100 (main board) arranged on the back surface side of the game board 30. ) (See FIG. 79) and the like. The glass frame 15 and / or the front frame 12 is locked or opened by the key portion 446.

In the front frame base unit 480 (FIG. 7) of the glass frame 15 (front frame unit), a front frame inner member 482 having a generally concave shape when viewed from the front is arranged in front of the edge of the cover glass 14. There is. The front frame inner member 482 includes a bottom plate 482a extending in the left-right direction and a bottom plate 482.
Two vertical plates 482b and 482c on the right and left sides, which extend in the vertical direction from both ends of a, are provided. The vertical plates 482b and 482c face the front (player side) on the lower side, but are twisted at the central portion, and face the central side of the gaming machine 10 on the upper side (see also FIG. 33 (a)). reference).

The front frame inner member 482 has black as a color with low lightness and saturation. Therefore, when the player focuses on the display device 41 (described later) and various winning openings (described later) of the game board 30 through the cover glass 14 (transparent member), there is a part of the black portion in the visual field. , The feeling of pressure on the player is reduced. If the front frame inner member 482 is a color with high saturation and lightness such as red,
It gives the player a terrible impression to stand out. Further, there are light emitting devices such as the decoration devices 18b and 18c and the effect button 25 around the outside of the front frame inner member 482, but these light emitting devices are clearly different from the black front frame inner member 482 in appearance. Since it is partitioned, its light emission becomes noticeable. The material of the front frame inner member 482 may be black itself, or the front surface may be painted black.

Further, various frame components are arranged at the edge portion of the glass frame 15 around the cover glass 14.

Decorative devices 18a, 18b, 18c capable of emitting light according to the game state are arranged in the upper center, right side and left side of the glass frame 15. The decoration devices 18a, 18b, 18c are
A lighting device such as an LED is housed inside, and is a production device that performs a light emission production according to a game state. The illumination members arranged inside the decoration devices 18a, 18b, and 18c form a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 80).

The decoration device 18a is a top unit that extends in the left-right direction of the gaming machine 10 above the glass frame 15 and projects toward the front. The decoration device 18a is fixed and does not operate in the present embodiment, but in order to reduce a feeling of pressure on the player, the decoration device 18a may protrude forward only when necessary from the retracted initial position (normal position) or may move vertically. You may move.

The decoration device 18b is a projecting effect unit (front frame light emitting unit) that extends vertically on the right side of the glass frame 15 and projects forward. The decoration device 18c is a projection effect unit (front frame light emitting unit) which is provided on the left side of the glass frame 15 and which extends vertically and projects forward. The decoration devices 18b and 18c irradiate the player with light toward the center side (inside) of the gaming machine 10 and also provide a plurality of openings 795a in the side cover 795.
Light leaks from the game machine 10 through the inner lens 794 (inner cover).
The detailed configuration of the decoration devices 18b and 18c will be described later with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34.

Upper speakers 19a and 19b are arranged at the upper right corner and the upper left corner of the glass frame 15, respectively. In addition to the upper speakers 19a and 19b, two lower speakers 19c and 19d are provided in the lower portion of the gaming machine 10. The lower speakers 19c and 19d have a glass frame 15
Are disposed at the lower left corner of the front frame 12 and the lower right corner of the front frame 12. These upper speakers 19a,
The lower speaker 19b and the lower speakers 19c and 19d emit a sound effect, an alarm sound, a notification sound, and the like. The upper speakers 19a and 19b are covered with the right speaker decoration member 470a and the left speaker decoration member 470b, respectively. The detailed functions and configurations of the speaker decoration members 470a and 470b are shown in FIGS. Will be described later.

An upper plate unit 20 having an upper plate 21 capable of storing game balls is attached to the lower portion of the glass frame 15. The upper plate 21 is formed in a box shape having an opening at the top. Like the front frame inner member 482, the upper plate 21 also has a black color as a color with low lightness and saturation. The game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are supplied to the ball launching device 530 (described later) one by one. The detailed configuration of the upper plate unit 20 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 18 to 27.

The upper plate unit 20 is an effect operation device that receives an input operation from a player, a ball lending operation device that receives an input operation from the player, and a decoration device 2 that performs a light emission effect or the like according to a game state.
2 is further provided.

The effect operation device is an operation device including an effect button 25, volume adjustment buttons 690d and 690e, and a cross key 690f, and is provided in the upper center of the upper plate unit 20 and on the left side thereof so that the player can easily operate. ing. The effect button 25 is arranged in the opening of the operation panel 690 so as to be surrounded by the operation panel 690. The operation panel 690 can reflect light by, for example, plating the surface with a metal or by making the entire surface of a metal, and has, for example, a silver (silver) metallic luster. When the effect button 25 emits light, the light from the effect button 25 is reflected by the surrounding operation panel 690, and the effect effect of the effect button 25 is effectively emitted.

As described later, in the effect button 25, the button lens 754 on the uppermost surface is transparent, and the character “PUSH” of the button lens decoration 756 arranged below the button lens 754 can be visually recognized (FIG. 18). Further, the effect button 25 has a vibration function such that it vibrates by the motor 771 as a driving unit (FIG. 18). It should be noted that the effect button 25 may operate so as to pop out upward, and in that case, when viewed from the front in the front, the front frame base unit 48.
It overlaps with the black front frame inner member 482 (bottom plate 482a) of 0, and the player notices that there is a change in the part that looks black, and does not miss the change (action) of the effect button 25. If the effect button 25 has a color (for example, silver) different from that of the front frame inner member 482 (bottom plate 482a) or emits light when popping out, the change (action) of the effect button 25 will not be overlooked.

Volume adjustment buttons 690d and 690e are provided on the upper left side of the operation panel 690 of the upper plate unit 20, and increase or decrease (+-) the volume of the speaker to adjust. The cross key 690f is provided adjacent to the volume adjusting buttons 690d and 690e on the upper left side of the operation panel 690 of the upper plate unit 20, and adjusts the brightness of the LED, for example.

The ball lending operation device is an operation device operated by a player when borrowing a game ball, and is provided on the upper right side of the operation panel 690 of the upper plate unit 20. The ball lending operation device includes a balance display unit 690a, a ball lending button 690b, and a return button 690c. The balance display portion 690a is a display area in which the balance of a prepaid card or the like is displayed. Ball lending button 690
b is a button operated by the player when renting a game ball, and the return button 690c is used by the player when ejecting a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown) arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 10. It is a button to operate.

The decoration device 22 is a device that accommodates an illumination member such as an LED inside and performs a light emission effect or the like according to the game state, and is provided in the upper plate unit 20. The lighting member arranged inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 80).

Below the glass frame 15 including the above-mentioned upper plate unit 20 and the lower part of the front frame 12, an operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of the ball launching device 530, and a lower plate capable of storing game balls. A lower plate unit 29 including 23 and the like is provided. The lower plate unit 29 and the upper plate unit 20 are conformable in shape and are arranged side by side in the vertical direction. By operating the upper plate operating portion 735 of the upper plate unit 20, the game balls of the upper plate 21 can be made to flow down to the lower plate 23. The detailed configuration of the lower plate unit 29 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6.

The operation handle 24 is arranged on the lower right portion of the front frame 12 and below the lower speaker 19c on the right side. When the player turns the operation handle 24, the ball launching device 5
30 shoots the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 to the game area 32 of the game board 30. The launch speed of the game ball launched from the ball launch device 530 is set to increase as the amount of rotation of the operation handle 24 increases. That is, the ball launching device 530 can change the launching force, which is the force (speed) of launching the game ball into the game area 32, in response to the operation of the operation handle 24 by the player, and various launching modes with different launching forces. You can shoot a game ball with. The launch mode includes left striking (normal striking) that causes the game ball to flow down on the left side of the game area 32, and right striking that causes the game ball to flow down on the right side of the game area 32.

The lower plate 23 of the lower plate unit 29 is arranged below the upper plate unit 20 with a predetermined distance from the upper plate unit 20. The lower plate 23 has an opening 455a (described later) that vertically penetrates the bottom surface of the lower plate 23, and an opening / closing operation unit 467 for opening / closing the opening 455a. When the player operates the opening / closing operation unit 467 to open the opening 455a, the game balls stored in the lower plate 23 can be discharged to the outside through the opening 455a.

Further, on the back side of the front frame 12, from a power supply device 400 that supplies electric power to various devices, an upper tank 448 that stores game balls supplied from a supply device (not shown) installed in the island facility, and an upper tank 448. A payout unit 780 for paying out the game balls flowing down to the upper plate 21 is arranged (FIG. 3).

As shown in FIG. 3, in the present embodiment, the decoration device 18a (top unit) protrudes slightly more forward than the upper plate unit 20 and is conspicuous, and the decoration devices 18b and 18c (projection effect unit) and the lower plate unit are conspicuous. Projected much larger than 29 (see the chain line)
. That is, the amount of protrusion of the decoration device 18a toward the front is slightly larger than that of the upper plate unit 20 and considerably larger than that of the decoration devices 18b and 18c and the lower plate unit 29. Here, the amount of protrusion is the distance from the rear part of the glass frame 15 (for example, the cover glass 14) to the leading edge 432a (vertex) in the front-rear direction. However, the projection amount of the decoration device 18a to the front is not limited to FIG. 3 and can be appropriately changed. For example, the protrusion amount of the decoration device 18a is set to be smaller than that of the upper plate unit 20 (the decoration device 18b so that the player's head does not collide with the decoration device 18a (top unit)).
, 18c), and the leading edge 432a (vertex) of the decoration device 18a may be arranged behind the leading edge 20a (vertex) of the upper plate unit 20.

FIG. 4 is an exploded view of the game machine. In addition, a part of the game board 30 is omitted in order to make it easy to see.

The decoration device 18 a (top unit) includes a main body portion 432, a transparent cover 434 located in front of the main body portion 432, a decoration portion 436 protruding left and right from a front portion of the main body portion 432, and a decoration portion 436.
The left and right light emitting portions 440 (light emitting means) located at the rear of the main body 432 and the mounting portions 438 and 442 located at the rear of the main body 432. The decoration device 18a has a divergent shape that expands vertically and horizontally toward the front in order to make the player appear large and wide. The decoration device 18a is attached to the front frame base unit 480 by the attachment portion 442 connected to the receiving portion 444 of the front frame base unit 480 and the like.

Between the front surface 432b of the main body portion 432 and the transparent cover 434, a sheet on which the model name of the gaming machine 10 is displayed is sandwiched and arranged. By exchanging only the seat, the decoration device 18a can be used in a different model without replacing the entire decoration device 18a, and the cost can be reduced.

At the lower part of the front frame 12, a ball launching device 530 for launching a game ball and a foul ball catching unit 560 (foul ball catching member) for catching a foul ball (described later) are arranged. Details of the ball launch device 530 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 12 and 13. The foul ball catch unit 560 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 12 and 14 to 17.

At the left end of the front frame 12, a plurality of game board locking members 12c that lock the locked portions 30d (see FIG. 35) of the game board 30 are provided. The game board 30 is attached to the front frame 4 via the locked portion 30d and the game board locking member 12c. Further, a receiving portion 451 that is connected to the engaging portion 452 of the lower plate unit 29 is provided at the right end of the front frame 12.

On the lower left side of the front frame 12, there is provided a prize ball payout outlet 443 for passing the prize balls paid out from the payout unit 780 to the prize ball entrance 484 of the upper plate 21.

[Lower plate unit]
The detailed configuration of the lower plate unit 29 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. 5 shows a perspective view (a) of the lower plate unit 29 as viewed obliquely from the upper right and a perspective view (b) of the lower plate unit 29 as obliquely viewed from the upper left. FIG. 6 shows a top view (a), a sectional view (b), and enlarged sectional views (c) and (d) of the lower plate unit 29.

The lower plate unit 29 includes a lower plate base 453 on the back surface side, a left case part 456, a central case part 458, and a right case part 460 that are connected to the lower plate base 453 from the front.
In addition, the lower tray unit 29 includes a lower case portion 459 that is connected to the lower tray base 453 from the front side below the left side case portion 456.

Further, the lower plate unit 29 is provided with a call button 454 in front of the left case portion 456 for calling an attendant at a game hall (game shop). The ON signal of the call button 454 is input to the game control device 100 (FIG. 79) and is sent as external information from the external information terminal 71 to the data lamp, and the data lamp, which is a display device for game information and the like, emits light.

In front of the central case portion 458, a right decoration portion 466 for decorating the right front side of the lower plate unit 29.
a is provided. In front of the lower plate 23, the left decoration portion 4 for decorating the left front side of the lower plate unit 29.
66a is provided.

The central case portion 458 has a vertical portion 458a extending substantially vertically and a horizontal portion 458b extending substantially laterally. The lower speaker 19c and the shaft portion 24a of the operation handle 24 are arranged between the vertical portion 458a of the central case portion 458 and the right side case portion 460.

The lower plate unit 29 is roughly divided into a flat portion 29a extending in the left-right direction and a flat portion 29a.
It consists of a right side protruding portion 29b protruding upward on the right side of a. The flat portion 29 a includes the lower plate 23, the left side case portion 456, and the lateral portion 458 b of the central case portion 458. A bottom plate portion 701 (described later) of the upper plate unit 20 is arranged above the flat portion 29a so as to face it. Right side protrusion 2
9b is a vertical portion 458a of the central case portion 458, a right side case portion 460, a lower speaker 19c.
, And an operation handle 24. In order that the glass frame 15 can be closed with respect to the front frame 12,
The right side protruding portion 29b includes the right end portion of the upper plate unit 20 and the front frame base unit 480 (see FIG. 7).
) Has a shape that fits from the rear in the lower right corner portion of the.

A passage 462 (groove) for the game ball is formed between the left case portion 456 and the central case portion 458. A cover 46, which is a transparent member that covers the passage 462 from above, is provided on the upper end of the passage 462.
4 are provided. Since the cover 464 is transparent, the inside of the passage 462 can be visually recognized when the glass frame 15 is opened with respect to the front frame 12.

On the back surface of the lower plate base 453 of the lower plate unit 29, a first entrance 461 and a second entrance 465 of the game ball are provided. A foul ball (falling ball) that has been launched from the ball launching device 530 but has returned without reaching the game area 32 flows into the first entrance 461 from the foul ball catch unit 560, and the upper plate 21 is Dispensing unit 7 when full (full)
Game balls (prize balls) from 80 may flow in. The game ball removed from the upper plate 21 by the operation of the upper plate operating portion 735 may flow into the second inlet 465. The game ball passes through the passage 462 from the first inlet 461 and the second inlet 465, and flows into the lower tray 23 from the outlet 463 of the passage 462. When the lower plate 23 is full, the game balls are stored in the passage 462. Passage 46
2 communicates with the first inlet 461 and the second inlet 465, so that a part of the second casing 456 is left side.
And may pass inside or under the central case portion 458.

Since the foul ball passes through the passage 462 from the first inlet 461, the foul ball having one end of the thread attached as a part of fraud (gotting) (the other end of the thread is attached to the game ball in the game area 32). When using, since the transparent cover 464 of the passage 462 is rubbed with a thread, scratched, becomes white, and is not transparent, it is possible to easily detect fraud. Further, the transparent cover 464 can be replaced even if it is damaged by fraud, and it is not necessary to replace the entire lower plate unit 29.

In front of the left side case portion 456 and above the lower side case portion 459, a dish portion 455 that forms a bottom portion and a front portion of the lower tray 23 is arranged. As shown in FIG. 6B, the dish portion 455 has an L-shaped cross section in the up-down direction and the front-back direction. The left side case portion 456 has an upper plate 456a and a front plate 456b that are integrally formed, and the front plate 456b constitutes a back plate of the lower plate 23. As shown in FIG. 6B, the front plate 456b (the back plate of the lower plate 23) of the left-side case portion 456 is inclined so that it is located farther toward the lower side, so that the player diagonally moves upward. Lower plate 2 from the front
It becomes easier to scrape out the game ball of No. 3 by hand.

At the bottom of the lower plate 23 (that is, the bottom of the plate 455), an annular opening 455a and an opening 4 are formed.
Valleys 455b extending radially from 55a are provided. The game ball that has flowed into the lower plate 23 from the outlet 463 of the passage 462 drops into the opening 455a through the easy-to-pass valley 455b. The opening 455a is normally closed by the opening / closing member 457, but the opening / closing operation unit 46 is
The opening / closing member 457 is opened by the operation of 7. When the opening / closing member 457 is opened, the game ball is opened 4
After passing through 55a, it is discharged to the outside of the gaming machine 10 from an annular discharge port 459a projecting from the lower case portion 459.

As shown in FIG. 6C, the depth D1 of the recess (recess) of the lower plate 23 is shorter than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, it becomes easy to grab the game ball by hand. The depth D1 is the lower end of the opening 455a (
It corresponds to the height from the upper surface of the closed opening / closing member 457) to the lower end of the outlet 463 of the passage 462. Further, the depth D2 of the annular discharge port 459a is longer than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the opening 455a is likely to fall right below.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6D, the depth D3 of the discharge portion (discharge hole) including the discharge port 459a and the opening 455a is longer than the diameter of the game ball, but is more than twice the diameter of the game ball. short. Therefore, when the lower half side of the game ball is sandwiched between the opening / closing member 457 (door) of the discharge portion (when it is sandwiched and returned to the lower side), it is easy to return to the lower side, and the upper half side of the game ball is the opening / closing member 457 of the discharge portion. When it is caught in (when it is discharged outside the game machine by being caught), the game ball is guided straight to the box (collection box for automatic counting or so-called dollar box), so it does not spill out of the box. The depth D3 is the discharge port 45.
It corresponds to the height from the lower end of 9a to the upper end of the opening 455a.

[Sound output part]
The configuration of the sound output unit 473 for outputting sound will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 to 9. The sound output unit 473 serves as sound generating means and includes upper speakers 19a and 19b and upper speakers 19a and 19b.
Speaker peripheral members 470a and 470b are provided as peripheral members of b. FIG. 7 is an exploded view of the glass frame 15 excluding the decoration device 18a (top unit). FIG. 8 shows the decoration device 1.
A front view (a), a cross-sectional view (b), and a speaker decoration member 47 of the glass frame 15 excluding 8a.
It is a front view (c) and a rear view (d) excluding 0a and 470b. FIG. 9 is an enlarged cross-sectional view (a) of the sound output unit and a view (b) showing how the sound output from the upper speakers 19a and 19b is transmitted.

As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the front frame base unit 480 of the glass frame 15 (front frame unit) is
The upper speakers 19a and 19b are provided. The upper speakers 19a and 19b are inclined so that sound is output toward the lower side and the inner side (center side) of the gaming machine 10. Front frame base unit 48
The upper plate unit 20 and the speaker decoration members 470a and 470b are attached to 0. The right speaker decoration member 470a is attached to the front frame base unit 480 so as to cover the right upper speaker 19a. The speaker decoration member 470b on the left side is the upper speaker 1 on the left side.
It is attached to the front frame base unit 480 so as to cover 9b.

The speaker decoration members 470a and 470b prevent sounds from the upper speakers 19a and 19b from being directly transmitted to the player. The sounds emitted from the front portions of the upper speakers 19a and 19b are reflected on the back surfaces of the speaker decoration members 470a and 470b, respectively, hit the cover glass 14 and are reflected there again, and are transmitted to the player (the solid line in FIG. 9B). ). The lower speakers 19c, 19
The sound from d is directly transmitted to the player. The speaker decoration members 470a and 470b constitute a first sound reflecting means, and the cover glass 14 constitutes a second sound reflecting means.

The upper speaker 19a (or the upper speaker 19b) includes the speaker main body 490 and the speaker main body 4
The first speaker housing member 491a behind the 90, the first speaker housing member 491a located around the speaker main body 490;
The speaker unit includes a second speaker housing member 491b connected to the speaker housing member 491a and a speaker outer frame member 491c arranged around the second speaker housing member 491b.

The first speaker housing member 491a and the second speaker housing member 491b are combined,
The speaker body 490 is enclosed and accommodated except for the front part of the speaker body 490. A space 492 (gap) is formed between the rear portion of the speaker body 490 and the first speaker housing member 491a. A box-shaped space 493 (gap) is formed between the lower portion of the first speaker housing member 491a forming the back surface of the upper speakers 19a and 19b (speaker unit) and the cover glass 14. The length L1 of the space 493 in the front-rear direction, that is, the distance between the lower portion of the first speaker housing member 491a and the cover glass 14, the sound emitted from the rear portion (back surface of the speaker unit) of the upper speakers 19a and 19b is played by the cover glass 14. So that it can be reflected toward the person (Fig. 9 (b))
(Dotted line) is set to an appropriate value.

As shown by the solid and dotted lines in FIG. 9B, the sounds emitted from the front and rear parts of the upper speakers 19a and 19b are reflected by the cover glass 14 and directed toward the player, so that various effects are produced. For example,
When the sound is high, the player's ears are hurt when the player directly hears the sound, but it is alleviated by passing through the cover glass 14 (wall). In addition, the sound (especially low-pitched sound) hits the cover glass 14 and sounds like sound is emitted from the entire cover glass 14, which is preferable. Also, the sound is less likely to leak to the outside, and the player can easily hear the sound.

As shown in FIG. 8D, the front frame base unit 480 has the upper speaker 1 on the back surface thereof.
A right side back cover member 488a and a left side back cover member 488b are provided at positions corresponding to the rear (back side) of each of 9a and 19b. The back cover members 488a and 488b have a box shape. The right rear cover member 488a can confine and attenuate the sound (vibration) transmitted from the upper speaker 19a to the rear (back side) via the front frame base unit 480 in the internal space. Similarly, the back cover member 488b on the left side is the upper speaker 1
The sound (vibration) transmitted from 9b to the rear (back side) via the front frame base unit 480 can be confined and damped in the internal space. Therefore, the back side cover members 488a, 488b
Has an effect of preventing noise and can protect various electronic circuit boards around the upper speakers 19a and 19b from vibration.

Further, the back cover members 488a and 488b can be arranged to have the electric wiring on the outer side (the side opposite to the cover glass 14), so that the electric wiring can be kept away from the cover glass 14,
Attach the cover glass 14 (including the frame 14a) to the mounting portion 480a of the front frame base unit 480.
Easy to remove. Further, in at least one of the back cover members 488a and 488b, the portion along the cover glass 14 conforms to the member of the game board 30 (for example, the guide rail 31) in shape, and the glass frame 15 with respect to the front frame 12. Acts as a guide when closing. Further, the back cover members 488a and 488b may be made thicker in the front-rear direction to function as spacers to prevent the game board 30 from coming into contact with the cover glass 14. in this case,
The game board 30 may have a portion that comes into contact with the back cover members 488a and 488b.

The front frame base unit 480 will be further described below. The front frame base unit 480 includes the frame 14a of the cover glass 14 and the above-mentioned front frame inner member 482 arranged in front of the frame 14a. Equipped with. In addition, the front frame base unit 480, the prize ball entrance 484 that allows the prize balls paid out from the payout unit 780 to flow into the upper plate 21, and the launch ball supply path 486 that supplies the game balls from the upper plate 21 to the ball launching device 530. And Further, the front frame base unit 480 is provided so that the glass frame 15 is closed with respect to the front frame 12.
The lower right side is provided with a curved bay end 480c that conforms to the right side protruding portion 29b of the lower plate unit 29.

The prize ball entrance 484 (FIG. 7) has a prize ball passage 487 (on the rear side of the front frame base unit 480).
FIG. 8D is in communication. The prize ball passage 487 is a prize ball payout opening 443 (FIG. 4) of the front frame 12.
Connect with. For this reason, the prize balls from the payout unit 780, the prize ball payout opening 443 (FIG. 4),
It flows into the upper plate 21 through the prize ball passage 487 (FIG. 8D) and the prize ball inlet 484 (FIG. 7).

In a normal case where the upper plate operation portion 735 is not operated, the opening / closing member 734 (FIGS. 18 and 19) is in the closed state, and the game balls are supplied from the upper plate 21 to the launch ball supply path 486. On the other hand, when the opening / closing member 734 is opened by the operation of the upper plate operation portion 735, the game balls flow not to the launch ball supply path 486 but to the downward passage 485, and the second inlet 465 communicating with the passage 485. Reach As a result, the game ball is pulled out from the upper plate 21 to the lower plate 23.

Further, the front frame base unit 480 has a ball stopper unit 489 as shown in FIG. The ball stopping unit 489 is for stopping the game balls from flowing down from the front frame base unit 480 from the launch ball supply path 486 when the glass frame 15 is released from the front frame 12. In the ball stopper unit 489, a substantially L-shaped ball stopper member 483 capable of opening and closing the launch ball supply path 486 is pivotally attached to the front frame base unit 480. The ball stopper unit 489 may be the same as a conventional one (see, for example, JP2012-232200A).

The ball stopping member 483 is biased by a biasing member (not shown) such as a coil spring so that the launch ball supply passage 486 is closed. Then, when the glass frame 15 is closed with respect to the front frame 12, the ball stopping member 483 engages with the ball stopping member converting portion 536 (see FIGS. 4 and 13) protrudingly provided on the front surface of the ball launching device 530. By doing so, the launch ball supply path 486 is opened. The front end surface of the ball stopping member conversion portion 536 is inclined so as to form a trapezoidal cam surface that slides the abutting ball stopping member 483.

[Speaker decoration member]
Referring to FIG. 10, FIG. 11A, and FIG. 11B, speaker decoration members 470a and 470b
The configuration of will be described. Although only the speaker decoration member 470a is illustrated in FIGS. 10, 11A, and 11B, the speaker decoration member 470a and the speaker decoration member 47 are illustrated.
0b has the same configuration if the left side and the right side are interchanged.

FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the gaming machine 10 viewed from the right diagonal. FIG. 11A is a side view (a) of the speaker decoration member 470 a attached to the gaming machine 10 and the speaker decoration member 47.
It is the perspective view (b) which looked at 0a from diagonally left upper. FIG. 11B is a front view (a) of the speaker decoration member 470a and a perspective view (b) of the speaker decoration member 470a as viewed from the right diagonal.

The speaker decoration member 470a (470b) has outer mounting portions 514a and 514b that are screwed to the side portions of the front frame base unit 480, and an inner mounting portion that is screwed to the front frame base unit 480 at the inner mounting plate 512. 516. Further, the speaker decoration member 470a (470b) includes an opening 518 through which the attachment portion 438 of the decoration device 18a (top unit) penetrates.

The speaker decoration member 470a (470b) serves as a light diffusing unit that diffuses light.
2 is provided, and an upper reflecting portion 504 and a lower reflecting portion 506 are provided as light reflecting means for reflecting light. The diffusion unit 502 is arranged adjacent to an inner mounting plate 512 arranged inside (center side) of the gaming machine 10. The upper reflection unit 504 is arranged on the lower right side of the diffusion unit 502 and in contact with the diffusion unit 502. The upper reflecting section 504 and the diffusing section 502 may be in substantially the same plane. The lower reflection part 506 is arranged below the upper reflection part 504. The diffusion unit 502, the upper reflection unit 504, and the lower reflection unit 506 are
The surface (particularly the front surface) is metal-plated or has a metal surface portion (surface plate).

The diffusion unit 502 is arranged behind the light emitting unit 440 of the decoration device 18a in a state where the speaker decoration member 470a (470b) and the decoration device 18a (top unit) are attached to the gaming machine 10 (front frame base unit 480). It The diffusion unit 502 may be arranged in contact with the back surface (rear portion) of the transparent case of the light emitting unit 440. The diffusing section 502 is provided on a frosted glass-like surface section on which irregularities of various sizes are randomly arranged, and diffuses and diffuses the light emitted rearward from the light emitting section 440. Accordingly, even if the LEDs are arranged in the shape of a point light source inside the light emitting unit 440, the light emitting unit 440 can be entirely illuminated. The light diffusely reflected by the diffusing section 502 goes forward, or goes toward the upper reflecting section 504 and the lower reflecting section 506. It should be noted that the light emitting section 440 of the decoration device 18a emits light so that it can be appealed to the player looking from the side surface side of the game machine 10 (direction of the entrance to the game island).

The upper reflecting portion 504 and the lower reflecting portion 506 can reflect the light from the light emitting portion 440, and have an overall blade shape. The upper reflecting portion 504 has a front surface 504a and a side surface 504b. The lower reflection part 506 has a front surface 506a and a side surface 506b. Upper reflector 504 and lower reflector 50
6, the thickness may increase toward the outside of the gaming machine 10. As shown in FIG. 11B (a), the front surface 504a of the upper reflecting portion 504 is in the shape of a washing plate, and has a plurality of protrusions 50 protruding forward.
4c are arranged side by side. Similarly, the front surface 506a of the lower reflecting portion 506 is also in the shape of a washing plate, and a plurality of protrusions 506c protruding forward are arranged side by side. Individual ridges 50
4c and 506c extend in a substantially vertical direction.

The overall inclination (angle) of the front surfaces 504a and 506a with respect to the vertical direction or the horizontal direction can be adjusted appropriately. For example, as shown in the side view of FIG. 11A (a), the front surface 5 of the upper reflecting portion 504 is
04a may be arranged substantially parallel to the up-down direction and the left-right direction so as to face forward, while the front surface 506a of the lower reflecting portion 506 may be tilted largely from the up-down direction. The lower reflection part 506 is a light emitting part 440.
In this way, the direction of the reflected light from the front surface 506a can be prevented from being too downward and the reflection from both the lower reflection portion 506 and the upper reflection portion 504 can be prevented. The light emitted from the light emitting unit 440 can be concentrated at a predetermined position (for example, the player's head). In addition, the diffusion unit 502 and the front surface 440 a of the case of the light emitting unit 440 are connected to the upper reflection unit 5.
No. 04 front surface 504a is aligned with the front and faces the front, so that the diffusion unit 502 and the light emitting unit 440
And the light emission effect of the upper reflection part 504 is cooperative, and the interest is improved.

As shown in FIG. 11B (a), the cross-sections (perpendicular to the longitudinal direction) of the plurality of protrusions 504c and 506c are like saw teeth. Each of the protrusions 504c and 506c has a triangular (or L-shaped) cross section protruding forward, and the reflecting surface 5 on which the light from the light emitting section 440 of the decoration device 18a strikes.
22 and a non-reflecting surface 524 (shaded portion) which is not exposed to the light from the light emitting section 440. Due to the reflective surface 522 and the non-reflective surface 524, only the reflective surface 522 of the front surfaces 504a and 506a shines and looks like a striped pattern from the front, which enhances the effect and enhances the interest.

Further, by adjusting the width of the reflecting surface 522, the amount of light reflected from the front surface 504a of the upper reflecting portion 504 or the front surface 506a of the lower reflecting portion 506 can be adjusted. For example, the lower reflector 50
Since 6 is farther from the light emitting section 440 than the upper reflecting section 504, the ridge 506c has a width larger than that of the ridge 504c so that the light quantity of the reflected light is equalized between the upper reflecting section 504 and the lower reflecting section 506. It may have a reflective surface 522.

Further, the reflecting surface 522 is inclined downward toward the center side (inside) of the gaming machine 10, but the reflecting surface 52
The front surface 50 of the upper reflecting portion 504 can also be adjusted by adjusting the inclination (angle) of the second reflector 2 from the left-right direction.
4a or the amount of light reflected from the front surface 506a of the lower reflector 506 can be adjusted. For example, since the lower reflecting portion 506 is farther from the light emitting portion 440 than the upper reflecting portion 504, the reflecting surface 522 of the ridge 506c is arranged so that the light amount of the reflected light is equalized between the upper reflecting portion 504 and the lower reflecting portion 506. The inclination (angle) from the left-right direction may be smaller than that of the reflecting surface 522 of the protrusion 504c. In addition,
When the inclination of the reflecting surface 522 of the ridge 506c is reduced (that is, the height toward the front is reduced),
Since the area of the non-reflective surface 524 (the shadowed portion) decreases, the amount of light reflected by the front surface 506a increases.

Further, referring to FIG. 10, FIG. 11A, and FIG. 11B, the speaker decoration member 470a (470b) has a first decoration portion 508 facing the upper reflection portion 504 outside and rearward of the upper reflection portion 504. A second decorative portion 509 arranged between the upper reflecting portion 504 and the lower reflecting portion 506;
A third decorative portion 510 facing the lower reflecting portion 506 at the rear side of the lower reflecting portion 506 and a fourth decorative portion 511 facing the third decorative portion 510 below the third decorative portion 510 (not shown in FIG. 11B). )When,
Equipped with. Further, on the speaker decoration member 470a (470b), two thin blade-shaped lower decoration parts 520a and 520b are arranged below the lower reflection part 506 so as to form a step. The light from the light emitting unit 440 of the decoration device 18a is blocked by the lower reflection unit 506 and the upper reflection unit 504 and hardly reaches the decoration units 508 to 511, 520a, and 520b, and the upper reflection unit 50.
The reflected light from the front surface 504a of No. 4 or the front surface 506a of the lower reflecting portion 506 becomes conspicuous.

The first decoration portion 508 and the third decoration portion 510 have a metallic luster by, for example, plating the surface with a metal or forming a metal surface portion (surface plate), but the second decoration portion 509 and the fourth decoration portion 511.
Is made of resin having black color (color with low lightness and saturation), does not reflect light and has no metallic luster.
Therefore, the metallic luster of the first decorative portion 508 and the third decorative portion 510 becomes conspicuous, and the decorative property is improved.

[Sphere launcher]
Details of the ball launching device 530 (launching unit, ball launching means) will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 and 13. FIG. 12 is a partially enlarged front view of the front frame 12 having the ball launching device 530. FIG. 13 is a front view (a) and a perspective view (b) of the ball launching device 530, and a perspective view (c) of the cutting blade 550.

The game ball blasted by the launching punch 532 of the ball launching device 530 is normally a firing rail 533 formed on the lower portion of the front frame 12 so as to incline upward from the lower right to the upper left. It jumps over the ball capturing member), flows into the launch ball guide passage 33 of the game board 30, and is guided to the game area 32 (see FIG. 35) through the launch ball guide passage 33.

It should be noted that, as indicated by solid arrows and dotted arrows pointing downward to the right in FIG. 12, a game ball (launch ball) with a small launching force (launching speed) returns without reaching the game area 32 from the launch ball guide passage 33. It comes into a foul ball (falling ball) and flows into the foul ball catch unit 560. In particular, the foul ball (falling ball) collides with the protrusion 585, which is a ball stopper of the foul ball catch unit 560, and flows into the foul ball catch unit 560. Further, the game ball (launch ball) having a smaller launching force (launching speed) becomes a foul ball (direct ball) that directly jumps into the foul ball catch unit 560 without reaching the launch ball guide passage 33. In this way, the foul ball catching unit 560 constitutes a catching means for catching the foul ball that has been fired but does not enter the game area 32. The details of the configuration of the foul ball catch unit 560 will be described later.

As shown in FIGS. 13A and 13B, the ball launching device 530 for launching the game ball is the upper plate 21.
A guide path 542 that communicates with a launch ball supply path 486 that supplies the game balls stored in the; and a cutting mechanism 544 that cuts the thread member of the incorrect ball when the incorrect ball with the thread member attached is fired.
Equipped with.

In addition, a game ball (illegal ball) to which a thread member such as a fishing line is attached is shot by the ball launching device 530, and when the game ball enters the game area 32 (see FIG. 35), the thread member is operated from the upper plate 21. There may be a case of fraud (gotting) such as winning the prize in the winning opening, and the cutting mechanism 544 cuts the thread member of the illegal ball. The cutting mechanism 544 constitutes a first fraud countermeasure means (first fraud countermeasure section).

In the closed state of the glass frame 15, the guide path 542 on the front frame 12 side and the launch ball supply path 486 on the glass frame 15 side are connected and communicate with each other, and become a part of the supply flow path 540. The supply channel 540 is
The game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are guided to the right side in the left-right direction and then to the rear side in the front-rear direction, and are supplied to the launch position of the ball launching device 530.

The ball launching device 530 has a base plate 531 installed in the lower right part of the front surface of the front frame 12, and a launching punch 532 rotatably arranged on the front surface of the base plate 531. Also, the base plate 53
A firing rail 533 (a firing passage) that is inclined upward from the right side to the left side is fixed to the front surface of 1.

The launching punch 532 is configured to rotate based on a rotating operation of the operation handle 24, and to bounce the game ball at the launching position on the launching rail 533. The game ball ejected by the launch pestle 532 is guided to the left and right by the launch rail 533, flows into the launch ball guide passage 33 of the game board 30 from the launch rail 533, and passes through the launch ball guide passage 33 to the game area. Guided to 32.

The shooting speed of the game ball shot from the ball launching device 530 is set to increase as the amount of turning operation of the operating handle 24 increases.

The inlet portion 542a of the guide path 542 is provided in the cover member 534 attached to the base plate 531 of the ball launching device 530 so as to cover the front side of the base plate 531. The inlet portion 542a is formed as an opening that penetrates the cover member 534 in the front-rear direction.

Further, the guide path 542 is provided with a cutting mechanism 544 for cutting the thread member of the illegal ball.

The cutting mechanism 544 includes a thread guide portion 546 formed on the cover member 534 so as to be connected to the inlet portion 542a of the guide path 542, and a cutting blade attached to the cover member 534 so that the blade tip portion is located inside the thread guide portion 546. 550 and a fixing plate 548 for fixing the cutting blade 550 to the cover member 534.

The thread guiding portion 546 is an opening that penetrates the cover member 534 in the front-rear direction, and serves as a guide path 54.
The second inlet portion 542a is notched so as to be connected to the upper portion of the left side portion. The yarn guiding portion 546 and the inlet portion 542a are arranged side by side in the left-right direction. The thread guide portion 546 is configured as a guide passage that allows the thread member of the incorrect ball to move toward the blade tip portion (predetermined position) of the cutting blade 550 when the incorrect ball is fired.

As shown in FIG. 13C, the cutting blade 550 has a flat plate-shaped base end portion 553 and a flat plate-shaped first tip end portion that is connected to the base end portion 553 and extends in the same plane as the base end portion 553. 551 and the proximal end 5
And a flat plate-shaped second tip portion 552 which is connected to 53 and is bent rearward from the base end portion 553. The first tip portion 551 and the second tip portion 552 are vertically arranged side by side.
A gap portion 554 formed between 51 and 552 (boundary) serves as a cutting portion for cutting the thread member of the incorrect sphere. The tip end surface 551a (right side surface) of the first tip end portion 551 and the tip end surface 552a (right side surface) of the second tip end portion 552 guide the thread member of the incorrect ball into the gap portion 554 so that the gap portion 554 is formed.
It is formed as an inclined surface that inclines downward toward.

The cutting blade 550 is fixed to the cover member 534 via the fixing plate 548 while being housed in the housing recess 534 a formed on the back surface of the cover member 534. The cutting blade 550 is fixed in the accommodation recess 534a by a fixing plate 548 that engages with the cover member 534. The fixed plate 548 is disposed on the rear side of the cutting blade 550 fitted in the accommodation recess 534a.

The accommodating recess 534a has a shape that allows the cutting blade 550 to be fitted therein, and the cover member 534.
It is formed to be recessed. The housing recess 534a is a recess formed so as to follow the outer shape of the cutting blade 550. When the cutting blade 550 is fitted in the housing recess 534a, the cutting blade 5
The movement of 50 in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction is restricted. In addition, the cutting blade 550 has the housing recess 53.
When installed in 4a, the cutting edge portion such as the gap portion 554 of the cutting blade 550 is located at the recessed position (position toward the left) of the thread guiding portion 546.

In this way, the cutting blade 550 has the cutting edge portion thereof directed to the right side and the thread guiding portion 54.
It is arranged so as to be exposed at 6 (see FIG. 13A).

In the cutting mechanism 544 configured as described above, when the incorrect ball to which the thread member is attached is launched by the ball launching device 530, the thread member of the incorrect ball passes through the thread guide portion 546 and the cutting blade 550. Is guided into the gap 554 of the cutting blade 550. The thread member biting into the gap portion 554 is pulled and cut by the firing force of the illegal ball. The yarn guide portion 546 of the cutting mechanism 544 is connected to the inlet portion 542a of the guide passage 542 of the supply passage 540 so as to be connected to the inlet portion 54.
Since the cutting blade 550 is cut out on the side of 2a and the cutting blade 550 is arranged at the back of the thread guiding portion 546, it is possible to cut the thread member of the illegal ball without obstructing the flow of the game ball. Becomes

The supply channel 540 is configured to guide the game balls stored in the upper plate 21 to the right side and then to the rear side to supply the game balls to the firing position of the ball launching device 530, and the launch rail 533 launches from the launch position. It is configured to guide the played game ball to the left side. The yarn guiding portion 546 is formed so as to be connected to the left side portion of the inlet portion 542a of the guiding path 542, and the cutting blade 550 is arranged so that the cutting edge portion thereof faces the right side. In this way, the thread guiding portion 546 is provided on the side portion of the entrance portion 542a on the game ball firing direction side, and the cutting edge portion of the cutting blade 550 is provided in the direction opposite to the game ball firing direction, so that the thread member of the illegal ball is twisted. It is possible to surely cut.

[Fal ball catch unit]
With reference to FIG. 14 to FIG. 17, a foul ball catch unit 5 capable of catching a foul ball.
Details of 60 will be described. The foul ball is a game ball that has been launched by the ball launching device 530 but does not enter the game area 32. FIG. 14A is a front view (a) and an exploded view (b) of the foul ball catch unit 560. FIG. 14B is a rear view (a) and a rear perspective view (b) of the foul ball catch unit 560. FIG. 15 shows a foul ball catch unit 56.
0 is a horizontal sectional view (a) and a part member 560b is a horizontal sectional view (b). Note that the upper diagram of FIG. 15A is the same as FIG. 14B (a). FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the foul ball catch unit 560 as seen from diagonally above. FIG. 17 is a partially enlarged front view of the front frame 12 from which the foul ball catch unit 560 is removed.

The foul ball catching unit 560 is a combination of a base member 560a and a part member 560b connected to the back side of the base member 560a from the rear side. Base member 5
By being installed on the front frame 12, the 60a contacts the installation surface 598 (FIG. 17) of the front frame 12 to form various game ball flow paths 590 (590a-590d). Further, an inter-base-part flow path 591 is formed between the base member 560a and the parts member 560b. In addition,
The foul ball catching unit 560 includes a body portion 569 having a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front, and a drop-out ball collecting portion 570 located on the left side of the body portion 569. Drop payout ball recovery unit 57
When the glass frame 15 is in the open state, 0 collects game balls that flow out from the prize ball payout opening 443 (FIGS. 4 and 12) and fall downward.

First, the base member 560a will be described. The base member 560a includes a flat plate-shaped front surface portion 561 (front plate), and a flat plate-shaped rolling portion 56 provided vertically at the upper portion of the front surface portion 561 at the rear.
4 (rolling plate) and the base side box portion 56 provided at the rear in the lower central portion of the front surface portion 561.
5 and. The front surface portion 561 is provided with three window portions 561a for visually recognizing the rear side. The window portion 561a also has a function of preventing accumulation of static electricity. Base side box part 56
5, the front is an opening in the front surface portion 561. The upper end surface 594 of the base side box portion 565 is an inclined surface on which the game ball can roll to the left.

In addition, the base member 560a is provided on the right side of the opening of the base side box portion 565, and is located on the front surface portion 56
1. A base side reinforcing rib 566, which is an annular enclosure vertically provided in the lower right part of 1, and a part support portion 567 and a right side flow path, which are arranged at positions opposite to the base side reinforcing rib 566 with respect to the front surface portion 561. And a forming portion 568. The part support portion 567 and the right flow passage forming portion 568 are provided vertically at the rear in the lower right portion of the front surface portion 561.

The parts support portion 567 has a shape of an “F” rotated by 90 degrees when viewed from the rear (FIG. 14B (a)), and has a long plate portion 567a and a short plate portion that support the parts member 560b from below. Part 56
7b. The long plate portion 567a and the short plate portion 567b both have the same width in the front-rear direction and extend from the front surface portion 561, but the length (height) in the vertical direction is the same as that of the long plate portion 567a. Is longer than the short plate portion 567b. The long plate portion 567a is arranged in parallel with the short plate portion 567b and is arranged on the right side of the short plate portion 567b.

The front surface portion 561 has an upper edge portion 562 that extends rearward perpendicularly to the front surface portion 561.
The flat plate-shaped rolling portion 564 is inclined downward to the lower right in the longitudinal direction, and the game ball can roll to the lower right side. The rolling portion 564 extends substantially parallel to the upper edge portion 562, but the width of the upper edge portion 562 in the front-rear direction is shorter than the width of the rolling portion 564 in the front-rear direction (short direction). Therefore, the rolling portion 564
A foul ball can flow into.

The base side reinforcing rib 566 is provided on the part supporting portion 567 and the right flow passage forming portion 568, and
Since they face each other with 61 sandwiched therebetween, the flow channel wall of the right flow channel 590c formed between the part support portion 567 and the right flow channel formation portion 568 is reinforced. Further, the base-side reinforcing ribs 566 prevent sink marks during molding (a defect such as a dent caused by molding shrinkage).

Further, the base member 560a includes a left bottom surface portion 571a located on the left side and a left bottom surface portion 5
A stepped bottom surface portion 571 having a right bottom surface portion 571b at a lower position on the right side of 71a is provided. The bottom surface portion 571 extends vertically in the lower end portion of the front surface portion 561. The guide channel 590a formed on the left bottom surface portion 571a and the guide channel 590a (the left bottom surface portion 5
71a), the saucer portion 572 extending from the front surface portion 561 constitutes a falling payout ball collecting portion 570. The saucer portion 572 has an L-shaped cross section in the front-rear direction, and has a prize ball payout opening 443 (FIG. 4, FIG.
The game ball that has spilled from (FIG. 12) is accepted and allowed to flow down to the rear guide passage 590a. The bottom portion of the saucer portion 572 may be inclined downward to the rear so that the game balls flow down to the guide flow path 590a.

In addition, the base member 560a has a central flow path forming portion 589 that extends vertically rearward from the front surface portion 561. The central flow path forming portion 589 forms the central flow path 590b together with the installation surface 598 (FIG. 17) of the front frame 12 and the front surface portion 561. Further, the central flow path forming portion 589 functions as a partition plate that partitions the guide flow path 590a and the central flow path 590b.

In addition, the base member 560a is provided on the installation surface 598 (FIG. 17) of the front frame 12 2
Two engaging hooks 575 that are pressed into and attached to one engaged portion 598a, 598b
a and 575b.

Next, the part member 560b will be described. The part member 560b is the base member 56.
The plate-shaped part main body 576 is arranged in parallel to the flat plate-shaped front part 561 of 0a, and the mounting part 578 arranged on the upper part of the part main body 576 and attached to the front part 561. The parts body 576 has an upper end 576a that comes into contact with a step 564a at the rear end of the rolling part 564 (rolling plate). The mounting portion 578 is formed in a convex shape in front of the part main body portion 576, and is attached to the cylindrical screw receiving portion 561b (FIG. 14B (b)) of the front surface portion 561 from the rear by screwing. The mounting portion 578 has a through hole 578a through which the screw passes.

In addition, the part member 560b has a part side box part 579 provided in the lower part of the part body part 576 at the front. The upper end surface 580 of the parts-side box portion 579 is an inclined surface on which the game ball can roll to the left. The side end surface 581 of the parts side box portion 579 is
It faces the side end surface (not shown) of the base side box portion 565 and is in contact with it on the right side. The side end surface 581 of the parts-side box portion 579 is inclined on the left side so that it is located rearward toward the left side, but the side end surface of the base-side box portion 565 is not inclined. Therefore, a narrow slit-shaped gap 592 exists on the left side between the base side box portion 565 and the parts side box portion 579 (FIG. 15A). In addition, the upper end surface 58 of the parts side box portion 579
The width of 0 in the front-rear direction is slightly narrower (shorter) toward the tip 580a (left end) of the upper end surface 580.
However, the width of the upper end surface 594 of the base side box portion 565 is constant.

The side end surface 581 of the parts-side box portion 579 has an opening 581a for screwing the parts-side box portion 579 to the base-side box portion 565, and a square shape (right) protruding upward to the right (
A sharp portion 581b of one side) and an elongated protruding engagement portion 584 that engages with the side end surface of the base side box portion 565 are provided. The engaging portion 584 may have a function of positioning the part member 560b. The base of the sharp portion 581b is supported from below by the short plate portion 567b of the part support portion 567, and the tip of the sharp portion 581b contacts the long plate portion 567a of the part support portion 567 (FIG. 14B (a)).

Further, the part member 560b includes a protrusion 585 provided in front of the right end of the flat plate-shaped part body 576, and a reinforcing rib 586 provided below the protrusion 585 to support and reinforce the protrusion 585. Prepare

The reinforcing rib 586 is a right plate member 586 that supports the lower right portion and the lower left portion of the protrusion 585, respectively.
a and a left side plate member 586b. The width of the protruding portion 585 in the front-rear direction is equal to the reinforcing rib 586 (
It is shorter than the width of the two plate members 586a, 586b) in the front-rear direction. The front side of the two plate-shaped members 586 a and 586 b that is not connected to the protrusion 585 is the base member 56.
It contacts the upper edge 562 of 0a. Both of the two plate-shaped members 586a and 586b have the same width in the front-rear direction and contact the front surface portion 561 of the base member 560a (FIG. 15A).
. The right side plate member 586a and the left side plate member 586b are arranged substantially parallel to each other in the vertical direction, but the length (height) in the vertical direction of the right side plate member 586a is lower than that of the left side plate member 586b.
Is long. The long plate portion 567a of the part support portion 567 is arranged in parallel with the right plate member 586a in contact with the right plate member 586a (FIG. 15 (a)). Support the bottom from below.

The protrusion 585 (sphere stopper) is provided on the upper edge portion 56 of the base member 560a (front surface portion 561).
It becomes a barrier projecting above 2 (FIGS. 14A (a) and 14B (a)). As described above with reference to FIG. 12, the foul ball (falling ball) returning from the firing ball guide passage 33 at the upper left of the foul ball catching unit 560 collides with the protrusion 585 and advances beyond the protrusion 585 to the right. It is difficult to enter the foul ball catch unit 560. In addition, the foul ball returning from the launch ball guide passage 33, the left plate member 58 of the reinforcing rib 586 as a barrier.
There is also a case where it collides with 6b and flows into the foul ball catch unit 560.

Further, the protrusion 585 has a hollow chevron shape (a plate is folded at three places as a whole (
It has a substantially “C” shape that does not close at the lower left when viewed from the front) and is hollow, so that it is possible to reduce the generation of collision noise between the foul ball and the protrusion 585, and to adjust the height of the collision noise appropriately. Further, the space defined by the two plate members 586 a and 586 b of the reinforcing rib 586 and the protrusion 585 is
The collision sound between the foul ball and the protrusion 585 can be trapped and attenuated.

[Flow and flow path of game balls (in foul ball catch unit)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 14 to FIG. 17 (in particular, FIG. 14B (a)), the flow and flow path of the game ball (foul ball) in the foul ball catch unit 560 will be described.

The foul ball can flow into the rolling portion 564 and roll. As a foul ball here, a foul ball (falling ball) that has returned from the launch ball guide passage 33 and collided with the projection 585 and bounced back.
, A foul ball that has returned from the firing ball guide passage 33 but has not reached the protrusion 585 (falling ball), or a foul ball that has a slow firing speed and cannot go beyond the foul ball catch unit 560 (a firing ball, a direct ball). ). The game ball that has rolled down the rolling portion 564 is
4 and the protrusion 585 into the large opening 595a. In addition, a foul ball that collides with the protrusion 585 and bounces back, or a fal ball with a slow firing speed (a firing ball or a direct ball) may directly flow into the large opening 595a.

The game ball (foul ball) that has passed through the large opening 595a flows into the base part-to-part flow path 591 located on the upper end surface 580 of the part side box part 579 and the upper end surface 594 of the base side box part 565. The flow path 591 between base parts is formed by the upper end surfaces 580, 594, the front surface part 561 of the base member 560a, and the part body part 576 of the part member 560b. The flow path 591 between base parts is inclined downward to the left so that the game ball can roll to the left.

The width in the front-rear direction of the upper end surface 594, that is, the amount of rearward protrusion of the base-side box portion 565 is
Since it is longer than the width of the upper edge portion 562 in the front-rear direction, the game ball can fall on the upper end surface 594 of the base side box portion 565. Further, the width of the flow path 591 between the base parts (here, the upper end surface 5
80 and the upper end surface 594 are substantially equal to the total width in the front-rear direction) and the width of the rolling portion 564 in the front-rear direction (short direction). In addition, the parts side box part 579 and the base side box part 565.
One of them (that is, one of the upper end surface 580 and the upper end surface 594) may be omitted, but in that case, the width of the other end of the upper end surface 580 and the upper end surface 594 is set in the front-back direction of the rolling portion 564 (short. direction)
May be approximately equal to the width of. In addition, the total width in the front-rear direction of the upper end surface 580 and the upper end surface 594 is
If the amount is smaller than the diameter of the game ball (the amount by which the game ball does not fall), it can be shorter than the width of the rolling portion 564 in the front-rear direction (short direction).

The game sphere that has passed through the flow path 591 between the base parts flows into the central flow path 590b on the right of the central flow path forming portion 589. The central flow path 590b is located between the installation surface 598 of the front frame 12 and the front surface portion 561 of the base member 560a, and the base side box portion 565 and the parts side box portion 579.
Of the central flow path forming part 589. The central flow path 590b extends substantially vertically.

The game sphere that has passed through the central flow path 590b is the bottom flow path 5 formed on the right bottom surface part 571b.
It flows into 90d. As described above, the game balls that have fallen out of the prize ball payout opening 443 (FIGS. 4 and 12) and have entered the saucer portion 572 also pass through the guide passage 590a formed on the left bottom surface portion 571a, After that, it flows into the bottom channel 590d at a position lower than the guide channel 590a.

The game ball that has passed through the bottom flow path 590d passes through the discharge port 593, flows into the first inlet 461 (FIG. 6A) of the lower plate unit 29, and flows into the lower plate 23 from the first inlet 461.

In addition, a foul ball from the right side (launch ball or direct ball) whose firing speed is very slow, or a rare fal ball (falling ball) that exceeds the protrusion 585 from the left side, forms the right side flow path with the part support portion 567. It can flow into the small opening 595b between the portions 568. The small opening 595b is the large opening 5
It is smaller than 95a.

The game ball that has passed through the small opening portion 595b flows into the right side flow passage 590c formed between the right side flow passage forming portion 568 and the long plate portion 567a of the parts supporting portion 567. The game sphere that has passed through the right flow path 590c passes through the discharge port 593, and the first inlet 461 of the lower plate unit 29 (see FIG.
)), And flows into the lower tray 23 from the first inlet 461. The small opening 595b and the right flow passage 590c can be omitted and may be configured not to exist.

In addition, from the above-mentioned three window portions 561a of the base member 560a, respectively,
90a, the flow path 591 between the base parts, and the bottom flow path 590d are visible, and the guide flow path 59
0a, flow path 591 between base parts, bottom flow path 590d when the game ball is clogged window 5
It is also possible to insert a thin rod or the like from 61a to clear the clogging of the game ball.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the rolling portion 564, the part support portion 567, the right flow passage forming portion 56.
8, the width in the front-rear direction of the central flow path forming portion 589, the reinforcing ribs 586 (two plate-shaped members 586a, 586b) are substantially the same, but can be appropriately changed as long as they are within the diameter of the game ball. is there.

[Counterfeit measures]
Next, with reference to FIG. 14 to FIG. 17 (particularly, FIG. 15 and FIG. 16), the countermeasure against fraud (got countermeasure) in the foul ball catch unit 560 will be described.

As described above, in the ball launching device 530 (launching unit), the first fraud countermeasure means (first
Although the cutting mechanism 544 that cuts the thread member of the illegal ball is provided as the fraud countermeasure section), the foul ball catching unit 560 is provided with the second to fourth fraud countermeasure means (fraud countermeasure section) for performing the fraud countermeasure.

In addition, in the foul ball catching unit 560, fraud countermeasures against fraud (gotting) performed by the following procedure are performed. First, a thread member (fishing line or the like) is attached to two game balls to form a pair, and one of the pair of game balls is shot at a slow speed by the ball launching device 530, and the foul ball catch unit 560 is used as a foul ball. Drop it. Then, the other game ball of the pair is shot at a normal speed to enter the game area 32. Then, the thread member attached to the foul ball that has entered the lower plate 23 from the foul ball catch unit 560 is operated from the lower plate 23 to illegally win the game ball in the game area 32 to the winning opening. In this injustice, the motion of the hand operating the thread member is difficult to see by the lower plate 23, and it seems that the game ball is moving to the upper plate 21.

In addition, since the cutting mechanism 544 (first fraud prevention means) can often cut the thread member when the thread member is operated after the game ball is put in the game area 32 (even when the thread member cannot be cut at the time of firing). There is a case where the thread member attached to the foul ball cannot be cut.

As described above, between the base-side box portion 565 and the parts-side box portion 579, a slit-shaped (crevice-shaped) gap 592 is provided on the left side.
It becomes a fraud countermeasure means (second fraud countermeasure section).

The thread member attached to the foul ball that has entered the lower tray 23 through the large opening 595a of the foul ball catch unit 560 is placed on the upper end surface 580 of the part side box part 579 and the upper end surface 594 of the base side box part 565. It passes through the located base part flow path 591 from right to left, and passes through the central flow path 590b on the right of the central flow path forming portion 589 from top to bottom.
If the thread member attached to the foul ball is pulled by hand from the lower tray 23 in the above-mentioned illegal operation, the thread member is caught in the slit-shaped gap 592 and becomes difficult to operate and move.

As described above, in order to provide the slit-shaped gap 592, the parts-side box portion 57
The side end surface 581 of 9 is inclined so as to be located rearward as it goes to the left side, but the inclination is steep from the right side to the left side. Therefore, the inlet 592a of the gap 592 becomes wide, the thread member easily enters the gap 592, and the thread member attached to the foul ball is attached to the lower tray 2.
If the thread member is repeatedly operated by pulling or separating it from No. 3, the thread member is gradually caught in the slit-shaped clearance 592, and finally the narrow right side of the clearance 592 does not move, and further operations cannot be performed. Disappear.

Note that the upper end surfaces 580 and 594 may be provided with a number of vertical projections and depressions to form a rough surface, thereby increasing friction with the thread member and facilitating the thread member to be entangled in the gap 592. It is also possible to form the slit-shaped gap 592 by providing an inclination on the side end surface of the base side box portion 565 instead of the side end surface 581 of the parts side box portion 579.

Next, a slit-shaped cut 596a formed in the upper portion of the right flow path forming portion 568 (see FIG. 16).
) Is the third fraud countermeasure means (third fraud countermeasure section).

A launch ball (Far ball) with a very slow launch speed is fed from the small opening 595b to the right flow path 590.
After passing through c, it flows into the lower tray 23 of the lower tray unit 29. At this time, the thread member attached to the foul ball may enter the notch 596a and be caught, and it may be difficult to operate and move the thread member. Further, if the thread member attached to the foul ball is manually operated by pulling it from the lower tray 23, the thread member may enter the notch 596a and be caught.

Next, slit-shaped cuts 597a and 597b formed around the discharge port 593 (see FIG.
6) is the fourth fraud countermeasure means (fourth fraud countermeasure section). In this embodiment, the notch 5
97a is provided at the right end of the right bottom surface portion 571b. The notch 597b is provided in the lower end portion of the right flow path forming portion 568 and its peripheral members.

The foul ball is finally discharged to the lower plate unit 29 through the discharge port 593 of the foul ball catch unit 560. At this time, the thread member attached to the foul ball enters the notches 597a and 597b. It may be pinched and then difficult to manipulate and move. Further, if the thread member attached to the foul ball is manually operated by pulling it from the lower tray 23, the thread member may enter the cuts 597a and 597b and be caught.

In addition, in the foul ball catching unit 560, a cut or the like may be provided in the member around the other part where the thread member attached to the foul ball passes to serve as a countermeasure against fraud.

[Upper plate unit]
The upper plate unit 20 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19.

FIG. 18 is a perspective view (a) of the upper plate unit 20 in a state where the effect button unit 750 is detached from the upper plate unit main body 680 and a top view of the upper plate unit 20. FIG. 19 is an exploded view of the upper plate unit 20 (upper plate unit main body 680). In addition, the effect button unit 750
Details of (effect button 25) will be described later based on FIGS. 20, 21, 22, and the like.

The upper plate unit 20 (upper plate unit main body 680) includes a right lens member 681, a left lens member 682, an operation panel 690, an upper plate frame 700, an intermediate member 720, a button base 730, and a rear member 740. , (FIG. 19).

In the upper plate frame 700, a right lens member 681 and a left lens member 682 are arranged on the front side, and an operation panel 690 is arranged on the upper side. Further, in the upper plate frame 700, an intermediate member 720 is arranged on the right rear side, and an LED board 726 is arranged on the left rear side. Further, in the upper plate frame 700, a button base 730 is arranged on the rear side on the substantially lower side, and a rear member 740 is further arranged on the rear side. The upper plate frame 700 accommodates the intermediate member 720, the LED substrate 726, and the button base 730, and the operation panel 690 from above and the rear member 7 from behind.
It is covered with 40. The LED substrate 726 may also be included in the category of the intermediate member 720.

Each of the right lens member 681 and the left lens member 682 has a front upper plate lens that is transparent and diffuses light from the rear, and a lens frame arranged behind the upper plate lens.

The operation panel 690 is provided with the above-mentioned balance display unit 690a in the right button installation unit 691.
, A ball lending button 690b and a return button 690c, and the left button setting portion 692 is provided with the above-mentioned volume adjusting buttons 690d and 690e and the cross key 690f.

The operation panel 690 also has an annular effect button housing portion 694 that houses the effect button unit 750. The effect button accommodating portion 694 has a scale-like decoration attached to the surface. The effect button unit 750 is inserted and accommodated in the opening 694a of the effect button housing portion 694. The front plate portion 696 that constitutes the front portion of the effect button housing portion 694 has a central sharpened portion 696a that is sharpened forward in the center. The front plate portion 696 includes a right plate 696b and a left plate 6.
96c, and the point where the right plate 696b and the left plate 696c are connected is the central sharpened portion 696a.
Becomes

As shown in FIG. 19, the upper plate frame 700 includes a bottom plate portion 701, a front surface portion 702 extending substantially upward from the bottom plate portion 701, and an upper plate portion 7 connected to the front surface portion 702 from the rear of the front surface portion 702.
03, and a substantially C-shaped operation panel accommodating portion 704 connected to the front portion 702 and the upper plate portion 703.

The front plate portion 702 of the upper plate frame 700 is provided with a speaker opening 702a into which the lower left speaker 19d is inserted. A right lens base 706 to which the right lens member 681 is attached from the front and a left lens base 707 to which the left lens member 682 is attached from the front are connected to the front surface portion 702.

The right lens base 706 has an opening 706a that allows the light of each LED of the rear LED substrate 721 to pass therethrough, and has a mounting portion 708 at the rear portion. The left lens base 707 is a rear LE.
An opening 707a (not shown in FIG. 19) through which the light of each LED of the D substrate 726 passes.
And a mounting portion 709 at the rear. The attachment portion 709 is attached to the front frame base unit 480 (FIG. 7).

Further, a lower step portion 710 and an upper step portion 712 having a substantially L-shaped cross section in a cross section in the front-rear direction and in the up-down direction (cross section perpendicular to the left-right direction) are provided at the upper center of the front surface portion 702 (FIG. 23). (See also (c) and FIG. 24 (a)). The upper step portion 712 is formed at the upper end of the lower step portion 710, and the upper step portion 712 has a saucer shape and is concave when viewed from the front (see also FIG. 24 (a)). .. The width of the upper step portion 712 in the left-right direction is smaller than the width of the lower step portion 710 in the left-right direction. Note that the lower step portion 710 and the upper step portion 712 are arranged behind the front plate portion 696 of the operation panel 690, and thus are covered and shielded by the front plate portion 696 of the operation panel 690. Therefore, unless the front plate portion 696 is transparent, the player can move from the front to the lower step portion 710 and the upper step portion 712.
Can't be seen. Note that the front plate portion 696 may be configured to be transparent for the purpose of producing effects. Details of the lower part 710 and the upper part 712 will be described later.

On the right side of the upper plate portion 703 of the upper plate frame 700, the plate-shaped communication terminal storage 743 (smartphone storage) of the rear member 740 is in contact with the opening 703a in which the upper plate operation portion 735 is inserted and arranged from below. And a receiving portion 703b (right end portion).

The intermediate member 720 of the upper plate unit 20 (upper plate unit main body 680) has an LED board 721 arranged on the right side behind the right lens base 706 of the upper plate frame 700, and an upper portion substantially holding the LED board 721. And an LED substrate cover 723 covering the rear side. Each of the plurality of LEDs provided on the LED substrate 721 is arranged at a position corresponding to the opening 706a of the right lens base 706. Further, the intermediate member 720 has a mounting portion 722 behind the LED board cover 723. The attachment portion 722 is attached to the front frame base unit 480 (FIG. 7). Further, the intermediate member 720 has a receiving portion 724 that conforms to the holding portion 736 of the upper tray operating portion 735 and receives.

The button base 730 of the upper plate unit 20 (upper plate unit main body 680) has a main body portion 731.
The opening / closing mechanism 732, the relay board 737, and the left and right reinforcing plates 739a, 73
9b (reinforcing member, reinforcing means) is installed.

The main body portion 731 of the upper plate unit 20 includes the effect button unit 750 (effect button 2
5) a bottom portion 731a on which is placed, a right side portion 731b provided on the right side of the bottom portion 731a,
Equipped with. A box portion 731c having three rooms (spaces) partitioned by walls is provided at the center of the bottom portion 731a. Further, the right side reinforcing plate mounting portion 731 to which the right side reinforcing plate 739a is attached by screwing is attached to the right end portion and the left end portion of the bottom portion 731a, respectively.
d and a left side reinforcing plate mounting portion 731e to which the left side reinforcing plate 739b is attached by screwing are arranged.

In the body portion 731, a bottom portion 731a to which the effect button unit 750 (effect button 25) is attached, a right side reinforcement plate attachment portion 731d, and a left side reinforcement plate attachment portion 731e.
Is inclined downward to the front side, and the production button unit 750 is also inclined downward to the front side as a whole,
The front portion of the effect button unit 750 is formed to be lower than the rear portion (see also FIG. 23 (b)).

The opening / closing mechanism 732 is installed on the right side portion 731b of the main body 731, and is operated by the player to allow the game balls of the upper plate 21 to flow down to the lower plate 23, and an upper plate operating unit 735. A holding portion 736 for holding the 735, an opening / closing lever 733 for moving (operating) the opening / closing member 734 in accordance with the operation of the upper plate operating portion 735, and an attachment on the opposite side of the opening / closing lever 733 from the upper plate operating portion 735. The opening / closing member 734 is provided. When the opening / closing member 734 is opened, the upper plate 21 to the lower plate 23 are passed through the passage 485 (FIG. 8 (d)) and the second inlet 465 (FIG. 5 (b), FIG. 6 (a)). A game ball flows down to.

The relay board 737 relays a detection signal related to the operation of the player's effect button unit 750 (effect button 25) to the effect control device 300 (described later), or the effect button unit 75.
Power may be supplied to the LED of 0 (effect button 25).

In the present embodiment, the relay board 737 includes the LED board 721, the cross key 690f, volume control buttons 690d and 690e, and the optical sensor 77 of the button unit base 770 described later.
It is electrically connected to each of the 2 etc.

As for the LED board 721, the cross key 690f, the volume adjusting buttons 690d and 690e, the optical sensor 772 of the button unit base 770, and the like, the configuration related to the performance is performed via the relay board 737 (sub-control). Board). The LED board 72 is configured by connecting to the effect control device 300 (sub board) via the relay board 737.
1, it is possible to facilitate the wiring process for connecting each of the cross key 690f, the volume adjusting buttons 690d and 690e, the optical sensor 772 of the button unit base 770, and the like to the effect control device 300 (sub-board). Moreover, the space for wiring for connecting each of these configurations to the performance control device 300 (sub-board) can be saved.

In the present embodiment, the relay board 737 is not connected to the effect control device 300 (sub-board) like the balance display section 690a, the ball lending button 690b, and the return button 690c (configuration not related to effect). And are not electrically connected to. However, even if the configuration is not directly connected to the effect control device 300 (sub-board), by electrically connecting to the relay board 737, the effect control devices 300 (sub-boards) are once aggregated, and the effect control device 300 (sub-board). It is also possible to have a configuration in which the wiring is drawn out toward a substrate different from the above). With such a configuration, the wiring process can be simplified and the space for wiring can be saved.

The reinforcing plates 739a and 739b (reinforcing members, reinforcing means) reinforce the operation panel 690 by supporting the operation panel 690 from below. Reinforcement plates 739a, 739b
Is for operating the effect button unit 750 (effect button 25) or the like.
It is possible to prevent the sinking of 90.

The rear member 740 of the upper plate unit 20 (upper plate unit main body 680) includes a back plate 742, a lower speaker 19d attached from the front at the left part of the back plate 742, and an upper plate 21 provided above the back plate 742. A plate-shaped communication terminal storage 743 is provided above the back plate 742 and to the right of the upper plate 21. The back plate 742 is provided with an opening / closing member opening 742a that penetrates the opening / closing member 734 so as to be movable left and right and extends in the left-right direction. The upper plate 21 includes an upper plate bottom portion 21a and an upper plate wall portion 21b extending substantially vertically from the upper plate bottom portion 21a.

The communication terminal storage 743 has three protruding portions 743a, 743b, 743c and a raised portion 74.
3d, and sandwiched between the groove between the ridges 743a and 743b, the groove between the ridges 743b and 743c, and the groove between the ridge 743c and the raised portion 743d A communication terminal can be placed. Since the length of each groove in the left-right direction is different, it is easy to place the communication terminal according to the model (width of the communication terminal). In addition, the ridges 743a that form the grooves,
The lengths of 743b and 743c in the vertical direction may be different from each other.
Since the lengths in the vertical direction are different, it is easy to place the communication terminal. The communication terminal storage 743 is behind the button installation portion 691 on the right side of the operation panel 690, and is located on the upper plate frame 70.
It is fitted and disposed between the upper plate portion 303 of 0 and the right lens base 706.

[Production button unit (production button)]
Details of the effect button unit 750 (effect button 25) will be described with reference to FIGS. 20, 21, and 22 (also refer to FIG. 25B if necessary). FIG. 20 is an exploded view of the effect button unit 750 (effect button 25). FIG. 21 shows an effect button unit 750.
It is a front view (a) and a perspective view (b) of (effect button 25). FIG. 22 is a plan view (a) of the effect button unit 750 (effect button 25) seen from above, and a perspective view (b) showing the operation button 750 with the effect button unit 750 and the right button installation portion 691 removed.
).

The effect button unit 750 (effect button 25), which is combined in an overlapping manner, has a button frame 752, a button lens 754, a button lens decoration 756, an in-button lens upper portion 758, an in-button lens lower portion 760, and a reflector 762. Reflector base 764
And a button lower base 766 and a button unit base 770 (see FIG. 20).
. Between the button lens 754 and the button lower base 766, the button lens decoration 756, the in-button lens upper portion 758, the in-button lens lower portion 760, the reflector 762, and the reflector base 764 form the effect button unit 750 (the effect button 25 ) Are overlapped with each other in the central axis direction (see FIG. 20).

Button lens 754 and button lower base 766, and button lens decoration 7 between them
The button 56 is supported by the button unit base 770 via a coil spring (elastic member) not shown in FIG. As will be described later, a button frame 752,
The in-button lens upper portion 758, the in-button lens lower portion 760, the reflector 762, and the reflector base 764 are fixed members that are fixed with respect to the button unit base 770 and do not move by the operation of the player. Therefore, the movable members are the button lens 754, the button lens decoration 756, and the button lower base 766. These movable members are the button lenses 7 of the player.
By pushing 54, it moves from the initial position along the central axis direction (in the substantially vertical direction) and sinks downward, and is urged by a coil spring (not shown) and urged by the central axis unless the player operates it. Move up along the direction to return to the initial position.

The button frame 752 includes a front decorative portion 752a arranged on the front side and a button lens 754.
752b into which the button is inserted and arranged, and the receiving portion 77 on the outside of the button unit base 770.
A plurality of leg portions 752c inserted into 0f and engaged therewith. The button frame 752 is
The outer peripheral surface (the inclined surface 75
1c) is inclined downward in the radial direction, but has a generally annular shape.

An inner peripheral end portion 751a on the radially inner side of the opening 752b has an outer peripheral end portion 751 on the outer side in the radial direction.
It is formed at a position higher than b in the central axis direction, and the inner peripheral end portion 751a is formed by bending downward from an inclined outer peripheral surface (inclined surface 751c). The tip portion bent downward is a flange portion 7 formed on a button lens body 754a described later.
It is configured to abut against 54b.

The inner peripheral end 751a on the radially inner side of the opening 752b to the outer peripheral end 751 on the radially outer side.
The inclined surface 751c toward b is formed with an inclination that is continuous with the inclined surface of the button lens 754 formed in a convex shape to be described later, and the player can see the button lens 754 and the button frame 752. It is said to be a design that makes the boundary part look natural.

The front decorative portion 752a is arranged above the central sharpened portion 696a of the operation panel 690. The button frame 752 is fixed to the button unit base 770 by a plurality of legs 752c, and does not move when the player operates the button lens 754.

The button lens 754 is engaged with the annular portion 766b (wall portion) of the pan-shaped (tub-shaped) button lower base 766. The button lens 754 includes a circular button lens body 754a that is bulged in the center, and a flange portion 754b in which the cross section in the radial direction of the button lens 754 is formed in an L shape at the hem portion of the button lens body 754a. , Is provided. An outer peripheral groove 754c is formed between the outer peripheral surface 754d of the button lens body 754a and the flange portion 754b. The button lens body 754a has an opening 752 formed in the button frame 752.
a part of the flange portion 754b (outer wall portion of the outer peripheral groove 754c) when arranged inside b.
Is located below the inner peripheral end 751a of the button frame 752. Therefore, even if the button lens 754 is biased by the coil spring, a part of the flange portion 754b abuts on the inner peripheral end portion 751a of the opening 752b, so that the button lens 754 jumps out above the button frame 752. Never.

As shown in FIGS. 21 (b) and 22 (a), the outer peripheral groove 754c is notched in the flange portion 754b so that the outer peripheral groove 754c is opened to the outside in the radial direction at a part of both sides of the button lens main body 754a in the left-right direction. A side cutout portion 754f (described later) is formed. Lateral notch 7
A screw receiving portion 754e (described later) is formed at the position 54f. Further, in front of the button lens body 754a, a front cutout portion 754g (described later) is formed in the flange portion 754b so that the outer peripheral groove 754c is opened outward in the radial direction. The side cutout portion 754f and the front cutout portion 754g are formed by aligning the positions in the circumferential direction with the lateral guide opening 766i and the front guide opening 766g formed in the button lower base 766, respectively (see FIG. 21 as well). reference).

Further, in the button lens body 754a, the flange portion 754b is recessed radially inward between the position of the side cutout portion 754f where the screw receiving portion 754e is formed and the position of the front cutout portion 754g. A flange recess 754h is formed. Also, the flange recess 7
54h is also formed at a position which is line-symmetric with respect to a straight line connecting the lateral cutouts 754f formed in the left-right direction. The flange recesses 754h form an avoiding portion that avoids the leg portion 752c extending downward from the button frame 752 toward the receiving portion 770f of the button unit base 770. 22A, the button unit base 77 is shown for convenience of explanation.
The receiver 770f at 0 is also shown.

In the button lens main body 754a, peripheral portions of the button lens main body 754a such as the outer peripheral groove 754c, the flange portion 754b, the screw receiving portion 754e, and the flange recess 754h are shielded by the above-mentioned button frame 752 so as not to be seen by the player. ing. Therefore, as will be described later, when the fluid is dropped on the effect button unit 750 and flows, the button frame 752 forms a shielding unit that shields the fluid flowing around the effect button unit 750 from the player.

As shown in FIG. 20, the button lens decoration 756 has a wristwatch-like shape as a whole, and has a character portion 756a indicating the character “PUSH”, a circular button lens decoration body 756b, and left and right band portions 756c. And left and right band end portions 756d and left and right button lens engaging portions 756e. Since the button lens 754 is transparent, the character "PUSH" in the character portion 756a arranged below the button lens 754 can be visually recognized. The left and right button lens engaging portions 756e are engaged with the annular portion 766b (wall portion) of the pan-shaped button lower base 766.

The in-button lens upper part 758, the in-button lens lower part 760, and the reflector 762 are combined to form an assembly (see FIG. 25B). The in-button lens upper part 758 having a disc shape has a plurality (eight) of protrusions 758a protruding outward in the radial direction on the outer peripheral surface. The protrusions 758a arranged at equal intervals of 45 degrees each have a locking portion 758b on the lower side, and there are a total of four locking portions 758b. Each locking portion 758b is inserted into a corresponding groove-shaped receiving portion 760b of the in-button lens lower portion 760, and an upper in-button lens upper portion 758 that can transmit light and a lower-in-button lens lens that can transmit light. The lower portions 760 are combined.

Further, a reflector 762 is attached to the upper part of the in-button lens 758 from below by screwing. The reflector 762 is made of metal or has a metal-plated surface and can reflect light. The in-button lens lower part 760 having a substantially cylindrical shape houses the reflector 762 therein. The in-button lens lower portion 760 includes two eaves portions 760a arranged at an angle of 180 degrees and leg portions 760c extending below the respective eaves portions 760a.

The reflector base 764 has an opening 764e at the bottom, has a mortar shape with the bottom removed, and the inner surface is a substantially conical surface. The reflector base 764 is made of metal or has an inner surface metal-plated. The reflector base 764 is subjected to irregular reflection processing, has irregularities 764a radially arranged in the radial direction, and irregularly reflects light.

The reflector base 764 includes an engagement receiving portion 764b with which each leg portion 760c of the in-button lens lower portion 760 is engaged. This allows the reflector base 764 to be attached to the lower portion of the lens 7 inside the button.
60 is placed. Here, the lower end of the in-button lens lower portion 760 is the reflector base 7
The reflector 762 contacts the upper side of the inner peripheral end of 64 (defines the opening 764e).
The lower end of the is inserted into the opening 764e (see FIG. 23 (b) and FIG. 25 (b)).

In addition, the reflector base 764 is provided with a fitting portion 764c at which the band end portions 756d of the button lens decoration 756 are slidably fitted at the outer peripheral end. As a result, the reflector base 7
64 is sandwiched between the two band end portions 756d of the button lens decoration 756. Then, when the player presses the button lens 754, each band end portion 756d slides on the fitting portion 764c as a groove in the central axis direction (substantially vertical direction).

Further, the reflector base 764 has a leg portion 764d that penetrates the button lower base 766 and engages with the button unit base 770. As a result, the reflector base 764, and by extension, the in-button lens upper portion 758, the in-button lens lower portion 760, and the reflector 762.
And are fixed to the button unit base 770.

The button lower base 766 has a pot-like (tub-like) shape, and has a disk-shaped bottom portion 766a, an annular portion 766b extending vertically upward from the bottom portion 766a, and an annular shape. A flange portion 766c (flange portion) extending radially outward from an upper end portion of the portion 766b. The button lower base 766 is a housing portion 766d formed inside the annular portion 766b in the radial direction.
The LED substrate 767 is housed in the bottom portion 766a of the. Collar portion 766c of the button lower base 766
The (flange portion) abuts the flange portion 754b of the button lens 754.

The disk-shaped LED substrate 767 has one center LED 767a arranged in the center and eight peripheral LEDs 767b arranged around the center LED 767a. On the LED board 767,
The lower end of the reflector 762 and the lower end of the reflector base 764 (around the opening 764e) are in contact with each other. The center LED 767a is arranged so as to be surrounded by the lower end portion of the reflector 762, and the eight peripheral LEDs 767b are arranged so as to surround the lower end portion of the reflector 762. That is, the center LED 767a is arranged radially inward of the lower end of the reflector 762,
The peripheral LEDs 767b are arranged radially outside the lower end of the reflector 762 and radially inward of the lower end of the reflector base 764 (see FIG. 25B).

The direct light from the center LED 767a and the indirect light that the direct light reflects from the reflector 762 mainly pass through the substantially transparent in-button lens upper part 758, the button lens decoration 756, and the button lens 754, and the effect button unit 750. Go out of. The direct light from the peripheral LEDs 767b and the indirect light that the direct light reflects on the reflector base 764 mainly pass through the in-button lens lower part 760, the button lens decoration 756, and the button lens 754, and are outside the effect button unit 750. Go out to.

The annular portion 766b of the button lower base 766 has button lens decorations 75 on both sides in the left-right direction.
6 of the button lens engaging portions 756e are arranged in contact with each other, and a screw hole portion 766 for screwing the screw receiving portion 754e by screwing the screw receiving portion 754e in contact with each other.
f (female screw), and a concave lateral guide port 766i arranged to face the engagement receiving portion 766e and the screw hole portion 766f on the outer side in the radial direction.

The screw receiving portion 754e formed on the button lens main body 754a is screwed into the screw hole portion 766f, so that the flange portion 754b of the button lens 754 is fixed to the button lower base 766.
It is pressed against the flange portion 766c (flange portion). Further, the button lens engaging portion 756e formed on the button lens decoration 756 includes an engagement receiving portion 766e located below the button lens engaging portion 756e and a screw located above the button lens engaging portion 756e. Receiver 754e
It is sandwiched between and fixed (see FIG. 21 (b)).

The screw hole portion 766f is disposed so as to straddle the engagement receiving portion 766e and the bottom portion of the lateral guide opening 766i.
The opening portion of the screw hole is formed so as to be slightly convex upward. Also, the screw hole 7
66f is formed to have an outer diameter size that fits in a screw receiving portion 754e formed in the button lens body 754a when viewed from above. Since it is inserted into the concave lateral guide port 766i, the screw receiving portion 754e also has a function of positioning in the circumferential direction when the button lens 754 is attached to the button lower base 766.

As described later, the horizontal guide port 766i allows the fluid material (liquid or the like) dropped on the effect button unit 750 to flow from the outer peripheral groove 754c of the button lens 754 to the upper plate unit body 68.
It guides to the inside of 0 without passing through the effect button unit 750.

Note that the fluid (such as liquid) that has fallen onto the button lens 754 is not covered by the button lens body 754a.
And goes into the outer peripheral groove 754c by descending toward the outer peripheral surface 754d. In addition, the operation panel 69
If the amount of the fluid (liquid or the like) that has dropped to 0 is low, it may go down the surface of the effect button housing portion 694 and beyond the button frame 752 to enter the outer peripheral groove 754c. Since the effect button unit 750 placed on the bottom portion 731a of the button base 730 that is inclined downward to the front side is inclined downward to the front side, as shown in FIG. 22 (a), it is behind the horizontal guide port 766i (behind the dotted line). The liquid material (liquid or the like) that has entered the outer peripheral groove 754c of (4) flows over the screw receiving portion 754e to the lateral guide port 766i. In addition, the fluid from the lateral guide port 766i is the button frame 75.
2 is mounted on the button frame mounting portion 694c on the panel side 694b (see FIG.
b)). Further, in the flange recess 754h, the outer peripheral groove 754c has a narrow gap (a wide gap) through which the fluid flows. However, the fluid is the flange recess 754h.
Above, the flow path formed between the inner peripheral end 751a of the button frame 752 and the outer peripheral surface 754d of the button lens body 754a can flow.

Further, the annular portion 766b of the button lower base 766 has a concave shape at the front position on the outer peripheral surface, and protrudes outward in the radial direction of the annular portion 766b from the outer peripheral surface of the annular portion 766b. A front guide port 766g is formed (see FIG. 21). In the present embodiment, the front guide port 766g is formed at the frontmost portion of the outer peripheral surface. The collar portion 766c (flange portion) is cut out at a position corresponding to the front guide port 766g. Therefore, the front guide port 766g
The upper part of is open.

Further, three ribs 776 are provided on the outer peripheral surface of the annular portion 766b surrounded by the concave protruding portion forming the front guide port 766g. Each of the ribs 776 is formed to extend in the vertical direction (from the upper side to the lower side) at substantially equal intervals, and each of the ribs 776 extends from the outer peripheral surface of the annular portion 766b from the upper side to the lower side. It is formed to have a high height.

With this structure, the front guide port 766g causes the fluid such as a liquid to flow from the outer peripheral groove 754c of the button lens 754 to the inside of the upper plate unit main body 680, as described later.
Guide without passing through. At this time, each of the three ribs 776 has a button lower base 766.
The front notch 7 of the button lens 754 is provided through the notch of the flange 766c (flange) of the button lens 754.
It facilitates the flow of fluid (such as liquid) from 54 g into the front guide port 766 g. Since the effect button unit 750 is inclined downward to the front side, as shown in FIG.
The fluid (liquid or the like) that has entered the outer peripheral groove 754c located in front of i (in front of the dotted line) flows from the front cutout 754g to the front guide port 766g.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the button lower base 766 includes a light shielding plate 768 extending downward from the bottom portion 766a and four spring shafts 766h. The light shielding plate 768 moves downward together with the button lower base 766 by the player's operation of pressing the button lens 754,
It is detected by the optical sensor 772 (effect button switch 25a) of the button unit base 770. The spring shaft 766h is accommodated in the spring chamber 770d of the button unit base 770 together with the coil spring in a state where a coil spring (not shown) is attached to the spring shaft 766h.

The button unit base 770 includes a storage frame 770a that stores the motor 771, a lower outer wall portion 770b and an upper outer wall portion 770c that extend downward or upward from the storage frame 770a along the central axis direction (substantially vertical direction), respectively. Equipped with. The storage frame 770a is mounted on the bottom portion 731a of the button base 730. The lower outer wall portion 770b is connected to the button base 730. The upper outer wall portion 770c is arranged around the annular portion 766b of the button lower base 766 so as to face the annular portion 766b (FIG. 25 (b)).

Further, the button unit base 770 includes four spring chambers 770d that accommodate the spring shafts 766h to which coil springs are attached, vertical holes 770e into which the leg portions 764d of the reflector base 764 are inserted, and leg portions of the button frame 752. Receiver 770 to which 752c is attached
f and. As a result, the button frame 752 and the reflector base 764 are fixed to the button unit base 770, and the button lower base 766 is fixed to the button unit base 77.
It is movably supported with respect to zero.

Further, the button unit base 770 has a plurality of mitigating members 773 for mitigating the collision when the button lower base 766 depressed by the player's operation of pressing the button lens 754 collides with the button unit base 770. The button unit base 770 has an optical sensor 772 that detects the light shielding plate 768 (described above) of the button lower base 766 when the button lower base 766 is depressed by the player's operation of pressing the button lens 754. The optical sensor 772 functions as a production button switch 25a described later that is turned on when the light blocking plate 768 blocks the light generated from the light irradiation unit and the light receiving unit cannot receive the light.

When the motor 771 stored in the storage frame 770a operates, the entire effect button unit 750 (effect button 25) vibrates, and an operation promotion notification that prompts the player to operate the effect button unit 750 (effect button 25). The performance can be executed. Button base 73
The zero box portion 731c is disposed below the motor 771 and can absorb noise of the motor 771.

[First storage section (water storage section)]
The 1st storage part 713 (water storage part) of the upper plate unit 20 is demonstrated with reference to FIG. 23 and FIG. FIG. 23 is a front view (a) of the upper plate unit 20, a cross-sectional view (b) of the cross section taken along the line AA of the front view (a) seen from the left side, and an enlarged main part of the cross-sectional view (b). Enlarged view of the main part (
c). In addition, FIG. 24 is a top view of the upper plate unit 20 (similar to FIG. 18B).
It is the sectional view which saw the section in the A line from the back side, and the front view (b) in the state where some members which constitute upper plate unit 20 were removed.

As shown in FIGS. 23A to 23C, in the upper plate unit 20, a front cutout portion 754g formed in the button lens body 754 and a front guide port 766g formed in the button lower base 766 are provided. Are assembled so as to face the front decorative portion 752a of the button frame 752. Further, a central sharpened portion 696a formed on the front plate portion 696 of the operation panel 690.
Then, the lower step portion 710 and the upper step portion 712 formed on the upper plate frame 700 are assembled so as to face each other. In addition, the front decoration portion 752a of the button frame 752 is enlarged so that the lower step portion 7
10 and the upper step 712, or the central sharpened portion 696a of the operation panel 690 may be elongated to face the front guide port 766g.

Also, as shown in FIG. 23B, in the button base 730 (main body 731), the upper end of the bottom portion 731a to which the effect button unit 750 (effect button 25) is attached, the right side reinforcement plate attachment portion 731d, and the left side reinforcement plate attachment. The portion 731e is inclined downward to the front side with respect to the bottom plate portion 701, and is provided with an inclination angle such that the front portion of the effect button unit 750 is arranged lower than the rear portion. That is, the effect button unit 750 is inclined so that the end portion on the player side is lower than the end portion on the board surface side.

As shown in FIGS. 19, 23A and 24A, the lower step portion 710 formed on the upper plate frame 700 includes a right lens base 706 and a left lens base 7 of the upper plate frame 700.
Between 07, that is, in the center of the front surface of the gaming machine, it is formed in a portion of the upper plate frame 700 protruding toward the player. The lower part 710 includes bottom surfaces 710a and 710b extending from the player side of the upper plate frame 700 toward the back side of the game machine and a back surface 710 extending above the game machine.
with c and.

When the central sharpened portion 696a of the front plate portion 696 of the operation panel 690 is transparent, the lower step portion 710 is formed.
The bottom surfaces 710a and 710b of the are visible to the player. In this case, in the lower step portion 710, the bottom surfaces 710a and 710b are formed in a substantially V shape when viewed from the player side, and the right side lens base 706 extending rightward of the upper plate frame 700 and the left side lens extending leftward. It is designed to be continuous with the base 707.

Further, the tip portion 710d, which is in the vicinity of the apex of the substantially V-shape of the lower step portion 710, is formed so as to project most forward (on the player side), and as described above, a cross section perpendicular to the left-right direction of the tip portion 710d. Has a substantially L shape.

The upper step portion 712 is formed continuously from the upper end 710u of the back surface portion 710c of the lower step portion 710, and has a bottom surface 712a extending from the player side toward the back of the game machine and a back surface 71 extending above the game machine.
2b and. In addition, the upper part 712 includes partition parts 712c and 712d in the left-right direction. The upper step portion 712 has a saucer shape by the bottom surface 712a, the back surface 712b, and the partition portions 712c and 712d, and is formed in a concave shape when viewed from the front (FIG. 21 (a)).
And also FIG. 24 (a)). The width of the upper step portion 712 in the left-right direction (the distance between the partition portion 712c and the partition portion 712d) is narrower than the width of the V-shaped lower step portion 710 that is widest in the left-right direction.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 23C, the outer peripheral surface 754d of the button lens main body 754 is in the front portion of the effect button unit 750 in a state where the respective parts of the upper plate unit 20 are assembled.
Communication space S between the outer side of the button frame 752, the outer side of the front guide port 766g formed in the annular portion 766b of the button lower base 766, and the inner side of the button frame 752 assembled so as to shield the both.
1 is formed. Water does not enter the rear side of the dotted line in Fig. 24 (c). The communication space S1 between the movable member (button lens 754, button lower base 766) and the fixed member (button frame 752) of the effect button unit 750 is a part of the flow path of the fluid (arrow in FIG. 23 (c)). Make up. In the communication space S1, when the player pushes the button lens 754, the flow passage width is widened in accordance with the movement of the movable member from the initial position to the lower side, and the fluid is easily flowed.

In addition, the button base 730 and the effect button unit 750 (the button unit base 77
0) is housed in the lower part 710 and the upper part 712 located in the foremost part of the upper plate frame 700.
A communication space S2 is formed between the outer side of and the inner side of the central sharpened portion 696a of the operation panel 690. The communication space S2 is formed between the upper plate frame 700 and the operation panel 690, is fixed, and the flow path width does not expand in accordance with the movement of the movable member.

Here, the communication space S1 constitutes a delay unit that delays the flow of the fluid. Communication space S
2 constitutes the 1st storage part 713 (delay means) which delays the flow of a fluid. In addition, the delay of the fluid includes the evaporation of the fluid accumulated in the first storage portion 713 from the gap (for example, the flow path to the first storage portion 713) between the constituent members of the upper plate unit body 680. Good.

Further, as shown in FIG. 23C, the lower edge portion 753 of the front decorative portion 752a of the button frame 752 and the upper edge portion 698a of the central sharpened portion 696a are in contact with each other, and the central sharpened portion of the operation panel 690 is formed. The lower edge portion 698b of 696a and the tip portion 710d of the upper plate frame 700 are in contact with each other. Therefore, the communication space S1 and the communication space S2 are cut off from the outside of the gaming machine, and the fluid does not flow out of the gaming machine.

As described with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21, the effect button unit 750 has the outer peripheral groove 754c in the button lens body 754a, and the front cutout portion 7 is provided on the front side of the outer peripheral groove 754c.
54 g is formed. The front cutout portion 754g is assembled in alignment with the front guide opening 766g formed in the button lower base 766. In addition, as described above, FIG.
As shown in (b) and (c), on the front side (player side) of the upper tray unit 20, the front cutout portion 754g, the front guide port 766g, and the lower step portion 71 formed on the upper tray frame 700.
0 and the upper part 712 are the front decoration part 752a in the button frame 752 and the operation panel 6.
90 is assembled so as to face the central sharpened portion 696a formed on the front plate portion 696.

According to such a structure, in the front portion of the effect button unit 750, the front cutout portion 754g of the outer peripheral groove 754c in the button lens 754 and the front guide port 766g formed in the button lower base 766 serve as operating means. It is possible to configure a fluidizing means capable of fluidizing a fluid flowing around the button lens 754 inside the gaming machine.

In addition, a communication space S1 formed between the outside of the front guide port 766g and the inside of the button frame 752, and / or between the outside of the lower step portion 710 and the upper step portion 712 and the inside of the central sharpened portion 696a. The communicating space S2 can configure a delay unit that delays the flow of the fluid that has flowed by the above-described flow unit.

Therefore, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, if there is a fluid that has dropped on the effect button 25, the surface of the button lens 754 that is arranged to be inclined forward (on the player side) flows toward the front side. Then, it flows into the outer peripheral groove 754c of the button lens 754. The fluid flowing into the outer peripheral groove 754c flows toward the front side, passes through the front cutout 754g, the front guide port 766g, and flows into the communication space S1. As a result, the flow of the fluid into the gaming machine (inside the upper plate unit 20) is delayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 24B, the communication space S2 (first
It flows into the storage part 713) and is stored here. In the communication space S2 (first storage part 713), the fluid accumulates on the lowermost lower step 710 and then on the upper step 712. When the volume of the fluid is large, after the communication space S2 is filled with the fluid, the fluid further passes over the upper step portion 712, travels on the back side of the upper step portion 712, and reaches the bottom plate portion of the upper plate frame 700. It is possible to accumulate in the space above the 701 and between the front portion 702 and the button base 730. That is, this space constitutes a third storage section as a delaying means for delaying the flow of the fluid.

[Second storage part (water storage part)]
The second storage portions 777a, 777b (water storage portion) of the upper plate unit 20 will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. FIG. 25 is a cross-sectional view (a) of the top plate unit 20 (similar to FIG. 18 (b)) taken along the line AA of the top view and a main part of the cross-sectional view (a) enlarged. It is a partial enlarged view (b). In addition, FIG. 26 is an enlarged view of a right side main part (a) showing an enlarged right side of a cross section obtained by cutting the effect button unit 750 and a peripheral portion thereof along the diametrical direction, and an enlarged left side main part showing an enlarged left side thereof. FIG. 6B is a top view showing a main part of the button base 730, and FIGS.

As described with reference to FIGS. 20, 21, and 23, the upper plate unit 20 includes the front cutout portion 754g formed in the button lens body 754 and the front guide opening formed in the button lower base 766. 766g and the front decorative portion 752a of the button frame 752 correspond to each other in position, and the central sharpened portion 696a of the operation panel 690 and the lower step portion 710 and the upper step portion 712 formed in the upper plate frame 700 are positional. It is assembled to correspond. The lateral notch 754f formed in the left-right direction of the outer peripheral groove 754c of the button lens 754 and the lateral guide opening 766i of the button lower base 766 are also formed so as to correspond in position.

As shown in FIG. 22B, the outer peripheral end 751b of the button frame 752 is provided in the opening wall 695 that defines the opening 694a formed in the effect button housing portion 694 of the operation panel 690.
A button frame mounting portion 694c for supporting the is provided. The button frame mounting portion 694c is formed so as to protrude in the radial direction toward the center of the substantially circular opening 694a. In addition, the button frame mounting portion 694c is radially outward (left and right) at a position corresponding to (opposing) the side cutout portion 754f and the lateral guide opening 766i formed in the effect button unit 750 fitted in the opening portion 694a. A panel-side recess 694b is formed so as to be recessed toward the outer side). In the present embodiment, the panel-side recess 694b accommodates a part of the lateral guide port 766i, but does not accommodate the lateral guide port 766i in a radial direction from the panel-side recess 694b so as to widen the flow path of the fluid. You can

Further, as shown in FIGS. 25B and 26A (see also FIG. 19), the bottom portion 731a of the button base 730 is formed in a concave shape surrounded by the side wall. Also, the bottom portion 731a
In the central area of the, partition portions 732a and 732b that support the effect button unit 750 and partition the bottom portion 731a are extended from the front side to the back side. Also, the partition parts 732a, 73
Partitions 732c and 732d extending in the left-right direction are formed so as to partition the space between 2b. The box portion 731c described above includes partition portions 732a and 732b and partition portions 732c and 732.
32d.

As a result, a bottom portion 730a is formed on the bottom portion 731a between the partition portion 732a and the bottom side wall 732e. Further, a bottom surrounding portion 730b is formed between the partition portion 732b and the bottom side wall 732f.

In addition, in the bottom portion 731a, the spring chamber 77 of the button unit base 770 in the effect button unit 750 is provided in each of the bottom portion surrounding portion 730a and the bottom portion surrounding portion 730b.
A spring chamber receiving portion 732g that supports 0d is erected upward from the bottom surface of the bottom portion 731a.

Outside the right side bottom wall 732e, a platform 730c is formed at a position lower than the upper end of the bottom wall 732e and higher than the bottom surface of the bottom 731a. In the base 730c,
A base surrounding portion 730e surrounded by the side wall is formed. A right side reinforcing plate mounting portion 731d, to which the lower end of the right side reinforcing plate 739a is attached, is erected upward from the bottom surface of the bottom side surrounding portion 730e in the base portion surrounding portion 730e.

Similarly, a table 730d is also formed outside the left side wall 732f, and a table 730d is formed with a table enclosing portion 730f. In the stand surrounding portion 730f,
The reinforcing plate attachment portion 731e is provided upright from the bottom surface of the base portion surrounding portion 730f toward the upper side.

As shown in FIG. 25 (b) and FIG. 26 (a), on the right side of the effect button unit 750, the inner peripheral end portion 751 a on the radially inner side of the opening 752 b of the button frame 752 is bent downward, The tip portion thereof comes into contact with the flange portion 754b formed on the button lens body 754a. Further, the outer peripheral end portion 751b on the outer side in the radial direction abuts a button frame mounting portion 694c formed in the opening portion 694a of the operation panel 690.

Therefore, the side cutout 754 formed in the outer peripheral groove 754c of the button lens body 754a.
f and the outside of the lateral guide opening 766i formed in the annular portion 766b of the button lower base 766,
A communication space S3 is formed between the button lens body 754a and the inside of the button frame 752 attached so as to cover the outer peripheral surface 754d. That is, the communication space S3 is provided between the button frame 752 and a portion (horizontal guide port 766i or the like) installed facing the button frame 752.

In this way, the communication space S3 between the movable member (button lens 754) and the fixed member (button frame 752) of the effect button unit 750 is the flow path of the fluid (arrow in FIG. 26A).
Form part of. The communication space S3 is operated by the player pressing the button lens 754.
As the movable member moves downward from the initial position, the width of the flow channel widens, and the fluid easily flows.

In addition, the button lower base 766 passes through the outer side in the radial direction and the panel side recess 694b and the opening wall 695 formed in the operation panel 690, and the outer side in the radial direction of the button unit base 770 and the right side reinforcing plate 739a (and the opening). A communication space S4 connected to the wall 695) is formed. That is, the communication space S4 is provided between the operation panel 690 and a portion (a button lower base 766, etc.) installed facing the operation panel 690, and the operation panel 69 is provided.
It is provided between the right side reinforcing plate 739a that abuts on 0 and a portion (button unit base 770 or the like) installed facing the right side reinforcing plate 739a.

The communication space S4 also constitutes a part of the flow path of the fluid (arrow in FIG. 26A). Communication space S
4 is further connected to a base portion surrounding portion 730e in which the right side reinforcing plate mounting portion 731d is formed.

The communication space S4 between the movable member (bottom button base 766) and the fixed member (operation panel 690) of the effect button unit 750 is moved downward from the initial position by the player's operation of pressing the button lens 754. However, when a fluid exists, the fluid is pushed or drawn into the movable member (bottom button base 766) to easily flow. The communication space S4 between the button unit base 770 and the right reinforcing plate 739a or the operation panel 690 is fixed and does not change according to the movement of the movable member.

Similarly, on the left side of the effect button unit 750, the side cutout 754f formed in the outer peripheral groove 754c of the button lens body 754a and the annular portion 76 of the button lower base 766 are similarly formed.
6b and the outer peripheral surface 754 of the button lens body 754a.
A communication space S5 is formed between the inner side of the button frame 752 attached so as to cover d. The movable member (button lens 754) and the fixed member (of the production button unit 750)
The communication space S5 between the button frames 752) constitutes a part of the flow path (arrow in FIG. 26B) of the fluid. In the communication space S5, when the player presses the button lens 754, the flow passage width is widened in accordance with the movement of the movable member downward from the initial position, and the fluid easily flows.

In addition, the button lower base 766 passes through the outer side in the radial direction, the panel side recess 694b formed in the opening 694a of the operation panel 690 and the opening wall 695, and the outer side in the radial direction of the button unit base 770 and the left reinforcing plate. A communication space S6 that is connected to 739b is formed. The communication space S6 is further connected to a base portion surrounding portion 730f in which the left side reinforcing plate mounting portion 731e is formed.

The communication space S6 between the movable member (bottom button base 766) and the fixed member (operation panel 690) of the effect button unit 750 is moved downward from the initial position by the player's operation of pressing the button lens 754. However, when a fluid exists, the fluid is pushed or drawn into the movable member (bottom button base 766) to easily flow. The communication space S6 between the button unit base 770 and the left reinforcing plate 739b is
It is fixed and does not change according to the movement of the movable member.

According to such a structure, in the lateral side portion of the effect button unit 750,
The side cutout portion 754f of the button lens 754 and the lateral guide port 766i formed in the button lower base 766 allow the fluid flowing around the button lens 754 as the operating means to flow inside the game machine. The flow means can be configured.

Further, communication spaces S3, S5 formed between the outside of the horizontal guide port 766i and the inside of the button frame 752, communication spaces S4, S6 formed between the operation panel 690 and the outside of the effect button unit 750, and Alternatively, the pedestal portion surrounding portion 730e and the bottom portion surrounding portion 730f can form a delay unit that delays the flow of the fluid flowing through the above-described flow unit.

Therefore, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, if there is a fluid (liquid or the like) that spreads and flows on the surface of the effect button 25, it flows from the outer peripheral surface 754d of the button lens 754 into the outer peripheral groove 754c of the button lens 754. can do. In addition, the operation panel 690
If the amount of fluid (such as liquid) flowing down the surface of the effect button housing portion 694 is large,
It may exceed the button frame 752 and enter the outer peripheral groove 754c. The fluid that has flowed into the outer peripheral groove 754c on the inner side of the lateral guide port 766i (rearward of the dotted line in FIG. 22A) is a circle of the side cutout 754f formed in the outer peripheral groove 754c and the button lower base 766. It passes through the lateral guide port 766i formed in the ring portion 766b and flows into the communication spaces S3, S5. Furthermore, FIG.
6 (a) and FIG. 26 (b), the fluid flows into the communication spaces S4 and S6, and
It is stored in the pedestal surrounding portion 730e and the pedestal surrounding portion 730f like the shaded portion of 6 (d). Then, as shown by the hatched portion in FIG.
30e and the pedestal enclosure portion 730f exceed the capacity, the fluid is bottom enclosure portion 730.
a and the bottom enclosure 730b. The partition parts 732a and 732
The fluid does not flow into the box portion 731c formed by b or the like.

In this way, the platform surrounding portion 730e and the platform surrounding portion 730f can configure the second storage portions 777a and 777b (delay means) that delay the flow of the fluid. Further, the bottom surrounding portion 730a and the bottom surrounding portion 730b can configure additional storage portions 778a and 778b (delay means for delaying the flow of the fluid) as buffers of the second storage portions 777a and 777b.

When the volume of the fluid is large, the bottom surrounding portion 730a and the bottom surrounding portion 730b are included.
After the (reservoir parts 778a, 778b) are filled with the fluid, the fluid becomes the bottom surrounding portion 73.
0a and the front wall upper end portion of the bottom surrounding portion 730b, and the front side of the front wall of the bottom surrounding portion 730a and the bottom surrounding portion 730b, and the third storage portion (the upper plate frame 700).
On the bottom plate portion 701 in the space between the front surface portion 702 and the button base 730). That is, the third storage portion includes the communication space S2 described above and the bottom surrounding portion 7
A common buffer reservoir for 30a and bottom enclosure 730b may be constructed.
It should be noted that the base portion surrounding portion 730e and the base portion surrounding portion 730f (second storage portions 777a and 777b).
) May flow along the surface of the button base 730 from the tip portion (lower portion not covered with the reinforcing plates 739a and 739b) to the third storage portion (fall down).

[Fluid discharge port (liquid discharge port)]
The fluid discharge port (liquid discharge port) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a front view illustrating the discharge port 779. As described above, the fluid flows into the communication space S1 and the communication space S2.
The fluid stored in the (first storage unit 713) passes through the communication spaces S3 and S5, and then the communication space S4.
, S6 and passes through the base portion enclosing portion 730e and the base portion enclosing portion 730f (second storage portion 777).
a, 777b), or the bottom enclosing portion 730a and the bottom enclosing portion 7
A discharge port 779 for discharging the fluid stored in 30b (preliminary storage portions 778a, 778b) to the outside of the gaming machine may be provided. In the present embodiment, “storing the fluid inside the gaming machine and discharging the stored fluid outside the gaming machine” is included in “delaying the flow of the fluid”. It should be noted that without specially providing the discharge port 779, the upper plate unit 20
The fluid may be gradually discharged to the outside of the gaming machine from a minute gap (for example, a gap caused by the tolerance between the operation panel 690 and the upper plate frame 700) between the constituent members of the above.

As shown in FIG. 27, the discharge port 779 is formed in the lower portion of the front surface portion 702 of the upper plate frame 700, at a position close to the operation handle 24 (position on the right side). The outlet 779 is
The lower plate unit 29 is provided so as to face the right side protrusion 29b in the vicinity of the right side protrusion 29b protruding on the right side. The discharge port 779 is connected to the communication space S2 (first storage portion 713), the base portion surrounding portion 7
30e and a base portion surrounding portion 730f (second storage portions 777a and 777b), a bottom portion surrounding portion 73.
0a and the bottom portion enclosing portion 730b (preliminary storage portions 778a, 778b) are in communication with each other by a flow path formed invisible to the player inside the gaming machine. For example, the communication space S2 (
The flow path (groove) from the first storage portion 713) to the discharge port 779 is defined by the front surface portion 7 of the upper plate frame 700.
It may be formed invisible on the back side of 02 (dotted line in FIG. 27).

In the present embodiment, the discharge port 779 is formed at a position closer to the operation handle 24 on the front surface portion 702 of the upper plate frame 700, that is, the lower plate 23 for storing game balls and the operation panel 69.
This is to prevent the discharged fluid from reaching the switches at 0. If the game ball flows into the game area in a wet state, it becomes a factor that accelerates deterioration of members such as nails and the circulation structure of the game ball. Therefore, the discharge port 779 is not limited to the above-mentioned position as long as the discharged fluid does not interfere with the game ball, the operation panel of the game machine, the island facility and the like.

In addition, the discharge port 779 may be provided with a sealing material that can be sealed, and the discharge port may be opened as necessary. Further, the discharge port 779 may be a mechanism that can be opened only by an administrator if necessary.

[Sphere channel unit]
Next, with reference to FIG. 28 to FIG. 31, the spherical channel unit 783 arranged on the back side of the front frame 12 will be described. FIG. 28 is a rear view (a) of the outer frame unit 17 (or the front frame 12).
) And a cross-sectional top view (b). FIG. 29 is an exploded view of the outer frame unit 17 (or the front frame 12). FIG. 30 is an exploded view of the ball channel unit 783. FIG. 31 is a rear view (a) and a transparent front view (b) of the ball channel unit base 786.

On the back side of the front frame 12, an external information terminal 71 capable of outputting information about the gaming machine 10 to an external device (game room internal management device such as a hall computer), and a game supplied from a supply device installed in the island facility. An upper tank 448 that stores balls, a payout unit 780 that pays out the game balls that have flowed down from the upper tank 448 to the upper plate 21, a payout control device 200 that controls the payout unit 780, and a power supply that supplies power to various devices. Apparatus 400 (see FIG. 28 (
a)).

In addition, the front frame 12 also includes an effect control relay board 781, an inter-standby relay board 782, and the like on the back side. The effect control relay board 781 includes an effect connection unit that connects to the electrical wiring from the effect control device 300. The inter-unit relay substrate 782 is a substrate electrically connected to the inter-unit device arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 10. In addition, the machine-to-machine device is, for example, a card sand or a cash sand arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 10. The payout control device 200, the power supply device 400, the effect control relay board 781, and the inter-standby relay board 782 may be configured as one unit (FIG. 29).

As described above, the front frame 12 has the ball launching device 530 and the foul ball catching unit 560 on the front side (FIG. 28 (b)).

The front frame 12 is provided with a ball passage unit 783 between the power supply device 400 and the foul ball catching unit 560, and between the payout control device 200 and the ball launching device 530, the ball launching device 530.
A firing control device 784 (firing control board) for controlling The ball channel unit 783 and the firing control device 784 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction (FIGS. 28B and 29).

As will be described later, the ball passage unit 783 receives the game balls flowing down from the out port 30b of the game board 30 and flows them into the out tank. Further, the ball channel unit 783 is the payout unit 7
The game ball (prize ball) from 80 is supplied to the upper plate 21 via the prize ball payout opening 443, or the upper plate 21
When is full, the game ball from the payout unit 780 is supplied to the lower plate 23 via the first inlet 461 of the lower plate unit 29.

As shown in FIG. 30, the ball channel unit 783 includes a front lid member 785, a ball channel unit base 786 that comes into contact with the front lid member 785 from the rear, and a back lid member that comes into contact with the ball channel unit base 786 from the rear. 787 and. The ball channel unit base 786 is sandwiched between the front lid member 785 and the rear lid member 787 from the front and back, and various game ball channels are formed inside.

The front lid member 785 has a concave receiving portion 785a into which the prize ball payout opening 443 of the ball channel unit base 786 is fitted. Further, as will be described later, in the front lid member 785, the out-ball passages 785b and 785c are formed by the passage walls extending to the back surface (FIG. 31 (b)).

As shown in FIG. 30, the ball channel unit base 786 has a connection passage 786a on the upper left side which is connected to the lower portion of the payout unit 780 and is supplied with game balls (prize balls) from the payout unit 780. The ball channel unit base 786 has an intermediate plate 786 arranged substantially in the middle in the front-rear direction.
b. On the front surface side in front of the intermediate plate 786b, the ball passage unit base 786 has a prize ball payout outlet 443 into which game balls from the connection passage 786a flow, and the game board 30 opened upward.
An out-ball receiving opening 786g for receiving the game ball flowing down from the out-opening 30b and an out sensor 786h for detecting the out-ball are provided. The prize ball payout opening 443 is a rectangular opening when viewed from the front, and opens at the front and the intermediate plate 786b. The out sensor 786h may be used as an out ball detection switch 74 described later.

As shown in FIG. 31A, on the rear surface side behind the intermediate plate 786b, the ball passage unit base 786 has a shelf portion 786c for receiving a game ball (prize ball) from the connection passage 786a and a shelf portion 7.
An overflow passage 786d into which the game ball from the connection passage 786a flows when 86c overflows with the game ball is provided. The game ball that has entered the shelf 786c flows into the prize ball payout opening 443. The game balls from the prize ball payout opening 443 are further supplied to the prize ball entrance 484 of the upper plate 21.
When the upper plate 21 is full (full), the game ball overflows to the shelf 786c (overflow), so that the game ball from the connection passage 786a cannot enter the shelf 786c and overflow channel 786d. Flow in (arrow in FIG. 31 (a)). Overflow channel 786d
Are formed by the flow path walls extending to the back side of the intermediate plate 786b. The game balls that have passed through the overflow passage 786d are in the lower plate 23 via the first inlet 461 of the lower plate unit 29.
Is supplied to.

Further, on the rear surface side behind the intermediate plate 786b, the ball passage unit base 786 is an overflow sensor 786e for detecting a collision pressure (ball pressure) of a game ball (overflow ball) in the overflow passage 786d, and an overflow sensor. And a ball pressure receiving member 786f that is arranged on the left side of the 786e. The ball pressure receiving member 786f is provided with an overflow passage 78.
The notch at the right end of 6d is made swingable by a support shaft at the upper end. The overflow sensor 786e sends a signal to the game control device 100 when the ball pressure receiving member 786f is pressed rightward by the ball pressure.

Further, the spherical flow path unit base 786 includes a special flow path 786i formed on the back surface side behind the intermediate plate 786b and substantially parallel to the overflow flow path 786d. For example, the special flow path 786i may be used as a recovery flow path for opening the valve of the upper tank 448 to allow the game balls from the upper tank 448 to flow down and to recover the game balls to the outside of the gaming machine 10. The special flow path 786i is also formed by a flow path wall extending on the back side of the intermediate plate 786b.

As shown in FIG. 31B, in the front lid member 785, an upper out-ball passage 785b and a lower out-ball passage 785c are formed by the passage walls extending to the back surface. The game ball (out ball) from the out ball receiving port 786g flows into the upper out ball passage 785b. Upper out-ball passage 7
The game ball that has passed through the upper out-ball passage 785b flows into the lower-out ball passage 785c communicating with 85b, and is then collected in the out tank. The above-mentioned out sensor 786h (out-ball detection switch 74) provided in the ball-channel unit base 786 is arranged at the connecting portion between the upper out-ball channel 785b and the lower out-ball channel 785c.

[Viewing window part]
Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the visual recognition window 789 provided on the lower right side of the glass frame 15 (front frame unit) will be described. 32 is a right side view (a) of the glass frame 15 and a partially enlarged view thereof (b), and a perspective view of the glass frame 15 seen obliquely from below (c) and a partially enlarged view thereof (d).
).

The viewing window portion 789 is provided on the front frame base unit 480 (or the upper plate unit 2) of the glass frame 15.
0 rear member 740 of the back plate 742 (FIG. 19) and the upper plate unit 20 front portion 702 (FIG. 1).
9) Formed between the rear ends 702c. The visual recognition window portion 789 is located below the attachment portion 722 of the upper tray unit 20 (upper tray unit main body 680).

The viewing window portion 789 is for viewing the inside of the upper plate unit 20 attached to the glass frame 15 from the right side when the glass frame 15 is opened with respect to the front frame 12. A transparent cover for protecting the inside of the upper plate unit 20 may be fitted into the viewing window portion 789. When the glass frame 15 is closed with respect to the front frame 12, the visual recognition window part 789 is closed by the right side protruding part 29b (FIG. 5) of the lower plate unit 29.

Through the visual recognition window portion 789, the above-mentioned opening / closing lever 733 (FIG. 19) in the upper plate unit 20 and its operation can be visually recognized from the right side. The opening / closing lever 733 moves the opening / closing member 734 according to the operation of the upper plate operating portion 735. When the opening / closing member 734 is opened, the game balls of the upper plate 21 flow down to the lower plate 23. Even if the opening / closing lever 733 is inside the upper plate unit 20, it can be visually seen through the visual window portion 789 by the external light from the right lens member 681 or the light leaked from the LED substrate 721, and the operation of the opening / closing member 734 can be confirmed. be able to.

Further, the LED board 721 (see FIG. 1) in the upper plate unit 20 is passed through the viewing window portion 789.
9) and the light emitting operation can be visually recognized from the diagonally lower rear side. It should be noted that the front surface portion 702 and the right lens member 681 of the upper plate unit 20 are the curved bay entry end portion 480c located on the lower right side of the front frame base unit 480 and the right side of the back plate 742 of the upper plate unit 20. It bulges outward from the curved bay-entry end 742c located at. Therefore, the viewing window portion 789
Through this, the LED substrate 721 that irradiates the right lens member 681 with light can be visually recognized.

[Projection production unit (decoration device)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 33 and FIG. 34, the projection effect units provided on both sides of the glass frame 15 (front frame unit), that is, the decoration devices 18b and 18c will be described. FIG. 33
FIG. 4A is an exploded view (a) in which the decoration devices 18b and 18c are separated from the glass frame 15 and an exploded view (b) of one projection effect unit (decoration device 18b). FIG. 34 is a front view of one projection effect unit (decoration device 18b).

As shown in FIG. 33 (a), the decoration devices 18 b and 18 c have front frame base units 480, respectively.
Are attached to the attachment portions 790a and 790b on both sides in the left-right direction. Decoration device 18
b and 18c are provided outside the vertical plates 482b and 482c of the front frame inner member 482, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 33 (b), the projection effect unit (decoration device 18 b) is combined in an overlapping manner with the LED substrate 791, the back cover 792, the reflector 793, and the inner lens 79.
4, a side cover 795, and an outer lens 796.

The LED substrate 791 includes a plurality of (ten) LEDs 791a in the left column and a plurality (16) of LEDs in the right column.
Of the front frame base unit 480, and is attached to the mounting portion 790a on the right side of the front frame base unit 480. The transparent back cover 792 is arranged in front of the LED substrate 791 and fixed to the reflector 793 and the inner lens 794. Also, the back cover 792 is
The plurality of concave portions 792a at the left end of the jagged shape correspond to the plurality of LEDs 791a in the left row. Therefore, the back cover 792 covers a part of the LEDs 791b in the right column, but does not cover the LEDs 791a in the left column. The reflector 793 is entirely made of metal or metal-plated and reflects light, and is fixed to the back cover 792. The reflector 793 is
A plurality of (ten) openings 793a are provided at positions facing the plurality of LEDs 791a in the left column.

The inner lens 794 is fixed to the back cover 792 and is arranged so as to sandwich the reflector 793 together with the back cover 792. The left surface of the inner lens 794 conforms geometrically to the reflector 793. The inner lens 794 is made of a resin colored in milky white and slightly transmits light. An inner lens 794 and an outer lens 796 are fixed to the side cover 795 at the same place. Further, the side cover 795 has a plurality of openings 795a as decorations. The transparent outer lens 796 is the inner lens 794.
And to engage with the reflector 793. The outer lens 796 includes the reflector 7
It has a plurality of engagement receiving portions 796a that engage with the plurality of engaging portions 793b of 93, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 34, the LED 791 a on the left column of the LED substrate 791 is the reflector 79.
Since it is located and exposed at the third opening 793a, it is visible through the transparent outer lens 796. Direct light from the LED 791a in the left column and reflected light (indirect light) reflected by the reflector 793 from the LED 791a in the left column are directed toward the center side (inside) of the gaming machine 10 via the transparent outer lens 796. Since it reaches the player, it is possible to produce effective light emission. Further, since the back cover 792 does not cover the LEDs 791a in the left column, light from the LEDs 791a can pass straight through the opening 793a of the reflector 793 without being refracted by the back cover 792.

On the other hand, the LEDs 791b on the right column of the LED substrate 791 are not visible because they are not exposed because they are covered with the inner lens 794 (dotted line in FIG. 34) colored in milky white. L in the right column
Since the ED 791b provides soft illumination to the outside of the gaming machine 10 through the inner lens 794, the ED 791b has an illumination mode different from that of the LED 791a in the left column, and enables effective light emission production in addition to the production of the LED 791a in the left column.

[Operation / Effect of First Embodiment]
According to the first embodiment, the gaming machine 10 provided with the display device (for example, the display device 41) capable of executing a predetermined effect has operation means (effect button unit 750, operation panel 690, etc.) that can be operated by the player. , A flow means (for example, an outer peripheral groove 754c, a front guide port 766g, a horizontal guide port 766i) capable of flowing a fluid flowing around the operating means into the game machine, and a flow of the fluid flowed by the flowing means Delaying means for delaying (for example, the communication space S2
3), the base portion surrounding portions 730e and 730f (reservoir portions 777a and 777b), the bottom portion surrounding portion 7
30a, 730b (reservoir 778a, 778b), communication space S1, communication space S3, S4
, S5, S6). The operation unit may include a circuit board (for example, the LED board 767, the relay board 737), and may include the circuit board, for example.

In such a gaming machine 10, the fluidized material is allowed to flow inside the gaming machine by the flow means, and the fluidized material flowed inside the gaming machine by the flow means by the delay means. Delay flow. Therefore, during the game of the player, the fluid flows along the surface of the gaming machine 10 (the surface of the upper plate unit 20 or the like) to the player side, so that the player is distracted by the fluid and plays the game. It is possible to reduce the situation where the interest is reduced.

Further, in such a gaming machine 10, since a fluid such as water does not enter the operation means (effect button unit 750 and the like), the circuit board (electronic component) in the operation means caused by water leakage or the like (fault) or It is possible to continue the interest of the player without a problem that the operation effect related to the game cannot be executed. Further, in such a gaming machine 10, by discharging a fluid such as water to the outside of the gaming machine, a game area which is generated when a game ball dirty by touching the fluid enters the gaming machine (gaming area 32) It is also possible to prevent deterioration of members and the like in 32. Furthermore, according to such a gaming machine 10, it is possible to reduce the trouble of cleaning the fluid discharged from the gaming machine.

In addition, according to the first embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes a shielding unit (for example, a button frame 752) that shields a fluid material flowing around the operation unit from the player.

In such a gaming machine 10, even if the fluid is dropped on the operation means during the game of the player, the fluid flows around the operation means (effect button unit 750) by the shielding means. Is shielded from the player, so that the player is not distracted by the fluid and does not lose interest.

In addition, according to the first embodiment, the delay unit includes a storage unit that stores at least a part of the fluid (for example, the communication space S2 (storage unit 713), the platform surrounding portions 730e and 730f (the storage unit 7
77a, 777b), bottom surrounding portions 730a, 730b (reservoir 778a, 778b))
Have.

In such a gaming machine 10, since the delay means includes the storage part, at least a part of the fluid can be stored in the storage part. Thereby, even if the volume of the fluid is large, the flow of the fluid can be greatly delayed, and the player is not distracted by the fluid and the interest is not reduced.

Further, according to the first embodiment, the circuit board (for example, the LE in the effect button unit 750).
D board 767, balance display portion 690a arranged on operation panel 690, ball lending button 690
b, an electronic circuit board 697a for the return button 690c (see FIG. 25), and electronic circuit boards 697b for the volume adjustment buttons 690d, 690e and the cross key 690f (see FIG. 25).
)) Is a delay means (for example, the storage unit 713, the storage units 777a and 777b, the storage unit 778).
a, 778b).

In such a gaming machine 10, the fluid is the LED board 7 in the effect button unit 750.
67 and the electronic circuit board 697a (see FIG. 25) and the electronic circuit board 697b (see FIG. 25) arranged on the operation panel 690 flow toward the delay unit located at a lower position than the circuit board, so that the circuit board Can be prevented from contacting the fluid.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the effect button unit 750 is inclined forward so that the player-side end is lower than the board-side end. Therefore, the fluid dropped on the effect button unit 750 is caused to flow toward the player side (front) and quickly to the flow means (front guide port 766g) connected to the delay means (communication spaces S1, S2). Can be induced.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment, in the button lower base 766, three ribs 776 are provided on the outer peripheral surface of the annular portion 766b surrounded by the concave projecting portion forming the front guide port 766g. Be done. Each of the ribs 776 is formed to extend in the vertical direction (from the upper side to the lower side) at substantially equal intervals, and each of the ribs 776 extends from the outer peripheral surface of the annular portion 766b from the upper side to the lower side. It is formed to have a high height. Therefore, the fluid easily travels along the rib 776 and flows into the front guide port 766g.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment, in the front part of the effect button unit 750 in which the respective parts of the upper plate unit 20 are assembled, the outside of the outer peripheral surface 754d of the button lens body 754 and the button lower base 766. Front guide port 766 formed in the annular portion 766b of the
The fluid flows into the communication space S1 formed between the outside of g and the inside of the button frame 752 assembled so as to shield both. After that, the button base 730 and the effect button unit 750 (button unit base 770) are housed outside the lower step portion 710 and the upper step portion 712 located in the front portion of the upper dish frame 700, and the central sharpened portion 69 of the operation panel 690.
The fluid flows into the communication space S2 formed between the inside of 6a and the inside.

The communication spaces S1 and S2 are inside the game machine and are shielded from the outside, and since the fluid does not flow out from the middle of the communication spaces S1 and S2 to the outside, the game is played during the game of the player. The person will not be distracted by the fluid and will not lose interest.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the lower stage portion 710 that constitutes the first storage portion 713.
The bottom surfaces 710a and 710b are formed in a substantially V shape when viewed from the player side. Therefore, it is easy to store the fluid under the lower step portion 710. In addition, the front panel 696 of the operation panel 690
When the central sharpened portion 696a of the above is transparent, the bottom surfaces 710a and 710b of the lower step portion 710 are visible to the player. In this case, the bottom surface 7 of the lower step portion 710 at a position visible to the player
10a and 710b are a right lens base 706 extending to the right of the upper plate frame 700,
It is designed to be continuous with the left lens base 707 extending in the left direction. For this reason, it has a structure that does not impair the aesthetics of the gaming machine while having the function of storing the fluid.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the width of the upper step portion 712 in the left-right direction (the partition portion 7
The distance between 12c and the partition portion 712d) is narrower than the width of the widest portion of the lower step portion 710 formed in the V shape in the left-right direction. Therefore, the fluid flowing down from the upper step portion 712 can quickly flow into the wider lower step portion 710.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the lateral cutouts 754f formed in the left-right direction of the outer peripheral groove 754c of the button lens 754 and the lateral guide opening 766i of the button lower base 766 are positionally aligned. Is formed in. As a result, the fluid can be made to flow not only in the front direction of the effect button unit 750 but also in the lateral direction (left and right direction).

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment, on the right side of the effect button unit 750, the side notch 754f of the button lens body 754a and the outer side of the lateral guide port 766i of the button lower base 766, and the inner side of the button frame 752. And a communication space S3 formed between and. In addition, the button lower base 766 and the panel side recess 6 of the operation panel 690 in the radial direction outside.
A communication space S4 is provided that extends between the right side reinforcing plate 739a and the outer side of the button unit base 770 in the radial direction through the space 94b. In addition, it is provided with a base portion surrounding portion 730e to which the communication space S4 is connected.

The communication spaces S3, S4 and the pedestal part surrounding portion 730e are regions that are shielded from the player and are shielded from the outside, so that the fluid does not flow out from the middle of the communication spaces S3, S4 to the outside. Therefore, during the game of the player, the player does not get distracted by the fluid and loses interest.

Further, in such a gaming machine 10, when the capacity of the fluid exceeds the capacity of the base portion surrounding portion 730e, it can be made to flow into the bottom portion surrounding portion 730a. Therefore, even if the amount of the fluid is large, the fluid does not flow out of the game machine or the outflow is delayed, so that the player is distracted by the fluid during the player's game. Never lowers.

Further, the base portion 730c in which the base portion surrounding portion 730e is formed is a configuration for providing the right side reinforcing plate mounting portion 731d, and is a portion that is less likely to be damaged or deteriorated by water leakage. The bottom portion enclosing portion 730e is a structure for supporting the button unit base 770. By having the function of storing the fluid at such a position, even if the fluid is retained inside the gaming machine 10, the gaming ball is soiled, the circuit board of the gaming machine is touched, and members within the gaming area. It is possible to avoid problems such as deterioration.

Further, in the gaming machine 10, as described above, the fluidized material is allowed to flow inside the gaming machine by the flowing means, and the fluidized material is flowed inside the gaming machine by the flowing means by the delay means. Delay the flow of the fluid. As a result, in the gaming machine 10, the speed at which the fluid flows into the gaming machine (inside the upper plate unit 20) slows down, so that fluid such as water flows into the circuit board (eg, the LED board 767, the relay board 737). Before reaching the important parts such as
The fluid can be evaporated or dispersed. Therefore, it is possible to protect an important part inside the gaming machine from the fluid, and prevent a decrease in the interest of the player due to a failure of the gaming machine or the like.

In addition, the above-described effects are similarly exhibited on the left side of the upper plate unit 20 (effect button unit 750).

[Second Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 50. The configuration other than that described below may be the same as that of the first embodiment. Moreover, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for the configurations that perform the same functions as the first embodiment, and redundant description will be appropriately omitted.

[Game board]
The gaming board 30 of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 37. FIG. 35 shows
It is a front view of the game board 30 of the game machine 10 of the second embodiment (normal game state). FIG. 36 is a front view of the game board 30 of the game machine 10 of the second embodiment (a state suggesting a specific mode).
FIG. 37 is a front view (specific game state) of the game board 30 of the game machine 10 of the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 35, the game board 30 includes a flat plate-shaped game board body 30a that serves as a mounting base for various members. The game board body 30a is made of wood or synthetic resin, and the game board body 30 is
A game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is provided on the front surface of a.

A center case (front structure) 40 that forms a window that serves as a display area of the variable display game is attached to the approximate center of the game area 32. Behind the window formed in the center case 40, a production display device (variable display device) that variably displays (variably displays) a plurality of pieces of identification information.
The display device 41 is disposed. Further, behind the window of the center case 40 and in front of the display device 41, a movable accessory 820, a drop accessory 810, and the like are arranged around the display device 41 when viewed from the front.

The display device 41 includes, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is arranged so that the display content can be viewed from the front side of the game board 30 through the window of the center case 40. The display device 41 is not limited to one having a liquid crystal display, and may be one having a display such as an EL or CRT.

On the display screen (display unit) of the display device 41, a plurality of variable display areas (variable display areas 610,
615) is provided, and identification information (special symbols) and a character (for example, a character 826a (FIG. 40)) that directs the variable display game are displayed in each variable display area. Other,
Images based on the progress of the game (big hit display, fanfare display, ending display, etc.) are displayed on the display screen.

For example, in the central portion of the display device 41, a variation of a decorative special symbol (large symbol) as identification information (
↓↓↓) is displayed in the variable display area 610. On the right side of the display device 41, in order from the top, the fourth symbol 671 of the special figure 1, the fourth symbol 672 of the special figure 2, the special figure 2 hold number display section 660,
The special figure 2 reservation number display section 660 and the variable display area 615 are displayed.

The fourth symbol 671 of the special figure 1 is for displaying whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed. If "○" is being executed, if "x" is not being executed ( No hold or suspended). Further, the fourth symbol 672 of the special figure 2 is for displaying whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. If "○", it is being executed, and if "x", it is not executing. Indicates medium (no hold).

The special figure 1 hold number display unit 650 holds the hold number (the maximum hold number is 4
) Is displayed. The special figure 2 hold number display section 660 displays the hold number (maximum hold number is 4) of the special figure 2 variable display game described later. The variation display area 615 displays the variation (↓↓↓) of the decorative reduced design (small design) as identification information.

In the lower part of the display device 41, a special display 1 variable display game to be described later (first starting memory) or a special figure 2 variable display game to be described later (second starting memory) is displayed as a pending display 633. A display unit 630a and a hold extinguishing area 640 that displays a change hold display 633a indicating a hold related to a change display game being executed (special figure 1 change display game, special figure 2 change display game) are displayed. It should be noted that the hold display 633 and the variable hold display 633a are colored in accordance with the expectation level of the big hit,
It is possible to make a notice presentation in which the shape, pattern, etc. are changed and displayed.

Further, on the upper left side of the display device 41, a mode display unit 674 (first suggestion information) for displaying the effect mode (stage) by text information is displayed. As the display of the effect mode, an arbitrary wording is applied according to the game state. For example, in the normal game state (a state in which the game state is not advantageous to the player), "normal mode" is displayed (FIG. 35). ), In a specific game state such as a time saving state, "?? Mode" is displayed (Fig. 36), and in a special game state (big hit, small hit) "Tiger mode" is displayed (Fig. 37).

It should be noted that the player operates the effect operation device (the effect button 25) to produce an effect in which the operation of the player is intervened in the special figure variation display game or the like displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). It can be carried out. For example, it is possible to select an effect pattern (effect mode) or execute a notice effect that gives advance notice of the result of the variable display game corresponding to the starting memory. Note that the variable display game includes a special figure variable display game, and when it is simply referred to as a variable display game, this specification refers to the special figure variable display game.

Further, the effect pattern may be changed not only during execution of the variable display game but also during operation of the player by operating the effect operation device (effect button 25).

The game state when the variable display game is executed is composed of a plurality of game states. The normal gaming state (normal state) is a gaming state in which no special gaming state has occurred. Further, the special gaming state means, for example, a time saving state as a specific gaming state or a state in which a high probability of occurrence of a special result (for example, a big hit) in a variable display game (probable change state, probability change state), big hit state (
It is a special game state) and a small hit game state (small hit state).

Here, the probability variation state (specific game state) is one that continues until the next big hit occurs (loop type), one that continues until a variable display game is executed a predetermined number of times (number cut type, ST), and There are those that continue until a predetermined probability falling lottery is won (falling lottery type).

In the present embodiment, as will be described later, a winning device or the like including the specific area 86 is provided, and the specific area 8
When the game ball passes 6, the probability change state is generated. If you win a specific type of big hit (probably change big hit etc.) by big hit symbol random number, the specific area 86 will be opened for a long time and the game ball will pass through surely, and you can shift to the positive change state after the big hit ends. In this embodiment, for the sake of simplicity, the probability variation state (high-probability state) continues until the next big hit occurs.

The gaming machine 10 is configured to shoot a game ball from a ball launching device 530 in a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 to play a game. In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails and the like are arranged as members for converting the flow direction of the game ball, and the launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

At the entrance of the game area 32 (the exit of the launch ball guide passage 33), a return valve 814 and a valve sensor 81.
4a is arranged. The return valve 814 is arranged such that the lower end is a fixed end and the upper end is a free end so that the return valve 814 is rotatable, and a biasing means (a biasing means for biasing the inlet of the game area 32).
(Not shown) is attached.

The return valve 814 is contacted with the game ball emitted from the ball emitting device 530, and thereby the game area 3
The game ball is introduced into the game area 32 by rotating in the direction of opening the entrance of 2. After that, the return valve 81
When the game ball separates from the return valve 814, 4 is rotated in the opposite direction by the urging force and the game area 32
It is designed to block the entrance of. This prevents the game ball introduced into the game area 32 from returning to the ball launcher side.

The valve sensor 814a outputs a detection signal each time the return valve 814 rotates in the direction of opening the entrance of the game area 32 (or each time it rotates in the direction of closing the entrance of the game area 32).
Send to. The detection signal is used to count the number of shot balls (or out balls) of the game ball. The detection signal may be transmitted to the effect control device 300 (described later) and used for effect control.

An upper effect unit 40c and a side effect unit 40d are provided on the upper and right sides of the center case 40, respectively. Upper production unit 40c and side production unit 40d
Constitutes part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 4) and the board effect device 44 (see FIG. 4).

Further, in the center case 40, a game ball flowing down the game area 32 is placed in the center case 40.
An inflow port 40a to the warp passage 40e for guiding the inside of the, and a stage portion 40b capable of rolling the game ball passing through the warp passage 40e are provided.

In the game area 32 below the center case 40 and below the stage section 40b, there is a starting winning opening (starting opening 1, first starting winning area) 36 for giving a start condition of the special figure variation display game. It is provided. Therefore, the game ball rolled on the stage 40b is likely to enter the starting winning opening 36. When the game ball wins the starting winning opening 36, special figure 1
Although the variable display game is executed, if the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed, it is treated as a hold (the maximum number of hold is 4). Further, directly below the start winning port 36, an out port 30b for collecting game balls that have not won in the winning port is provided.

In the game area 32 at the lower left of the center case 40, a general winning opening unit 808 having a plurality of general winning openings 35 and a collective display device 50 is arranged. The general winning opening unit 808 is also provided with an outlet 30b. Here, the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 35, the winning opening switches (SW) 35a to 35n provided in the general winning opening 35 (see FIG. 79).
Detected by. In addition, the general prize opening unit 808 has a seal 81 for decorating it.
5 is attached. The seal 815 will be described later.

The collective display device 50 (see FIG. 39 (b)) is a display device including eight LED lamps arranged horizontally in four rows vertically and a total of 32 LED lamps. The collective display device 50 includes, for example, a first special figure variation display section (special figure 1 indicator 51) configured by eight LED lamps in the uppermost stage and displaying the special figure 1 variation display game, and a second stage from the top. 2nd special figure fluctuation display section (special figure 2 indicator 5) which displays the special figure 2 fluctuation display game which is formed with 8 LED lamps
2) and

Further, the collective display device 50 is composed of LED lamps from the left to the fifth from the bottom in the bottom row, and a variable display section (a universal figure display 53) for displaying a universal figure variable display game, and a second stage from the bottom. Starting the special figure 1 variable display game, which is composed of the first and second LED lamps from the left (
(Hold) Memory number of special (Fig. 1) hold display 54 for notifying the number of memories and the number of starting (held) memories of the special figure 2 variable display game composed of the third and fourth LED lamps from the second row from the bottom The special figure 2 hold display section 55 is provided.

Further, the collective display device 50 is composed of the LED lamps in the second row from the bottom and which is the seventh from the left, and informs that it is right-handed (when right-handed) or left-handed (normal). 1
A second game state display unit which is composed of a game state display unit 57 (first game state indicator) and a rightmost LED lamp in the second stage from the bottom and lights up when a time saving state occurs to notify the occurrence of the time saving state. 58 (second game status indicator) and an LED lamp arranged at the rightmost at the bottom, which indicates that the jackpot probability state is a high probability state when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. 3 gaming status display section 59 (third gaming status display, probability status display section) and 1 from the bottom left
A round display unit 60 configured to include the fourth to fourth LED lamps and displaying the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times of opening and closing of the special variation winning devices 38 and 39, the upper limit value of the number of rounds).

In the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52, the variable display game is executed by a variable display in which identification information (for example, a central segment) is repeatedly turned on and off (blinking). The special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 are not limited to the case of being constituted by a group of a plurality of LEDs as described above, and may be constituted by a 7-segment type indicator.

When performing variable display, all LED lamps turn all lights on and all lights off (all LEs).
Simultaneous blinking of D), cyclic lighting (lighting from any one of the LED lamps in a predetermined order at predetermined time intervals and then extinguished), or lighting and extinguishing (flashing by a predetermined number of LED lamps of a plurality of LED lamps) ) Or circulating lighting.

Even in the universal figure display 53, the variable display game is performed with all LEs constituting the universal figure display 53.
This is executed by a variable display (blinking) in which the D lamp is repeatedly turned on and off. Further, the universal figure display 53 can also be appropriately configured similarly to the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52.

The lamp display device 80 arranged in the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40 has a pattern (
Lamp display units 1 and 2 (LED) for performing variable display (blinking) that repeats lighted display and light-off display as a fourth special symbol described later, and start (hold) memory number notification for each special figure variable display game It has a lamp display section 3-6 (LED). In addition, the lamp display device 80 is the effect control device 3
00 (described later).

The lamp display unit 1 (the uppermost LED) and the lamp display unit 2 (the second LED from the top) blink as a variable display at a predetermined blinking cycle (for example, 200 msec (millisecond)). While the variation time of the variation display on the special display 1 display 51, the special display 2 display 52, and the universal display 53 of the collective display device 50 is measured by the game control device 100, the lamp of the lamp display device 80 The variation time of the display units 1 and 2 is measured by the effect control device 300 (described later).

The lamp display section 3 (the third special figure 1 hold LED 1 from the top) and the lamp display section 4 (the fourth special figure 1 hold LED 2 from the top) are selected according to the combination of the off state, the lit state, and the blinking state.
The number of holdings (the first starting memory number) is displayed. Similarly, the lamp display portion 5 (the fifth special figure from the top 2
The hold LED 1) and the lamp display unit 6 (the lowest special figure 2 hold LED 2) display the special figure 2 hold number (second start memory number) by a combination of the off state, the lit state, and the blinking state. The lamp display unit 3-6 finishes displaying the number of holdings when a big hit occurs, but when the big hit state is not in progress (
In the case where a reach described later is occurring on the display device 41), the number of holdings is displayed.

In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a flow path unit 802, a special winning opening unit 800, a regular electric power unit 804, and a special winning opening unit 806 are provided in order from the top.

The flow path unit 802 forms a flow path including the universal figure starting gate 34, and makes the game ball flow down to the special winning opening unit 800 regardless of whether or not the game ball passes through the universal figure starting gate 34. .. Here, inside the universal figure starting gate 34, a gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 79) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the universal figure starting gate 34 is provided. Then, when the game ball passes through the universal figure starting gate 34, the universal figure variation display game is executed.

The special winning opening unit 800 is a combination of the general winning opening 35, the special variation winning device 39 (the special winning opening solenoid 39b, the opening / closing door 39c (the blade member 914a in FIG. 72)), the specific area 86 and the like. .. In the special winning opening unit 800, the game ball flowing down from the flow path unit 802 wins the general winning opening 35 or flows down the flow path leading to the special variation winning device 39. Here, the special variation winning device 39 is normally closed, and causes the gaming ball that has flowed down the flow path to flow down to the normal power unit 804. However, when the result mode of the above-mentioned special figure 1 variable display game becomes the special game state (big hit), or when the result mode of the later-described special figure 2 variable display game becomes the special game state (big hit, small hit), The game ball is opened for a period of time to be in a state in which the special variation winning device 39 can be won, and further, it has a configuration in which it can be won in the specific area 86 with a predetermined probability. Details of the special winning opening unit 800 will be described in the fourth embodiment.

The game control device 100 can detect the passage of the game ball to the specific area 86 (V winning) through a sensor (specific area switch 72 (V switch, FIG. 72)) and the like, and when the V winning is detected, the big hit ends. While confirming that the state will be changed to the probability change state later, the effect control device 300 described later will be described.
The information (command for passing a specific area, etc.) indicating that the V prize has been received is transmitted. Then, the effect control device 300 can notify the V winning on the display device 41 or the like.

The ordinary electric power unit 804 is for forming a flow path that includes the normal variable winning device 37 (starting opening 2, second starting winning area), and the game balls that have not won the normal variable winning device 37 are a large winning opening. It is made to flow down to the unit 806. Here, in the normal variation winning device 37, the game ball can be won by opening the movable member 37b for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) when the result of the above-mentioned universal figure variation display game is a hit. Then, when the game ball wins the normal variation winning device 37, the special figure 2
The variable display game is executed, but if the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed, it is treated as a hold (the maximum number of hold is 4).

The special winning opening unit 806 forms a flow path that includes the special variation winning device 38 (the special winning opening solenoid 38b, the slide type opening / closing door 38c), and the game balls that have not won the special variation winning device 38. Is flowed down to the outlet port 30b just below the start winning port 36. Here, the special variation winning device 38 is normally closed, and no game balls are won. However, when the result mode of the above-mentioned special figure 1 variable display game becomes the special game state (big hit) (or when the result mode of the above-mentioned special figure 2 variable display game becomes the special game state (big hit, small hit)) The game balls are released for a period of time, and the game ball can enter the special variation winning device 38.

The RUSH lamp 812 (second lighting means) is arranged above the special winning opening unit 806 and on the left side of the universal communication unit 804. As the RUSH lamp 812, for example, a lamp capable of full-color lighting is applied. Further, the RUSH lamp 812 is used for the effect control device 30.
Controlled by 0, the lighting state (including color change) changes based on the game state. In particular, R
The USH lamp 812 is lit (flashes) so that, for example, when the probability change state (a state in which a small hit rush (small hit RUSH) described later can be generated) occurs, the letters "RUSH" are floated (FIG. 37). Here, the characters “↓ RUSH ↓” (or “RUSH”) of the RUSH lamp 812 may be printed on the surface of the RUSH lamp 812. In addition, the RUSH lamp 812
A plurality of light emitters arranged so as to form the characters "↓ RUSH ↓" (or "RUSH") (
It may be configured by an LED or the like). By displaying “↓” next to “RUSH”, the special winning opening unit 806 in which the small hit rush is generated can be surely noticed.

The movable accessory 820 is an accessory that has an arc shape as a whole, includes an accessory lamp 820a (first light emitting means), and is controlled by the effect control device 300 according to the game state to be movable. The movable accessory 820 is arranged in a position that covers the left side of the display device 41 in the initial state (normal game state), for example, as shown in FIG. 35. At this time, the accessory lamp 82
0a is arranged on the back side of the warp passage 40e, and has a light emitting mode for decorating the warp passage 40e from the back side.

As shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the movable accessory 820 includes an upper guide member 954 (FIG. 41) disposed on the left side of the movable accessory 820 and a lower guide member 9 disposed below the movable accessory 820.
By sliding along 56 (FIG. 41), it moves so as to draw an arc. Movable accessory 820
The structure of will be described later.

As described above, the accessory lamp 820a is arranged at a position on the back side of the warp passage 40e in the arrangement of FIG. 35 and is used for displaying an effect for decorating the warp passage 40e. On the other hand, the accessory lamp 820a moves as the movable accessory 820 moves. For example, as shown in FIG. 36, when the movable accessory 820 moves to the intermediate position, the accessory lamp 820a is arranged below the display device 41 and is used for displaying the effect using the effect button 25 as described later. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 37, when the movable accessory 820 moves to the final position, the accessory lamp 820a is arranged in the lower right portion of the display device 41 as described later, and the variable display of the variable display game and the variable display game are displayed. It is used to display the result of (no hit, small hit or big hit). That is, the accessory lamp 82
0a moves the position according to the game state, and uses different light emission modes to perform different purposes. When the accessory lamp 820a (movable accessory 820) is arranged as shown in FIG. 37, the RUSH lamp 812 is turned on.
It is possible not only to turn on No. 2 but also to indicate the probability change state by the position of the accessory lamp 820a (movable accessory 820).

The drop accessory 810 is an accessory having a longitudinal direction in the left-right direction in the initial state, and the right side portion thereof is pivotally supported and can be rotated by a motor and a gear. Therefore, the falling accessory 810 can be rotated by driving the motor with the right side as the fixed end and the left side as the free end, and the left side portion of the falling accessory 810 overlaps the display device 41 by driving the motor in the forward direction. By rotating the motor to the opposite direction and driving the motor in the opposite direction, the motor can be rotated in the opposite direction to return to the initial state. The motor is controlled by the effect control device 300. In addition, an opening 810a is provided on the left side of the falling accessory 810.
Is formed, and various ornaments (see FIG. 40) can be attached to the opening 810a.

Next, the flow of the game in the gaming machine 10, details of the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game will be described.

In the gaming machine 10, a game is played by launching a game ball from the ball launching device 530 through the launch ball guide passage 33 toward the game area 32. The game balls that have been launched change the rolling direction by obstacle nails, windmills, etc. arranged in various places in the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction.
The general figure starting gate 34, the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variation winning device 3
7 or the special variation winning device 38, 39 is won, or it flows into the outlet 30b provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32. Then, when a game ball is won in the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variation winning device 37, or the special variation winning devices 38, 39, the number of prize balls corresponding to the type of the winning opening won the payout device. It is discharged to the upper plate 21 via the.

The universal figure starting gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 79) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the universal figure starting gate 34. When the game ball passes through the universal figure starting gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a, and the universal figure variation display game is executed based on the determination result of the random number value for collision determination extracted at this time.

The state in which the general figure fluctuation display game cannot be started, for example, when the general figure fluctuation display game has already been played and the general figure fluctuation display game has not ended, or the result of the general figure fluctuation display game is a win When the gaming ball passes through the universal figure starting gate 34 when the variable winning device 37 is converted to the open state, if the universal figure starting memory number is less than the upper limit number, the memory number is added (+1).

In the universal figure starting memory, a random number value for hit determination for determining the hit / miss of the universal figure variation display game is stored. When the random number value for hit determination matches the determination value, the universal figure variation display is displayed. The game wins and a specific result mode (specific result) is derived.

The general figure fluctuation display game is executed by the general figure display 53 provided in the collective display device 50. The ordinary figure display 53 is composed of LEDs that indicate a hit when the normal identification information (universal figure) is in a lighted state and a deviation when the light is in a non-illuminated state. By flickering the LED, the ordinary identification information fluctuates. The result is displayed by turning on or off the LED after a predetermined variable display time has elapsed.

When the random number value of the universal figure extracted when passing through the universal figure starting gate 34 is the hit value, the ordinary symbol displayed on the universal figure display 53 is stopped in the hit state and becomes the hit state. At this time, by driving the universal solenoid 37c (see FIG. 79), the movable member 37b is converted into an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds), and the game ball to the normal variation winning device 37 is changed. Winnings are allowed.

The winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36 and the winning of the normal variation winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 79) and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 79). The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 is detected as the start prize ball of the special display 1 variable display game, and is stored up to a predetermined upper limit, and the game ball that has won the normal variable prize device 37 has the special map 2. It is detected as a start winning ball of the variable display game and is stored within a predetermined upper limit.

At the time of detecting the start winning ball of the special figure fluctuation display game, a big hit random number value, a big hit symbol random value, each fluctuation pattern random value, etc. are extracted. These random number values are stored in the special figure reservation storage area (a part of RAM) of the game control device 100 as a special figure starting prize winning storage, each for a predetermined number of times (for example, a maximum of eight times). The storage number of the special figure start prize winning memory is displayed on the special figure 1 hold display section 54 and the special figure 2 hold display section 55 for informing the start prize number of the collective display device 50, and at the same time, the display device 4 is displayed.
It is also displayed on the display screen of 1.

The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51 based on the winning in the starting winning opening 36 or the first starting memory. Further, the game control device 100 uses the special figure 2 display 52 to display the special figure 2 based on the winning or the second starting memory to the normal variation winning device 37.
Run the floating display game.

In the special figure 1 variable display game (first special figure variable display game) and the special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game), identification information ( This is performed by displaying the predetermined result mode in a stopped state after the variable display of the special symbol, the special symbol).

In the present embodiment, the gaming machine 10 is a so-called simultaneous variation machine, and the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be put into the execution state simultaneously (both) independently of each other. When a big hit occurs in the special figure 1 variable display game (there is no small hit in the special figure 1 variable display game in the present embodiment), the running special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped due to the outlier result. To do. When a big hit occurs in the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 1 variable display game being executed is forcibly stopped due to the disengagement result.

When a small hit occurs in the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 1 variable display game being executed is interrupted. In this case, the measurement of the variation time by the game processing timer is interrupted, and
Derivation of the result of the variable display game (display of the stop symbol corresponding to the stop symbol number) is postponed, and after the small hit operation related to the special figure 2 variable display game is finished, the suspended special figure 1 variable display game can be restarted. ..

In addition, when a game ball is won in the normal variation winning device 37 by right-handing in the normal gaming state, the special figure 2 variation display game starts to vary, but basically it changes for a long time (long variation, for example, 10 minutes). Therefore, if a big hit occurs in the special figure 1 variable display game during this period, it will be forcibly disengaged and stopped.

In the display device 41, a decorative special figure variable display game in which a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc.) are variably displayed corresponding to each special figure variable display game is executed.

In the decorative special figure variable display game on the display device 41, for example, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the above-mentioned numbers etc. is left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), middle (third). This is performed by starting the variable display (scroll display) in the order of special symbols, stopping the symbols that are changing after a predetermined time in order, and displaying the result of the special symbol variable display game. Further, on the display device 41, various effect displays such as appearance of characters are performed in order to improve the interest. further,
In the decorative special map variable display game, the lamp display device 8 is used as another decorative special pattern (identification information).
In the lamp display sections 1 and 2 of 0, the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol) changes by repeating (flashing) the lighting display and the extinguishing display. The variable display of the lamp display units 1 and 2 is stopped after a predetermined time from the start by "extinguishing" in the case of off and "lighting" in the case of big hit or small hit. In the display device 41, the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol) is displayed as the fourth symbol 671 of the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol 672 of the special symbol 2.

Regarding the decorative special figure variable display game on the display device 41, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game may be executed on different display devices or different display areas, or the same display may be performed. It may be executed in the device or the display area. In addition, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game may be in the execution state (running state) at the same time.

When the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36 or the ordinary variation winning device 37 is made at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random number value at the time of winning detection is the big hit value), as a result of the special figure variation display game. A specific result mode (special result mode) is derived from the display pattern, and the big hit state (
It becomes a special game state). In response to this, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a special result mode (for example, a state in which numbers such as “7, 7, 7” are aligned).

At this time, the special variation winning device 38, 39, the special winning opening solenoid 38b, 39b (Fig. 7
By energizing (see 9), the special winning opening is converted from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). That is, the special winning openings provided in the special variation winning devices 38, 39 are wide open for a predetermined time or until a predetermined number of game balls are won, and during this time, the player has the privilege of being able to obtain many game balls. Granted.

When the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 is made at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random number value at the time of winning detection is the small hit value), the result of the special figure changing display game As a result, a specific result mode (small hit result mode) is derived from the display pattern, and the small hit state is set. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes the small hit result mode. In the present embodiment, the big hit random number value is also used for the small hit judgment, but the small hit value (small hit judgment value) is different from the big hit value (big hit judgment value).

At this time, the special variation winning device 38, the special variation winning device 39, the special winning opening solenoid 38
b, by energizing the special winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 79), the special winning opening is converted from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined short time. In addition, the total opening time of the big winning opening is shorter in the small hit state (small hit game state) than in the big hit state (special game state), so in the small hit state, the player can obtain a game more than in the big hit state. There is little value (number of balls acquired). In both the small hit state and the big hit state, the big winning opening is open, but the big hit state may be called a first special game state and the small hit state may be called a second special game state.

In the present embodiment, in the small hit state, only the special variation winning device 38 is operated and only the lower special winning opening is opened. However, both of the special variation winning devices 38 and 39 are in the small winning state. It may be configured so that both the lower special winning opening and the upper special winning opening are opened by operation.

Further, in the present embodiment, the probability variation state is a small hit RUSH (rush) state in which small hits frequently occur in the special figure 2 variable display game. Then, in the small hit rush, the special variation winning device 38 is opened with high frequency. In addition, even in the time saving state, small hit RU
A configuration in which the SH (rush) state is set is also possible.

  Here, the difference between the big hit and the small hit will be described.

A big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device, and a small hit is a specific result without the operation of the condition device. The condition device is activated when a big hit occurs in the special figure variation display game (stop display of the big hit symbol), and when the condition device is activated, for example, a big hit state occurs and a special electric role as a special electric accessory. This means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning devices 38 and 39 is set. The condition device not operating means that the above-mentioned specific flag is not set as in the case of winning the small hit lottery, for example. In addition, "
The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch that is turned on and off electrically. Further, the "conditional device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies in this specification. Is used as a term having the meaning of.

Specifically, in the case of a big hit, the special variation winning devices 38 and 39 are opened by setting the big hit flag, while in the case of a small hit, a special hit is set by setting the small hit flag. The variable winning devices 38 and 39 are opened.

After the jackpot state, if there is a V winning in the jackpot state, the state changes to the probability variation state, and if there is no V winning, the state shifts to the normal game state or the like. On the other hand, after the end of the small hit state (shorter time than the big hit state), the game state returns to the original state before the start of the small hit state. In the big hit state, the big hit probability is low, but in the small hit state, the big hit probability before the start of the small hit state is maintained (the probability state does not change in the small hit). Therefore, the small hit rush state in which small hits occur frequently continues from the start of the probability variation state to the occurrence of the big hit state (until the result of the special figure variation display game becomes the big hit result), and the big hit probability is throughout the small hit rush state. Is maintained at a high probability (probability fluctuation state).

Note that the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52 may be configured as separate display devices or the same display device, but each special figure variation display game is not executed at the same time. Is set as follows.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variable display game.

In addition, although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36 in the starting winning port 36
a, a starting opening 2 switch 37a, a gate switch 34a, a winning opening switch 35a, a special winning opening switch 43 (a lower large winning opening switch 38a, an upper large winning opening switch 39a, FIG. 79), a specific area The switch 72 (V switch, FIG. 72, FIG. 79) includes a coil for magnetic detection, and a non-contact magnetic proximity sensor that detects a game ball by utilizing the phenomenon that the magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. (Hereinafter referred to as proximity switch) is used (FIG. 79). Further, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or the front frame open detection switch 64 (main frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 is a machine Microswitches with specific contacts can be used (Fig. 7
9).

Note that the details of the game control related to the game (variable display game, etc.) and the effect control related to the effect, and the game control device 100 that executes the game control and the effect control device 300 that executes the effect control are based on the block diagram and the flowchart. It will be described later in the fifth embodiment.

[Arrangement of accessory lamp, lighting mode of accessory lamp and RUSH lamp]
As shown in FIGS. 35 to 37, in the present embodiment, the mode display portion 674, the RUSH lamp 812, and the special winning opening unit 806 displayed on the display device 41 are substantially diagonal lines of the game board 30 (from the upper left to the lower right). They are arranged so as to be lined up on a virtual line 822 (broken line in FIG. 37) forming a line (toward). In particular, in the special variation winning device 38, a slide type opening / closing door 38c for opening / closing the special winning opening is arranged on the virtual line 822 (FIG. 37). It should be noted that the return valve 814 is arranged so that at least its tip overlaps with the imaginary line 822 by rotating.

The accessory lamp 820a is in the normal game state (FIG. 35) and the specific game state (excluding the probability variation state).
In FIG. 36, it is arranged at a position separated from the virtual line 822. At this time, the RUSH lamp 812 is basically off. Note that in the normal game state and the specific game state (excluding the probability variation state), the accessory lamp 820a may be turned on for the effect as shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 35, the accessory lamp 820a has the effect control device 3 in the normal game state.
The warp passage 40e is lit up under the control of 00 to decorate the warp passage 40e, but when a game ball is won in the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, for example, a variable display game to be described later is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 36, when a specific game state (excluding the probability variation state) such as a time saving state occurs, a mode display portion 674 of "?? Mode" is displayed in the upper left portion of the display device 41, and the movable accessory is displayed. 820 moves to an intermediate position so that the accessory lamp 820a is arranged at a position substantially in the center of the lower portion of the display device 41. In addition, the accessory lamp 820a and the display device 41 are provided for production by the production control device 300.

For example, in the center of the display device 41, there is a display that says “Turn off the light by button operation” and a display that encloses the letters “PUSH” displayed below it with an ellipse. Information 618a is displayed. At this time, the accessory lamp 820a is arranged at a position directly below the operation promotion information 618a, and in the initial state, all the LED lamps (7 pieces) that constitute the accessory lamp 820a are turned on. Further, at a position between the operation promotion information 618a of the display device 41 and the accessory lamp 820a, remaining number information 618b indicating the remaining number of LED lamps to be extinguished, such as "7 more", is displayed.

Every time the player presses the effect button 25 in the above state, the LED lamps constituting the accessory lamp 820a are turned off one by one, and the remaining number indicated by the remaining number information 618b is also decreased by one. .. When all the LED lamps are turned off, the display device 41 and the accessory lamp 820
a, an upper effect unit 40c, a side effect unit 40d, a falling accessory 810 and the like are used to perform an arbitrary effect.

As shown in FIG. 37, when the probability change state (the state where a small hit rush can occur), the accessory lamps 820a are arranged so as to be lined up on the virtual line 822. At this time, the RUSH lamp 81
No. 2 emits light (indication light emission) in order to suggest that it is a state of probability change (state in which a small hit rush can occur). At this time, the accessory lamp 820a (movable accessory 820) indicates a probable variation state depending on its operating position, but the probable variation state (a state in which a small hit rush can occur) is generated by the same light emission mode as the RUSH lamp 812. May suggest.

Further, when the game ball wins the normal variable prize device 37, the variable display game using the accessory lamp 820a is started (FIG. 38). When the result of the variable display game is a small hit, the accessory lamp 820a is stopped and displayed. For example, the RUSH lamp 812 blinks during the small hit state. When the big hit occurs, the accessory lamp 820a is stopped and displayed. For example, during the big hit state, the RUSH lamp 812 emits a color different from that in the probability changing state. The RUSH lamp 812, for example, emits blue light in the probability variation state, emits yellow light in the jackpot state, or red light.
It emits light in the order of seven colors (rainbow colors) of orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple.

Note that the RUSH lamp 812 and the accessory lamp 820a may be constantly turned on (either in the same emission color, in the same system (similar) emission color or in a completely different emission color) as long as the probability variation state is maintained. However, the light emission color may be changed in accordance with a predetermined time interval (for example, the timing at which the effect control device 300 receives the detection signal transmitted from the valve sensor 814a).

In the probability change state, at least the accessory lamp 820a, the RUSH lamp 812, and the special winning opening unit 806 are lined up on the virtual line 822, so that the player can enter the big winning opening unit 806 that can win a small hit (or a big hit). The line of sight is easy to turn.

At this time, in the display device 41, in addition to the mode display section 674 “tiger mode”, the RUS
Suggested light emission regarding the probable change state of the H lamp 812 and the accessory lamp 820a is displayed on the virtual line 822. This allows the player to display the mode display 674, the accessory lamp 820a, and RUSH.
The presence of the virtual line 822 is recognized by the lamp 812, and the line of sight can be easily directed to the special winning opening unit 806 arranged on the virtual line 822.

Further, when the small hit state is reached and the special winning opening 38 is opened, the effect image 617 (specific image) is displayed on the virtual line 822. The effect image 617 is, for example, a virtual line 82.
2. A movie (still image may be used) showing the movement of sparks in the direction along the top is applied,
For example, it is displayed in association with the opening time of the special winning opening 38. Thereby, the player recognizes the existence of the virtual line 822 by the mode display portion 674, the effect image 617, the accessory lamp 820a, and the RUSH lamp 812, and the line of sight of the special winning opening unit 806 arranged on the virtual line 822 is seen. It becomes easier to face.

Further, on the display device 41, an arrow image 619 (second suggestion information) indicating the direction in which the special winning opening unit 806 is arranged is displayed on the virtual line 822 in synchronization with the display of the effect image 617. The arrow image 619 may be a still image, but may be displayed as a moving image moving toward the special winning opening unit 806 along the virtual line 822. Thereby, the player's line of sight can be surely directed to the special winning opening unit 806.

Further, the RUSH lamp 812 may be arranged on the opposite side of the accessory lamp 820a with the special winning opening unit 806 interposed therebetween. That is, the RUSH lamp 812 is connected to the special winning opening unit 806.
The special winning opening unit 806 is arranged on the virtual line 822 at the lower right of the prize hole 820a.
It may be arranged so as to be sandwiched by the RUSH lamp 812. As a result, the accessory lamp 820
a and the RUSH lamp 812 are turned on, the special winning opening unit 806 sandwiched between them
Can be noticed. Further, the special winning opening unit 806 and the RUSH lamp 812 may be integrated with each other, so that the special winning opening unit 806 can be noticed by turning on the RUSH lamp 812.

[Variable display mode of accessory lamp]
FIG. 38 is a schematic diagram showing a lighting mode of the accessory lamp 820a. FIG. 38 (a) shows a lighting mode in which a lighting portion orbits during a change, and FIG. 38 (b) shows two lighting states alternately during a change. FIG. 38 (c) shows a repeating lighting mode, in which the lighting part changes so as to draw a figure 8 when changing.

As shown in FIG. 38, the accessory lamp 820a is a centrally arranged LED lamp 823a.
And a plurality of (six in the present embodiment) LED lamps 823b arranged around the LED lamp 823a. It is preferable that the LED lamps 823a and 823b be capable of full-color lighting.

As a display pattern of the variable display game, for example, as shown in FIG. 38A, one of the plurality of LED lamps 823b is first turned on, the LED lamp 823b is turned off, and the LED lamp 823b is turned clockwise (or Adjacent LED lamps 823b are turned on (in the counterclockwise direction), and by repeating this, the LED lamps 823a are displayed by cyclic lighting in which lighting is circulated around the LED lamps 823a. At this time, the number of circulations may be once or plural times. Then, when the result mode of the variable display game is out of order (may be a small hit), only the LED lamp 823a lights and L
All the ED lamps 823b are turned off. On the other hand, when the result mode of the variable display game is a small hit (may be off), the LED lamp 823a is turned off and all the LED lamps 823b are turned on. Further, when the result mode of the variable display game is a big hit, all the LED lamps 823a and 823b are turned on, or all of them are blinked and turned on in synchronization.

Further, as shown in FIG. 38 (b), the variable display game may be displayed by alternately lighting the LED lamps 823a and 823b. The result mode is shown in FIG.
It is similar to the case of 8 (a). When the next variable display game is played, the LED lamps 823a and 823b may be turned off for a predetermined short time so that the start and end of the variable display game are clear.

Further, as shown in FIG. 38 (c), the variable display game may be displayed by cyclic lighting in which the lighting position is moved so as to draw a figure 8 horizontally centering on the LED lamp 823a. The result mode is the same as in the case of FIG. 38 (a).

It should be noted that full-color LEDs can be applied to the LED lamps 823a and 823b, and in this case, the cyclic lighting is performed by lighting the LED lamps 823a and 823b.
Instead of extinguishing, it is also possible to adopt a lighting mode in which a specific emission color is circulated in a state where all the LED lamps 823a and 823b are lit. For example, one LED lamp is turned on with a yellow emission color, all the remaining LED lamps are turned on with a blue emission color, and the LED lamps 823a and 823b are moved so that the yellow illumination moves to the adjacent LED. It is also possible to adopt a lighting mode in which lighting is circulated between the lighting.

In the case of the alternate lighting, two different emission colors are emitted from the LED lamp 823a and the LED.
A lighting mode in which the lamp 823b alternately emits light may be used. For example, the LED lamp 823
It is also possible to adopt a lighting mode in which a state in which a is turned on in a blue emission color and a state in which all the LED lamps 823b are turned on in a yellow emission color are alternately switched.

Further, in the result mode, when the LED lamp 823a and the LED lamp 823b are all turned on, and if the LED lamps 823a and 823b are off, the LED lamp 823a is turned on with a specific emission color and the LED lamp 8
23b lights up in a light emission color other than the specific light emission color, and if it is a small hit, the LED lamp 823b.
It is only necessary to apply a lighting mode in which the LED lamp 823a lights up in a specific emission color and the LED lamp 823a lights up in an emission color other than the specific emission color. For example, when the LED lamp 823a is off, the LED lamp 823a is illuminated with a yellow emission color, and the LED lamp 823b is illuminated with a blue emission color.
It is also possible to adopt a lighting mode in which the D lamp 823a lights up in a blue emission color and the LED lamp 823b lights up in a yellow emission color.

Further, the variation display game may be played not only in the probability variation state shown in FIG. 37, but also in the normal game state shown in FIG. 35 and the time saving state (specific mode state) shown in FIG. 36, but at least variation in the probability variation state. The execution time (variation time) of the display game is set shorter than the execution time in the normal gaming state. As a result, for example, when a small hit rush occurs, the variable display game can be played quickly and the rush feeling can be enhanced to improve the enjoyment of the game.

As the execution time (shortest fluctuation time, longest fluctuation time, average fluctuation time), for example, in the normal game state (1.2 seconds, 2 seconds, 1.6 seconds), in the time saving state (0.5 seconds, 1 second, 0.7
5 seconds) and the probability variation state (small hit rush state) (0.5 seconds, 1 second, 0.75 seconds). The longest variation time in the normal game state is long variation of the special figure 2 variation display game (described later)
In this case, it may be 10 minutes, for example. In the case of reach, the maximum fluctuation time may be extended to several tens of seconds.

[Sticker to decorate the general winning prize unit]
39A is a schematic view of the general winning opening unit 808 and the collective display device 50.
39B is a detailed view of the collective display device 50, FIG. 39C is a schematic view of a sticker 815 decorating the general winning opening unit 808, and FIG. 39D is position information 8 displayed on the sticker 815.
19a and 819b and schematic diagrams of related information 817 are respectively shown.

As shown in FIG. 39 (a), the general winning opening unit 808 (unit) includes a plurality of general winning openings 35 (winning openings), an outlet 30b, and a collective display device 50, and the lower left of the game area 32. Is arranged at the position (left of the starting winning opening 36). In addition, although the general winning a prize port 35 is incorporated in the unit in the present embodiment, the starting winning a prize port 36, the special variation winning devices 38, 39 and the like may be incorporated.

Further, the general winning opening unit 808 has a shape in which the front wall 808a covers the general winning opening 35 and the out opening 30b, and the lower portion follows the boundary of the game area 32.

The front wall 808a may be transparent or opaque, but when it is opaque, the portion overlapping the collective display device 50 is made transparent so that the collective display device 50 is visible. Further, a seal 815 (decoration portion) for decorating the general winning opening unit 808 is attached to the front wall 808a.

As shown in FIG. 39C, the outer shape of the seal 815 is formed following the shape of the front wall 808a. The seal 815 may be transparent or opaque, but when it is opaque, a transparent portion 815a (which may be an opening) is provided at a position overlapping the collective display device 50. Even when the seal 815 is transparent, it is preferable to provide an opening at a portion overlapping the collective display device 50. Accordingly, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the collective display device 50 is difficult to be visually recognized due to the reflection of light on the surface of the seal 815. Further, it is possible to avoid dust from adhering between the seal 815 (adhesive portion) and the collective display device 50.

Further, on the sticker 815, position information 819a, 819b (general winning hole position information) indicating the position of the general winning opening 35 and position information 818a (out opening position information) indicating the position of the outlet 30b are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 39 (d), the position information 819a, 819b has a form in which, for example, a rectangular frame and the character "IN" are arranged therein, and the position where the character "IN" is arranged is generally. It shows that it is the winning hole 35. Further, the position information 818a also has a form in which, for example, a rectangular frame and the character “OUT” are arranged inside the frame, and indicates that the position where the character “OUT” is arranged is the out port 30b. The area within the frame of the position information 818a, 819a, 819b may be transparent or opaque except for characters.

On the sticker 815, related information 817 (round information) that enumerates the display mode of the number of big hits displayed by the round display unit 60 (duration of big hits, upper limit of the number of rounds) is displayed. The related information 817 includes 16 rounds (probably changed), 16 rounds (from the left) in a rectangular frame.
(Normal), 8 rounds, 2 rounds of lighting patterns are arranged in a horizontal row.

Correspondingly, as shown in FIG. 39 (b), emphasis information that emphasizes (indicates) that the transparent display portion 815 a of the sticker 815 is the round display portion 60 at a position corresponding to the round display portion 60. 815b is displayed. The emphasis information 815b may have a rectangular frame shape surrounding the round display portion 60 as shown in FIG. 39B, or may have an underline shape drawn below the round display portion 60. Further, the seal 815 has emphasis information 815b.
And an associated information 817 are displayed as an arrow 815c. The emphasized information 815b and the associated information 817 are displayed.
Suggests that and correspond. Therefore, the player can clearly determine which round this time is by comparing the lighting information displayed in the frame of the emphasized information 815b with the related information 817.

Further, the seal 815 has patterns 816a, 816b, 81 for decorating the entire seal 815.
6c is displayed. The patterns 816a, 816b, 816c have, for example, a star-shaped frame shape. Each pattern can be arbitrarily displayed within a range in which the visibility of the collective display device 50, the related information 817 and the like can be secured. For example, the pattern 816 a that overlaps the related information 817 is displayed such that a part of the pattern 816 a is covered by the related information 817. The pattern 816a overlapping the transparent portion 815a is displayed such that the portion overlapping the transparent portion 815a (collective display device 50) disappears. The pattern 816b is displayed on the position information 818a at a position that does not overlap with the character "OUT". The pattern 816c is on the position information 819a, 819b, and
It is displayed at a position where the character “IN” is arranged inside.

The sticker 815 of the present embodiment displays the winning hole position information (position information 819a, 819b) and the related information 817, so that the player can pay attention. Further, since the related information 817 is displayed on the sticker 815, the contents of the special game state can be easily understood.

In addition, the seal 815 of the present embodiment is the seal 81 that decorates the general winning opening unit 808.
In FIG. 5, related information 817 indicating the lighting mode of the round display unit 60 is displayed. Thereby, by applying the sticker 815 reflecting the related information 817 to other models having different related information 817, the general winning a prize unit 808 can be applied to other models.
The versatility of the general winning opening unit 808 can be enhanced.

By the way, since the general winning a prize unit 808 is arranged in the game area 32, it is necessary to change the sticker that decorates the general winning a prize unit 808 due to the change of the model (the spec and the motif of the model change), It is essential to change the sticker according to the object and board design. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the seal 8 for decorating the general winning opening unit 808
15, the lighting mode of the number of rounds of the collective display device 50 is displayed as the related information 817. As a result, by changing the seal 815, both the display of the number of rounds and the decoration that matches the motif (the patterns 816a, 816b, 816c are different decorations that are not star-shaped (*)) can be changed together. , The general winning a prize unit 808 can be reused by changing only the seal 815 while keeping the structure of the general winning opening unit 808, and the cost can be reduced. The collective display device 50 does not have to be mounted on the general winning opening unit 808, and even in this case, by displaying the related information 817 on the sticker 815, the player can watch the sticker 815. ..

More specifically, for example, (1) the same batch display device 5 is used as it is when it is used for a model having the same model motif but different specifications (a small number of rounds, for example, only two).
A general winning opening unit 808 including 0 is used: In this case, since it is not necessary to have four LED lamps indicating the number of rounds, a seal (not shown, for example, not shown, for example, which makes the left two invisible (difficult to see) is used. A black sticker) may be attached from above and reused. As a result, the general winning opening unit 808 can be used in common, leading to cost reduction. Further, the two LED lamps may be made to emit light only when the power is turned on as being invisible (difficult to visually recognize), and may function as an LED lamp for confirming whether power is being supplied. At that time, at least the red light emission of the LED lamp, which is difficult to see due to a seal (not shown), is visible.

In addition, for example, when the two LED lamps are invisible as in (2) and (1), the black information is also attached to the emphasis information 815b that emphasizes the number of rounds (for example, when the shape is a rectangular frame shape (□)). Paste (not shown) so that it can be seen that the LED lamps to be emphasized are the two LED lamps on the right side: This makes it possible for the emphasis information 815b to appear in a state in which the left half is missing, so You can emphasize the remaining right half without emphasizing.

[Arrangement of movable and falling weapons in each mode]
FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the operation of the accessory unit and the falling accessory unit, the display mode on the display device, etc., and FIG. 40 (a-1) is an example in the case of the normal game state, FIG. -2)
40B shows an example of the case where the drop accessory unit operates in the state of FIG.
-1) is an example in the case of suggesting a specific mode, and FIG. 40 (b-2) is FIG. 40 (b-1).
40 (c-1) shows an example of the case where the drop accessory unit operates in the state of FIG. 40), and FIG. 40 (c-2) shows the example of the case of FIG. 40 (c-1). An example of the case where the drop accessory unit operates in the state is shown respectively.

As shown in FIG. 40 (a-1), in the normal game state (initial state), the movable accessory 820
Is arranged so as to cover the left side of the display device 41 as an initial position, the drop accessory 810 is arranged so as to cover a part of the upper side of the display device 41, and the "normal mode" is arranged at the upper left position of the display device 41.
A mode display portion 674 composed of the characters and is displayed. Further, for example, there is no hold in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the fourth symbol 671 of the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol 672 of the special figure 2 are displayed as “x” (variable display game non-execution), 2 hold number display section 660 and special figure 2 hold number display section 66
0 is “0”, and the stop symbol “123” is displayed in the variable display area 615. In the normal game state, the mode display unit 674 may not be displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 40 (a-2), for example, when the variable display game (special display region 610 is omitted) of the special figure 1 is started, the fourth symbol 671 of the special figure 1 is "○" (special 1) is displayed), and the fourth symbol 672 of special figure 2 is displayed as "x" (variable display game of special figure 2 is not executed), and the special figure 2 number-of-holds display section 660 is "1". Is displayed, the special figure 2 hold number display portion 660 is displayed as “0”, and the identification information is variably displayed in the variable display area 615.

At this time, with the execution of the variable display game (or with the occurrence of reach), the falling accessory 81
0 drops (turns by a predetermined angle). However, the falling accessory 810 does not interfere (collide) with the movable accessory 820. Further, the falling accessory 810 is the character 826 displayed on the display device 41.
Cover a. However, an opening 810a is formed in the falling accessory 810 so that the character 826a can be visually recognized from the opening 810a. Note that, for example, when the result of the variable display game is out of alignment, the falling accessory 810 returns to the initial position.

As shown in FIG. 40 (b-1), when the mode display portion 674 is in a specific game state such as a time saving state so as to display the word "?? Mode", the accessory lamp 820a causes the display device 41 to display.
The movable accessory 820 moves from the initial position to the intermediate position so that the movable accessory 820 is arranged in the front of the center of the lower part of the. In this way, when the movable accessory 820 moves, the movable accessory 820 interferes with the falling accessory 810 (
There is no collision). Further, in the upper center of the display device 41, a specific display 826b composed of, for example, the word "heat" is displayed for the purpose of increasing attention to the "?? Mode". Also,
A lens 810b (convex lens or Fresnel lens) is provided in the opening 810a of the falling accessory 810.
Is fitted.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 40 (b-2), the falling accessory 810 falls in the same manner as described above. At this time, the lens 810b overlaps the specific display 826b and magnifies the character of "heat". Note that, for example, when the specific game state ends, the movable accessory 820 and the falling accessory 810 return to their initial positions. Note that the operation promotion information 618a (FIG. 36) can be applied instead of the specific display 826b, and the lens 810b may display the operation promotion information 618a in an enlarged manner so that the button operation is prompted.

As shown in FIG. 40 (c-1), in the case of the probable variation state, the mode display unit 674 displays the word "tiger mode", the RUSH lamp 812 is lit, and "right hit" is instructed. A hit instruction display 620 is displayed at a position on the right side of the display device 41. Further, the movable accessory 820 is moved from the intermediate position (or the initial position) to the final position so that the accessory lamp 820a is arranged at the lower right side of the display device 41 and adjacent to the RUSH lamp 812. There is. The final position may be the maximum position at which the movable accessory 820 can be moved farthest from the initial position. In this way, when the movable accessory 820 moves, the movable accessory 820 drops the falling accessory 810.
It does not interfere (collide) with. Further, at the final position of the movable accessory 820, the accessory lamps 820a are arranged so as to be lined up on a virtual line 822 (broken line in FIG. 37) on which the mode display portion 674, the RUSH lamp 812, and the special winning opening unit 806 are arranged. Has been done.

Further, a character 826a (may be different from the character 826a in FIG. 40 (a-1)) is displayed in the upper center of the display device 41 for the purpose of attracting attention to the "tiger mode". Further, a light guide plate 810c is fitted into the opening 810a of the falling accessory 810, and the light guide plate 801a has a shape of sunglasses (may be other) that can be visually recognized by reflecting light from the light source of the light guide plate 810c. It has 827. Here, as described above, the mode display unit 6
74, the accessory lamp 820a, and the RUSH lamp 812 are on the same straight line (phantom line 8 in FIG. 37).
22) placed on top.

After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 40 (c-2), the falling accessory 810 drops in the same manner as described above as an effect with a high expectation of a big hit. At this time, the light guide plate 810c overlaps the character 826a, and the figure 827 also overlaps the “eyes” of the character 826a.
26a forms a display mode like wearing sunglasses. That is, the display content displayed on the display device 41 and the display content displayed on the falling accessory 810 are combined to form one display content (character). Note that, for example, when the production with high expectation of a big hit ends, the movable accessory 820 and the falling accessory 810 respectively return to their initial positions, but the movable accessory 820
Is maintained in its final position.

When the probability variation state ends and the normal game state is entered, the movable accessory 820 returns to the initial position. On the other hand, even if the special figure variation display game becomes a small hit in the probability changing state and shifts to the small hit state, the small hit state ends in a short time, so that the movable accessory 820 may be maintained at the final position. It is suitable. In addition, the special figure variation display game becomes a big hit during the probability variation state, and the probability variation state ends and the big hit state (
When shifting to the special game state), the movable accessory 820 may be returned to the initial position if the number of big hit rounds (round number upper limit value) is large, or maintained at the final position if the number of big hit rounds is small. May be.

In addition, not limited to the above, in the case of high expectation of a big hit in the variable display game (that is,
(Under a predetermined condition), by vibrating the movable accessory 820, the accessory lamp 820a
Even in the probability changing state, the mode display portion 674, the RUSH lamp 812, and the special winning opening unit 806 may be deviated from the same straight line (the virtual line 822 in FIG. 37). Also,
The drop accessory 810 may be lengthened so that when the drop accessory 810 falls, the light guide plate 810c and the character 826a are arranged on the imaginary line 822 in FIG.

In any of the above modes, the movable accessory 820 and the falling accessory 810 do not interfere with each other, and the right hitting instruction display 620, the fourth symbol 671 of the special figure 1, and the fourth symbol 672 of the special figure 2 are also included. ,
The special figure 2 number-of-holds display section 660, the special figure 2 number-of-holds display section 660, and the variable display area 615 are not hidden by the movable accessory 820 or the falling accessory 810, and are visible. However, the mode display portion 674 can change the display position depending on the game state or the states of the movable accessory 820 and the drop accessory 810, and may overlap the movable accessory 820 or the drop accessory 810.
It should be noted that the presentation mode in which the falling symbol object 810 falls after the specific display 826b and the character 826a are displayed on the display device 41 has been described. However, on the contrary, after the dropping symbol object 810 falls, the specific display 826b and the character 826a are displayed on the display device 41. May be displayed as a presentation mode.

[Structure of movable parts]
FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the movable accessory 820. The movable accessory 820 (role unit) of the present embodiment includes the movable accessory body 950 and the movable accessory 820 on the game board 30 (not shown in FIG. 41).
A base member 952 for attaching to the movable accessory main body 950 (decorative member 960) and an upper guide member 954 for guiding the upper part of the movable accessory main body 950 (decorative member 960). It is configured.

The movable accessory main body 950 includes an upper movable portion 970 that is vertically movable and a lower movable portion 982 that is horizontally movable. The movable accessory main body 950 includes an upper slide guide member 976 that defines the movable range of the upper movable portion 970 and a lower slide guide base member 978 (lower slide guide member 979) that defines the movable range of the lower movable portion 982. It has an L-shaped outer shape by the upper slide guide member 976 and the lower slide guide base member 978 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 42).

The movable accessory main body 950 has a decoration member 960 that is rotatably attached to the upper movable portion 970 and the lower movable portion 982 to operate as a link mechanism between the upper movable portion 970 and the lower movable portion 982. .. The decoration member 960 includes a guide member 964a (pin) that contacts the upper guide member 954 and a guide member 964b (pin) that contacts the lower guide member 956.

The base member 952 is a unit in which a vertical portion 952a extending vertically and connected to the upper slide guide member 976 and the like and a horizontal portion 952b extending horizontally and to which the lower slide guide base member 978 is attached are integrated. It has an L-shaped outline when viewed from the front.

The upper guide member 954 is a guide surface 95 that extends in the vertical direction and is in contact with the guide member 964a.
It is a member having 4a. The lower guide member 956 is a member that includes a guide surface 956a that extends in the left-right direction and that contacts the guide member 964b. Guide surface 954a and guide surface 956a
Are arranged so as to be at the same position in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine 10, and as described later, the guide surface 95.
4a and the guide surface 956a each have a curved surface shape that forms one curved surface (see FIG. 45 and the like).

Boss-shaped screw holes 978a (two locations) are arranged in the lower slide guide base member 978, and the positions of the lower guide member 956 that face the screw holes (they are connected by broken lines in the figure. (Also similarly indicated) is provided with insertion holes 956b (two places), and a screw (not shown) is inserted into the insertion holes 956b and screwed into the screw holes 978a, whereby the movable accessory main body 950 and the lower guide member 956 is connected. In addition, a boss-shaped screw hole 954b is arranged in a lower portion of the upper guide member 954, and the screw hole 954b of the lower guide member 956 is arranged.
An insertion hole (not shown) is disposed at a position corresponding to the upper guide member 954 and the lower guide member 956 by inserting a screw (not shown) into the insertion hole and screwing the screw hole 954b. It

Here, the decoration member 960 changes its inclination angle while sliding along the longitudinal direction of the lower slide guide member 979 as described later. However, the decorative member 960
Are arranged at positions different from the guide surface 954a and the guide surface 956a in the front-rear direction, and do not interfere with the guide surface 954a and the guide surface 956a even if the decoration member 960 moves.

FIG. 42 is a detailed exploded perspective view of the movable accessory 820. As shown in FIG. 42, the movable accessory main body 950 includes a decoration member 960, an upper movable portion 970, a lower movable portion 982, and the like.

The decoration member 960 includes a decoration base member 961, an LED board 962, and a decoration front plate 963. The decoration member 960 has a form in which the LED substrate 962 is accommodated from the opening of the decoration base member 961 and the opening of the decoration base member 961 is closed by the decoration front plate 963. 963 forms the outer shape of the decoration member 960.

The decorative base member 961 has an accommodating portion 961a capable of accommodating the LED substrate 962. A rotary shaft 961b rotatably supported by a bearing 970b, which will be described later, is arranged on the upper side of the back surface of the housing 961a, and a rotary shaft 961c rotatably supported by a bearing 982a, which is described later, is rotatably supported on the lower side. Are arranged.

Further, a support portion 961 for supporting the guide member 964a is provided above the decorative base member 961.
d (dowel hole) is arranged, and a support portion 961e (dowel hole) that supports the guide member 964b is also arranged in the lower part.

The guide member 964a has a pin shape in which the base end is fitted into the support portion 961d, and the side surface of the pin contacts the guide surface 954a and is slidable with respect to the guide surface 954a (FIG. 41). Similarly, the guide member 964b has a pin shape in which the base end is fitted into the support portion 961e, and the side surface of the pin contacts the guide surface 956a and is slidable with respect to the guide surface 956a (FIG. 41). ..

Further, as another form, the guide member 964a has a shaft portion (
A dowel) and a roller portion rotatably supported by a shaft portion (dowel), and the roller portion is in point contact with the guide surface 954a and can roll (slide) with respect to the guide surface 954a ( Figure 4
1). Similarly, the guide member 964b has a shaft portion (dowel) fitted into the support portion 961e,
The roller portion is rotatably supported by the shaft portion (dowel), and the roller portion is in point contact with the guide surface 956a and can roll (slide) with respect to the guide surface 956a (FIG. 41).

The LED board 962 has a large number of LED lamps 962a arranged on the entire surface on the decorative front plate 963 side, and a part of the LED lamps 962a is an LED lamp 823a (FIG. 38) and an LED lamp of the accessory lamp 820a. 823b (FIG. 38).

The decorative front plate 963 is made of, for example, a semitransparent material as a whole, and is used as the LED substrate 9
The light from the LED lamp arranged at 62 can be transmitted to some extent. Also,
The accessory lamp 820a (LED lamp 823a and LED lamp 823b of the decorative front plate 963)
), A window portion 963a (opening portion or transparent portion) is formed at a position facing the
The light of the accessory lamp 820a can be reliably viewed from 63a.

The upper movable portion 970 has an upper slide guide member 976, a rack gear member 967, and a base guide member 966 as members fixed to the base member 952. Also, the upper movable portion 97
0 includes a driving source 968, an upper movable portion main body 970a, a relay movable substrate 972, a wiring guard member 974, a relay movable substrate pressing member 971 and the like as members that move in the vertical direction.

The upper slide guide 976 includes a rail 976a extending in the vertical direction and a slider 976b that slides along the longitudinal direction of the rail 976a. The rail 976a has a plurality of insertion holes 976c that communicate with the plurality of screw holes 952c formed in the vertical portion 952a.
The rail 976a is fixed to the vertical portion 952a by inserting a screw (not shown) into each insertion hole 976c and screwing the screw into the screw hole 952c.

The rack gear member 967 is a member that extends in the vertical direction, and is arranged such that the linear gear 967a faces a pinion gear 968a described below. The rack gear member 967 has insertion holes 967b through which screws (not shown) are inserted at a plurality of different positions (four positions) in the longitudinal direction. On the other hand, in the vertical portion 952a, a plurality of boss-shaped screw holes 952d formed at positions different from the insertion hole 976c in the left-right direction are arranged. Screw hole 9
52d communicates with the insertion hole 967b in a one-to-one manner. Therefore, the rack gear member 967 is
A screw (not shown) is inserted into the insertion hole 967b in a state where the insertion hole 967b and the screw hole 952d are communicated with each other, and a screw (not shown) is screwed into the screw hole 952d to be fixed to the vertical portion 952a.

The base guide member 966 is a member that extends in the vertical direction, and includes the upper movable portion main body 970a (
The sliding portion 970d) abuts and slides. Further, the base guide member 966 has insertion holes 966a through which screws (not shown) are inserted at both ends in the longitudinal direction. On the other hand, at the mounting position of the base guide member 966 of the vertical portion 952a (a position different from the mounting positions of the upper slide guide 976 and the rack gear member 967), a boss-shaped screw hole 952e is formed.
Are arranged in pairs (the lower screw holes are not shown). Therefore, the base guide member 966
Is fixed to the vertical portion 952a by inserting a screw (not shown) into the insertion hole 966a with the insertion hole 966a communicating with the screw hole 952e and screwing a screw (not shown) into the screw hole 952e. ..

The upper movable portion main body 970a is integrated with the bearing portion 970b and the mounting portion 970c. The bearing portion 970b rotatably supports the rotary shaft 961b attached to the decorative base member 961. The mounting portion 970c is mounted on the slider 976b of the upper slide guide member 976. As a result, the upper movable portion main body 970a is attached to the slider 97.
It moves up and down according to the sliding operation of 6b. Further, the sliding portion 970d contacts the surface of the base guide member 966 on the front surface side of the gaming machine 10 and is slidable in the vertical direction with respect to the base guide member 966.

A drive source 968 (motor) having a pinion gear 968a is attached to the upper movable portion main body 970. The drive source 968 is fixed to the upper movable portion main body 970 by being screwed (two places) to the upper movable portion main body 970.

The drive source 968 rotationally drives the circular pinion gear 968a, and the pinion gear 968a engages with (engages with) the gear 967a of the rack gear member 967. Therefore, when the drive source 968 is driven, the pinion gear 968a rotates and moves along the longitudinal direction (vertical direction) of the rack gear member 967 without slipping, whereby the upper movable portion main body 9
70 moves up and down.

At this time, the slider 976b attached to the upper movable portion main body 970 slides vertically along the longitudinal direction of the rail 976a, and the sliding portion 970d of the upper movable portion main body 970 abuts the base guide member 966 and slides vertically. To do. Therefore, since the upper movable portion main body 970 is in a two-point supporting state by the rail 976a and the base guide member 966 which are at different positions, the displacement other than the vertical direction is restricted and the upper movable portion main body 970 shakes in the horizontal direction (front-back direction, left-right direction). Without (without the pinion gear 968a falling off from the gear 967a), it is possible to move in the vertical direction. Note that, for example, when the drive source 968 is driven in the normal rotation, the upper movable portion main body 970 is lowered, and when the drive source 968 is driven in the reverse rotation, the upper movable portion main body 970 is raised.

A relay movable substrate 972 (wiring guard member 974, relay movable substrate pressing member 971) is attached to the upper movable portion main body 970. The relay movable board 972 is electrically connected to, for example, the effect control device 300, the drive source 968, and the LED board 962 (characteristic lamp 820a), and drives the drive signal based on the signal transmitted from the effect control device 300. 968, and a signal representing the lighting pattern of the LED lamp is transmitted to the LED substrate 962 (role lamp 820a).

A wiring guard member 974 and a relay movable substrate pressing member 971 are used as members for mounting the relay movable substrate 972. The relay movable substrate pressing member 971 sandwiches the relay movable substrate 972 from the width direction of the relay movable substrate 972 together with the wiring guard member 974. The relay movable substrate 972 is sandwiched and screwed to the wiring guard member 974 (two positions). ) Will be done.
The wiring guard member 974 is a member for preventing wiring (not shown) and the like connected to the relay movable substrate 972 from coming into contact with other portions and breaking due to the movement of the upper movable portion main body 970.
Further, the wiring guard member 974 is in a state in which the relay movable substrate pressing member 971 is screwed (
With the relay movable substrate 972 being sandwiched), the upper movable portion main body 970 is screwed (at two positions).

The lower slide guide base member 978 is attached to the horizontal portion 952b of the base member 952, and a plurality of screw holes (not shown) are arranged on the side surface facing the horizontal portion 952b. On the other hand, an insertion hole 952f communicating with the screw hole is arranged in the horizontal portion 952b. Therefore, the lower slide guide base member 978 is fixed to the horizontal portion 952b by inserting a screw (not shown) into the insertion hole 952f and screwing the screw into the screw hole.

The base end of the lower slide guide base member 978 has a vertical portion 952a of the base member 952.
The urging member unit 981 described later is attached to the base end of the urging member unit 981.

Further, the lower slide guide base member 978 is provided with an inclined surface 978b whose tip is far from the vertical portion 952a, but which is gently inclined from the base end side of the lower slide guide base member 978 toward the tip side when attached.

A lower slide guide member 979 (rail) is attached to the inclined surface 978b. A plurality of insertion holes 979a are formed in the bottom surface of the lower slide guide member 979 along the longitudinal direction,
A screw hole 978c is formed at a position of the inclined surface 978b facing the insertion hole 979a, and a screw (
The lower slide guide member 979 is fixed to the lower slide guide base member 978 (the inclined surface 978b) by screwing (not shown) into the screw hole 978c in a state of being inserted into the insertion hole 979a.

The lower movable portion 982 is attached to the lower slide guide base member 978. The lower movable portion 982 supports the bearing portion 982a and a bearing portion 982a that rotatably supports a rotating shaft 961c arranged on the decorative base member 961, and supports the bearing portion 982a in the longitudinal direction of the lower slide guide member 979. And a slider 982c which is a base of the slide portion 982b and which is attached to the lower slide guide member 979 and is slidable along the longitudinal direction of the lower slide guide member 979. And

In the above configuration, when the driving source 968 is driven in the normal rotation and a downward force is applied to the upper movable portion main body 970, the upper movable portion main body 970 transmits the force to the decoration base member 961 via the rotation shaft 961b. By the way, the decorative base member 961 includes the upper movable portion main body 970 and the lower movable portion 9
It is rotatably attached to 82 and functions as a link mechanism for transmitting a force between the upper movable portion main body 970 and the lower movable portion 982. Therefore, when the decorative base member 961 receives a force from the drive source 968, the upper movable portion main body 970 (bearing portion 970b) and the lower movable portion 982 (bearing portion 9).
82a), the upper movable portion main body 970 moves downward in the vertical direction, and the lower movable portion 98
2 moves toward the tip side of the lower slide guide member 979. At this time, the decoration base member 961 (decoration member 960) is inclined from the upright state by moving the upper part in the up-down direction and the lower part toward the tip side of the lower slide guide member 979. On the contrary, when the driving source 968 is driven in the reverse direction and a rising force is applied to the upper movable portion main body 970, the upper movable portion main body 970, the lower movable portion 982, and the decorative base member 961 perform the reverse operation.

In order to reliably perform the above operation, in the initial state (normal game state), the rotation shaft 961c is positioned vertically below the rotation shaft 961b (the bottom dead center of the link mechanism) at the tip side of the lower slide guide member 979. It is necessary to design the decorative base member 961 so as to be arranged at the displaced position.

FIG. 43 is an exploded view of the urging member unit 981 that constitutes the movable accessory main body 950. As shown in FIG. 43, the biasing member unit 981 includes a spring-shaped biasing member 981b, a front cover member 981c that supports the biasing member 981b in a manner in which the biasing member 981b is wound, and a front cover member. The urging member 981b is arranged at the rear part of the 981c and together with the front cover member 981c.
And a biasing base member 981i that is attached to the lower slide guide base member 978 and that houses a unitary body 981a including a front cover member 981c, a biasing member 981b, and a rear cover member 981g. And a pin 981m that rotatably supports the integrated body 981a on the urging base member 981i by penetrating the urging base member 981i.

For example, a Conston spring is applied to the urging member 981b, and the feeding direction thereof coincides with the longitudinal direction of the lower slide guide member 979. Further, the biasing member 981b is preferably one in which the restoring force (biasing force) is substantially constant regardless of the amount of extension, and the number of windings can be arbitrarily applied. The tip of the biasing member 981b is connected to the lower movable portion 982 (see FIG. 44).

The front cover member 981c includes a cylindrical portion 981d around which the biasing member 981b is wound, and a cylindrical portion 91d.
A flange portion 981e, which is coaxially attached to the side surface of 81d (the front surface side of the gaming machine 10) and has a larger diameter than the cylindrical portion 981d, is provided. The base end of the biasing member 981b is connected to the cylindrical portion 981d. The rear cover member 981g has the same shape as the flange portion 981e, and is coaxially connected to the cylindrical portion 981d. Further, the flange portion 981e and the rear cover member 981
An insertion hole 981f and an insertion hole 981h, through which the pin 981m is inserted, are formed at the respective centers of g.

The tip of the pin 981m is a male screw 981n, and the male screw 981n is the female screw 981n.
It is designed to be screwed into 1p. Further, the biasing base member 981i is formed with an insertion hole 981j and an insertion hole 981k through which the pin 981m is inserted. Therefore, by accommodating the integral member 981a in the biasing base member 981i, inserting the pin 981m into the insertion hole 981j, the insertion hole 981f, the insertion hole 981h, and the insertion hole 981k, and screwing the male screw 981n into the female screw 981p. The biasing member unit 981 is constructed.

When the urging member 981b is pulled in this state, the urging member 981b is fed out from the integrated product 981a and the integrated product 981a rotates. When the urging member 981b is released in this state, the urging member 981b is wound around the integral member 981a by its own restoring force, and at this time, the integral member 981a rotates in the opposite direction by the restoring force.

FIG. 44 is a perspective view showing the operation of the lower movable portion 982 that guides the movement of the movable accessory main body 950. FIG. 44A shows the case where the biasing member 981b is in the initial state, and FIG. The case where the biasing member 981b is extended is shown respectively.

As shown in FIG. 44 (a), the lower movable portion 982 is in the initial state (normal game state).
It is arranged on the base end side of the lower slide guide member 979. Then, as shown in FIG. 44B, the lower movable portion 982 can be moved to the tip side of the lower slide guide member 979. In this case, in the lower movable portion 982, the slide portion 982b has the bearing portion 982a and the decoration member 9.
The force from the drive source 968 (and the load of the decoration member 960 and the upper movable portion 970) is applied to the lower slide guide member 979 to move the tip end side of the lower slide guide member 979. A restoring force is generated in the biasing member 981b by being fed out from the integral member 981a.

On the other hand, when the drive source 968 is stopped, the lower movable portion 982 can return to the base end side by the restoring force of the biasing member 981b. However, the lower movable portion 982 is subjected to a load that slides from the decoration member 960 (and the upper movable portion 970) in the distal direction. Further, the lower slide guide member 979 is inclined toward the front end direction, and the lower movable portion 982 receives a force of sliding toward the front end side by its own weight.

Therefore, it is preferable to design the restoring force of the biasing member 981b so as to match the force of sliding in the tip direction. Accordingly, even if the drive source 968 is stopped, the lower movable portion 98
2 can remain in the position when the drive source 968 was stopped. By rotating the drive source 968 in the reverse direction, the lower movable portion 982 and the decoration member 960 (and the upper movable portion 970) can be returned to the initial position, and the load on the drive source 968 at that time can be reduced. You can Therefore, the lower movable portion 982 can be smoothly slid on the lower slide guide member 979 by the normal rotation drive and the reverse rotation drive of the drive source 968.

By the way, the lower movable portion 982 is moved to the intermediate position (FIGS. 47 and 48) and the maximum position (FIGS. 49 and 50).
) There is a case of performing a reciprocating effect. As the effect, for example, in order to pretend that the small hit rush (probably changed state) is finished, the movable accessory 820 is intentionally moved from the maximum position (final position, see FIG. 37) corresponding to the small hit rush (probably changed state) to the intermediate position ( (See FIG. 36), but in reality, the small hit rush does not end yet, so there is a “gase production” that immediately returns to the maximum position. At the time of such an effect, the movable accessory 820 (the lower movable portion 982
If the movement of) is not smooth (because the restoring force is not constant depending on the position of the movable accessory 820 if it is a normal spring), the movement may be found to be a “gase production”.
However, with the above-described smooth movement, the result cannot be known until the operation is completely completed, and the effect can be watched to the end.

Note that the restoring force of the biasing member 981b (the force that returns the biasing member 981b to the base end side) slides in the distal direction due to the load of the decorative member 960 (and the upper movable portion 970) and the weight of the lower movable portion 982. It is also preferable to design so as to be larger than (force for pulling the urging member 981b toward the tip side). Accordingly, when the drive source 968 is stopped, the lower movable portion 982 and the decoration member 960 (and the upper movable portion 970) can be smoothly returned to the initial position by the urging force of the urging member 981b.

[Operation of the movable accessory body]
FIG. 45 is a front view (initial position) of the movable accessory main body 950. 46 is a rear view of FIG. 45. FIG. 47 is a front view (middle position) of the movable accessory main body 950. 48 and 47
FIG. FIG. 49 is a front view (maximum position, final position) of the movable accessory main body 950. 50 is a rear view of FIG. 49.

The operation of the movable accessory main body 950 will be described. First, the initial position (
In the normal gaming state (see FIG. 35), the upper movable portion 970 is arranged at the highest position, the lower movable portion 982 is arranged on the proximal end side of the lower slide guide member 979, and the decoration member 960 is in a state in which the longitudinal direction is raised. They are arranged in a state where the inclination angle is the largest.

Here, the guide surface 954a has a surface that stands vertically as a whole, but has a shape that curves toward the tip side of the lower slide guide member 979 in the lower portion. Further, the guide surface 956a has a shape that forms substantially the same curved surface as the guide surface 954a in the area adjacent to the guide surface 954a, and has an inclined surface (curved surface) that is inclined similarly to the lower slide guide member 979 in the intermediate area. However, it has a curved surface that rises so that the inclination becomes larger as it goes to the tip in the tip region. The guide member 964a is in contact (or point contact) with the guide surface 954a, and the guide member 964b is in contact (or point contact) with the guide surface 956a.

In the above arrangement, when the drive source 968 is driven in the normal rotation, the upper movable portion 970 (upper movable portion main body 970a) is lowered, and the lower movable portion 982 is moved through the decoration member 960 (link mechanism) to the upper movable portion 970. It receives a force from the (upper movable part main body 970a) and moves to the tip side of the lower slide guide member 979. At that time, the guide member 964a slides (or rolls) downward on the guide surface 954a, and the guide member 964b slides (or rolls) on the guide surface 956a toward the tip end side of the lower slide guide member 979, whereby the decoration member 960 is formed. The inclination angle of is decreasing.

Further, the rotating shaft 961b rotates with respect to the upper movable portion 970 based on the change in the tilt angle, and the rotating shaft 961c also rotates with respect to the lower movable portion 982 based on the change in the tilt angle. Furthermore, the urging member 981b is extended from the urging member unit 981 by the amount that the lower movable portion 982 has moved to the tip side of the lower slide guide member 979.

Next, at the intermediate position shown in FIGS. 47 and 48 (for example, in the time saving state, see FIG. 36), the guide member 964b is in contact (or point contact) with the intermediate region of the guide surface 956a. on the other hand,
The guide member 964a is separated from the guide surface 954a. In this state, the accessory lamp 820a is arranged in front of the center of the lower portion of the display device 41 (see FIG. 36).

Then, at the maximum position (probably changed state, see FIG. 37) shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, the guide member 964b is in contact (or point contact) with the tip end region of the guide surface 956a. Along with this, the rotary shaft 961c (bearing portion 982a) rises in the slide portion 982b. In order to reliably perform this operation, the slide portion 982b needs to be formed so that its longitudinal direction is inclined toward the tip side of the lower slide guide member 979 with respect to the normal line of the lower slide guide member 979.
In this state, the accessory lamp 820a is arranged in front of the lower right end of the display device 41 (see FIG. 37).

47 to 50, when the drive source 968 is stopped, the movement of the upper movable portion 970, the lower movable portion 982, and the decoration member 960 is stopped, but as described above, when the drive source 968 is stopped. Can stay in position. When the drive source 968 is driven in the reverse direction, the upper movable portion 970, the lower movable portion 982, and the decoration member 960 can be returned to their initial positions.

[Operation / Effect of Second Embodiment]
According to the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, the gaming machine 10 that generates a special gaming state (big hit, small hit) when the result of the game (variable display game) is a special result operates in the special gaming state. A possible variable winning device (big winning unit 806), a first light emitting means (role lamp 820a) capable of emitting light in response to a special game state, and a specific game state (probably changed state) different from the special game state. A second light emitting means (RUSH lamp 812) for performing a suggestive light emission indicating that (small hit rush can be generated)), and the first light emitting means (role lamp 820a) is the second light emitting means ( When the RUSH lamp 812) performs the suggested light emission, the variable winning device (big winning opening unit 806) and the second light emitting means (RUSH lamp 812)
It is characterized in that it is arranged on an imaginary line 822 including a line connecting with.

Thereby, the change of the game state and the place to be watched at that time (special variation winning device 38),
The accessory lamp 820a, the RUSH lamp 812, and the special winning opening unit 806 allow the player to easily grasp (through the virtual line 822 that the player can recall).

In the second embodiment, the execution time of the game (variable display game) when the second light emitting means (RUSH lamp 812) emits the suggested light emission is the execution time of the game (variable display game) in the normal game state different from the special game state. It is characterized by being shorter than. As a result, for example, when a small hit rush occurs, the variable display game can be played quickly and the rush feeling can be enhanced to improve the enjoyment of the game.

In the second embodiment, a display device 41 capable of displaying a predetermined effect is provided, and the display device 41 is capable of displaying a specific image (effect image 617) according to a special game state, and a specific image (effect image 617). Is displayed on the virtual line 822. As a result, the player can see the effect image 617, the accessory lamp 820a, the RUSH lamp 812,
The presence of the virtual line 822 is recognized by the mode display portion 674) as an option, and the virtual line 8
It becomes easy to direct the line of sight to the special winning opening unit 806 (special variation winning device 38) arranged on the 22.

In the second embodiment, the display device 41 can display the first suggestion information (mode display unit 674) that suggests that the probability of being in the special game state is high in association with the suggestive emission (the suggestive emission of the probability change state). The first suggestion information (mode display unit 674) is displayed on the virtual line 822. As a result, the player has the mode display section 674, the accessory lamps 820a, and R.
The USH lamp 812 (optional effect image 617) recognizes the existence of the virtual line 822, and the line of sight can be easily directed to the special winning opening unit 806 (special variation winning device 38) arranged on the virtual line 822.

In the second embodiment, the display device 41 interlocks with the suggestive light emission (the suggestive light emission at the time of a small hit), and the second suggestive information (the arrow image) that suggests the direction in which the variable winning device (the special winning opening unit 806) is arranged. 619) can be displayed, and the second suggestion information (arrow image 619) is displayed on the virtual line 822. As a result, the player's line of sight can be changed to the special winning opening unit 806 (
It can be surely directed to the special variation winning device 38).

In the second embodiment, the first light emitting means (accessory lamp 820a) is the second light emitting means (RU).
It is characterized in that it emits light in a light emission mode related to the light emission mode of the SH lamp 812). As a result, the accessory lamp 820a can support the suggestion of the small hit rush by the RUSH lamp 812, and the line of sight can be easily directed to the special winning opening unit 806 (the special variation winning device 38).

The second embodiment is characterized in that the second light emitting means (RUSH lamp 812) emits light in a light emitting mode different from the suggested light emission in the special game state (big hit). This makes it possible to distinguish the suggestion of the small hit rush from the suggestion of the big hit.

In the second embodiment, the second light emitting means (RUSH lamp 812) is arranged on the opposite side of the first light emitting means (role lamp 820a) with the variable winning device (big winning opening unit 806) interposed therebetween. Characterize. As a result, the accessory lamp 820a and the RUSH lamp 812 are turned on, so that the special winning opening unit 806 (special variation winning device) sandwiched between them can be noticed.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment is provided with a unit (general winning hole unit 808) having a winning hole (general winning hole 35), and is special when the result of the game (variable display game) is a special result. In the gaming machine 10 that generates a gaming state, a unit (general winning opening unit 8
On the front surface of (08), a decorative portion (seal 81) for decorating the unit (general winning opening unit 808)
5), the sticker 815 displays general winning opening position information (position information 819a, 819b) indicating the position of the winning opening (general winning opening 35), and related information 817 related to the special gaming state. It is characterized by

As a result, the sticker 815 displays the winning hole position information (position information 819a, 819b) and the related information 817, so that the player can gaze at it. Further, since the related information 817 is displayed on the sticker 815, the contents of the special game state can be easily understood.

Also, by applying the sticker 815 reflecting the related information 817 to other models having different related information 817, the general winning a prize unit 808 can be applied to other models, and the general winning a prize unit 808 can be applied. The versatility of can be improved.

In the second embodiment, the unit (general winning opening unit 808) is provided with a collective display device 50 for displaying the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 so as to be visible from the front of the unit (general winning opening unit 808). The related information 817 is information related to the display mode of the collective display device 50. Thereby, the game state displayed on the collective display device 50 can be grasped from the related information 817.

In the second embodiment, the related information 817 is characterized in that it is information about the duration (round) of the special game state. Accordingly, the round information displayed on the collective display device 50 can be grasped from the related information 817.

In the second embodiment, the seal 815 is characterized in that an area overlapping the collective display device 50 is opened when the unit (general winning opening unit 808) is viewed from the front. Thereby, the seal 815 can be attached to the front surface of the unit (general winning opening unit 808) without impairing the visibility of the collective display device 50. Further, even when the seal 815 is transparent, it is preferable to open the portion overlapping the collective display device 50. Accordingly, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the collective display device 50 is difficult to be visually recognized due to the reflection of light on the surface of the seal 815. Further, it is possible to avoid dust from adhering between the seal 815 (adhesive portion) and the collective display device 50.

In the second embodiment, the seal 815 is characterized in that a region overlapping the collective display device 50 is transparent when the unit (general winning opening unit 808) is viewed from the front.
Thereby, the seal 815 can be attached to the front surface of the unit (general winning opening unit 808) without impairing the visibility of the collective display device 50.

In the second embodiment, the seal 815 has the related information 817 in the collective display device 50.
The highlighting information 815b for highlighting the position where the lighting display according to is emphasized is displayed. As a result, in the collective display device 50, the lighting display portion (round display portion 60) corresponding to the related information 817 can be surely grasped.

In the second embodiment, the unit (general winning opening unit 808) includes an out opening 30b into which an out ball flows, and a sticker 815 displays out opening position information (position information 818a) indicating the position of the out opening 30b. It is characterized by being. This allows the unit (
The position of the outlet 30b in the general winning hole unit 808) can be grasped.

The second embodiment is characterized in that the seal 815 has a shape that follows the outer shape of the front surface of the unit (general winning opening unit 808). As a result, the unit of the seal 815 (
Positioning before attachment to the general winning opening unit 808 can be easily performed.

[Third Embodiment]
The third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 70. The configurations other than those described below may be similar to those of the first embodiment or the second embodiment. Further, in the following embodiment,
The same reference numerals are used for the configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first embodiment or the second embodiment, and redundant description will be omitted as appropriate for the description.

[Game control device and production control device]
FIG. 51 is a rear view of the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 51, the gaming machine 1
The game control device 100 (main board) is arranged in the lower part of the back of 0. Game control device 10
0 is covered with a transparent case 100a and can be seen from the outside of the case 100a.

Further, on the back surface of the game machine 10, on the game control device 100 (main board) or the game control device 1
Setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112 are arranged adjacent to 00.
The setting key switch 93 can be operated by opening the lid 93a.

In the gaming machine 10, when the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are turned on, the power is turned on to enter the setting variable state. For example, the performance display device 152 (FIG. 79) mounted on the game control device 100 is displayed. The current probability setting value is displayed, and the probability setting value can be changed by pressing the RAM initialization switch 112 that is also used as the setting value changing switch. Then, by turning off the setting key switch 93, the setting variable state ends, and the performance display device 152 (FIG. 79) is also turned off. When the power is turned on while the setting key switch 93 is turned on and the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned off, the setting confirmation state is displayed, the current probability setting value is displayed on the performance display device 152, and the setting key switch 93 is turned on. When turned off, the setting confirmation state ends, and the performance display device 152 also turns off.

The effect control device 300 is arranged on the upper part of the back surface of the gaming machine 10. Performance control device 300
Are housed in a transparent sub-board box 841, and the sub-board box 841 is attached to the back surface of the gaming machine 10.

[Structure of sub-board box]
FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view of a sub-board box 841 that houses the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG. 52, the sub board box 841 includes the effect control device 300 and the ROM board 8.
40 is accommodated. The ROM substrate 840 stores information regarding the effect contents of the effect control device 300, and stores unique information for each model of the gaming machine 10.

The sub-board box 841 is a box lower member 842 attached to the back surface of the gaming machine 10.
Engages with the box lower member 842, and the effect control device 300 and the ROM substrate 840.
A box upper member 843 (first case member) that forms an inner space 841a that houses the box lower member 842 (second case member), and a fastening screw 858 that fastens the box lower member 842 and the box upper member 843, Fastening screw 8 attached to the box upper member 843
And a cover member 859 (caulking member) that covers 58.

A plurality of insertion holes 844a are formed on the outer edge of the effect control device 300, and screws 844b are inserted into the insertion holes 844a. A plurality of insertion holes 844a are also formed in the ROM substrate 840, and screws 844b are inserted into the insertion holes 844a.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with a socket 844c, and the ROM substrate 840 is provided with a connector 840a fitted into the socket 844c. And the connector 840
A is fitted in the socket 844c, and the integrated body of the effect control device 300 and the ROM substrate 840 is attached to the box lower member 842. Note that the socket 844c and the connector 840a may be interchanged in their mounting positions.

The box lower member 842 is a tray-shaped member having an opening on the side facing the box upper member 843, and is a member to which the effect control device 300 and the ROM substrate 840 are attached inside. The box lower member 842 is provided with a screw hole 842a at a position facing the insertion hole 844a arranged in the effect control device 300 and the ROM substrate 840.

Therefore, while the insertion hole 844a and the screw hole 842a are in communication with each other, the screw 844b is inserted into the insertion hole 844a and screwed into the screw hole 842a, whereby the effect control device 300 and the ROM substrate 840 are attached to the box lower member 842. Be done.

The box lower member 842 is provided with a plurality of ribs 842b (convex portions) that come into contact with the effect control device 300 and the ROM substrate 840. The rib 842b avoids interference with the device arranged in the effect control device 300 and the device arranged in the ROM substrate 840 and directly abuts the substrate (see FIG. 55). Thereby, the bending of the effect control device 300 and the ROM substrate 840 after the attachment can be reduced.

The box upper member 843 is a tray-shaped member that has substantially the same outer shape as the box lower member 842, and is open on the side facing the box lower member 842. A large number of vent holes 843a are formed in the box upper member 843, and heat generated from the effect control device 300 is radiated to the outside. In addition, the notch 8 is provided at a position of the box upper member 843 corresponding to the outer circumference of the ROM substrate 840.
43b is formed. The box upper member 843 can take out the ROM substrate 840 by cutting with a nipper or the like in accordance with the cut 843b. Amusement machine 10
In the development stage, since the ROM substrate 840 may be frequently taken out, the notch 843b is provided in consideration of work efficiency. Of course, in normal use, the ventilation hole 843
Plays the same role as a.

A display area 843c is provided on the surface of the box upper member 843, and a seal or an information display plate on which specifications of the gaming machine 10 and the like are described is arranged in the display area 843c.

The box lower member 842 and the box upper member 843 have a structure for engaging with each other. The upper part of the box lower member 842 is provided with two first engaged parts 845, and the upper part of the box upper member 843 is provided with two first engaging parts 846. The first engaged portion 845 has a claw shape that extends upward from the box lower member 842 and is bent in a direction away from the box upper member 843 from an intermediate position. The first engaging portion 846 is the box upper member 8
An engaging hole 846a is provided which extends from the upper part of 43 toward the box lower member 842 side and into which the first engaged portion 845 is inserted and engaged.

Further, a second engaged portion 847 is provided below the box lower member 842, and the box upper member 8 is provided.
The second engaging portion 848 is also provided on the lower portion of 43. The second engaging portion 848 is the second engaged portion 847.
It can be deformed so that it can be detachably fitted into. The second engaged portion 847 is also the second
A space is provided for deforming the second engaging portion 848 in order to release the engagement with the engaging portion 848.

The box upper member 843 and the box lower member 842 are engaged with each other by first engaging the box upper member 843 with the engaging hole 846a of the first engaging portion 846 in a state where the box upper member 843 is inclined with respect to the box lower member 842.
The engaged portion 845 is inserted (engaged), and in that state, the box upper member 843 is moved to the first engaging portion 84.
6 as a center so as to face the box lower member 842 and the second engaging portion 848.
May be engaged with the second engaged portion 847. On the contrary, when the engagement is released, the second engaging portion 84
The box upper member 843 may be rotated (turned up) in the opposite direction about the first engaging portion 846 in a state where 8 is deformed and the engagement with the second engaged portion 847 is released.

The box lower member 842 includes a plurality of back surface engaging portions 842c that engage with the back surface of the gaming machine 10 (FIGS. 55 and 56).

FIG. 53 is a front view of the box upper member 843 to which the cover member 859 is attached.
54 is a detailed view of a part of FIG. 53 (an enlarged view of a part surrounded by a dashed line of a rectangle in FIG. 53).
54A is a diagram in the case where the cover member 859 is not provided, and FIG. 54B is a diagram in the case where the cover member 859 is attached. 55 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 53 and its partial detailed view. 56 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB of FIG. 53, showing a case where the cover member 859 is attached, and a partial detailed view thereof.

The box lower member 842 and the box upper member 843 are configured to fasten the box lower member 842 and the box upper member 843 after engagement. The box lower member 842 includes a lower fastening portion 849 (FIG. 53) extending downward from the lower portion of the box lower member 842 and having an opening on the side facing the box upper member 843. The box upper member 843 extends downward from the lower portion of the box upper member 843, and has an upper fastening portion 852 provided with an accommodating portion 853 in which a cover member 859 described later is accommodated on the opposite side to the side facing the box lower member 842 ( 52).
Then, the lower fastening portion 849 and the upper fastening portion 852 are fastened to each other by a fastening screw 858 (fastening means) (FIG. 53, FIG. 54 (a)).

The lower fastening portion 849 and the upper fastening portion 852 are the box lower member 842 and the box upper member 84.
3 overlap each other when engaged with each other, and the box lower member 842 and the box upper member 84
A partition space 851 (FIG. 55) different from the internal space 841a formed by 3 is formed. A fastening screw 858 can be accommodated in this partition space 851.

The lower fastening portion 849 is provided with a screw hole 850 (fastening means) (FIGS. 55 and 56), and the upper fastening portion 852 is provided with an insertion hole 854 (fastening means) (FIGS. 55 and 56). Also, screw holes 850
The insertion hole 854 communicates with the lower fastening portion 849 and the upper fastening portion 852 when they overlap each other. Therefore, the lower fastening portion 849 and the upper fastening portion 852 are fastened to each other by introducing the fastening screw 858 from the accommodation portion 853 side of the upper fastening portion 852, inserting the fastening screw 858 into the insertion hole 854, and screwing the screw 850 into the screw hole 850. (FIG. 55, FIG. 56).

A cover member 859 (FIG. 54) that covers the fastening screw 858 is attached to the upper fastening portion 852 to prohibit access of a tool (driver or the like) that releases the fastening of the fastening screw 858.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 53 and the like, in the present embodiment, a pair of lower fastening portions 849 are arranged (as a first lower fastening portion and a second lower fastening portion), and the upper fastening portion 852 is also correspondingly (first A pair is arranged (as an upper fastening portion and a second lower fastening portion), but each has a shape in which the left and right sides are mutually inverted when viewed from the front. Corresponding to this, the cover member 859 attached to one of the upper fastening portions 852 (first upper fastening portion) and the cover member 859 attached to the other of the upper fastening portions 852 (second upper fastening portion) are left and right when viewed from the front. Has an inverted shape. Also, the upper fastening portion 852
A partition space 851 (first partition space) is formed by overlapping one (first upper fastening portion) and one (first lower coupling portion) of the lower fastening portion 849 facing the other one of the upper fastening portions 852. (Second
A partition space 851 (second partition space) is formed by the upper fastening portion) and the other (second lower fastening portion) of the lower fastening portion 849 facing the upper fastening portion overlapping each other (see FIGS. 53 and 55).

It should be noted that it is possible to realize the fastening between the box upper member 843 and the box lower member 842 even if only one of the pair of lower fastening portion 849 and upper fastening portion 852 is fastened with the fastening screw 858 and the other is not fastened. it can. At that time, the fastening screw 858 may be housed in the partition space 851 formed in the other of the pair of lower fastening portion 849 and upper fastening portion 852 (see FIG. 55).

As shown in FIG. 54A, the accommodation portion 853 has a shape that follows the outer shape of the cover member 859, as described later. The fixing portion 8 having an insertion hole 854 formed in the bottom portion of the housing portion 853.
54a. With the fastening screw 858 inserted into the insertion hole 854, the screw hole 850 (see FIG.
2) and the fixing portion 854a is fixed to the lower fastening portion 849 by screwing into the accommodation portion 853.
The (upper fastening portion 852) can be fastened to the lower fastening portion 849.

Further, a through hole 855 is formed in a portion above and below the fixed portion 854a of the bottom portion of the housing portion 853. The third engaged portions 856 extend from the upper inner wall and the lower inner wall of the housing portion 853 so as to cover a part of the through hole 855 when viewed from the front.
Extends toward the bottom of the containing portion 853 (FIG. 55).

[Constitution of cover member]
The cover member 859 has an outer shape including a rectangular lid portion 860 when viewed from the front and a notch 861 (FIG. 54 (b)) protruding outward on one side of the lid portion 860, and the center of the lid portion 860. It has a circular opening 862. Correspondingly, as described above, the accommodation portion 853 includes the inner wall having a shape that follows the outer shape (the lid portion 860 and the notch 861) of the cover member 859 and the uneven shape. The peripheral edge of the lid portion 860 (and the notch 861) is covered with the cover member 85.
When 9 is housed in the housing portion 853, it comes into contact with the peripheral edge of the housing portion 853. Thereby, the housing portion 8
The rattling of the cover member 859 accommodated in 53 can be reduced. In addition, the cover member 859 (
By attaching the notch 861 to the lid portion 860), the mounting direction of the cover member 859 to the accommodating portion 853 can be determined (FIG. 54 (b)).

FIG. 57 is a perspective view of the cover member 859. FIG. 58 is a rear view showing the mounting surface of the cover member 859. FIG. 59 is a front view of the cover member 859. FIG. 60 is a left side view of the cover member 859. 61 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIGS. 58 and 59. FIG. 62
FIG. 60 is a sectional view taken along line BB of FIGS. 58 and 59.

On the mounting surface of the cover member 859 (cover portion 860) (the surface facing the housing portion 853), the housing portion 8 is formed.
A pair of third engagement portions 863 (engagement portions) that engage with the 53 side is arranged (FIGS. 57 and 58,
(Fig. 60). The third engagement portions 863 are arranged in a pair so as to be line-symmetrical (back-to-back) with the opening portion 862 sandwiched in the up-down direction (or the left-right direction). The third engagement portion 863 is a member that extends in the normal direction of the mounting surface, and has a wedge portion 863a that projects from the other portion of the third engagement portion 863 and has a side surface of an arrow shape at the tip thereof. (Fig. 60).

Correspondingly, the housing portion 853 includes the third engaged portion 856 as described above (FIG. 55). The third engaged portions 856 are arranged in a pair so as to engage with the third engaging portion 863 from the outside, and are inclined so as to abut against the wedge portion 863a of the third engaging portion 863 when the cover member 859 is attached. The surface 856a is provided.

The third engaging portion 863 and the third engaged portion 856 are each deformable (
68). The width of the fixing portion 854a is preferably shorter than the distance between the one third engaging portion 863 and the other third engaging portion 863. As a result, the third engaging portion 863 is moved to the third position.
By abutting (pressing) the engaged portion 856, the pair of third engaging portions 863 can be easily deformed in the direction of approaching each other (the direction of approaching the fixing portion 854a), and the third engaging portion Part 8
It is possible to easily engage 63 with the third engaged portion 856.

Conversely, in the direction in which the tip portions of the pair of third engaged portions 856 are separated from each other, the third engaged portions 856 are
And / or by deforming the third engaging portion 863 so that the wedge portions 863a of the pair of third engaging portions 863 come close to each other, the third engaging portion 863 (wedge portion 863a).
The engagement with the third engaged portion 856 can be released. Therefore, the third engaging portion 863 is
It is detachably engaged with the third engaged portion 856.

Fitting portions 864A, 864B, 864C, 864D (FIGS. 57 and 58) that are fitted to the accommodation portion 853 side are arranged on the mounting surface of the cover member 859 (lid portion 860). Correspondingly, the accommodating portion 853 includes fitting portions 857A, 857B, 857C, 857D into which the fitting portions 864A-864D are fitted (FIG. 54 (a)). Fitting part 8
The 64A-864D is fitted into the fitted portions 857A-857D, respectively, whereby rattling of the cover member 859 after the third engaging portion 863 is engaged with the third engaged portion 856 can be reduced. The fitting portion 864A is designed wider than the other fitting portions 864B-864D, and the fitted portion 857A is correspondingly designed wider than the other fitting portions 857B-857D. As a result, like the notch 861, the housing portion 8 of the cover member 859 is
The mounting direction with respect to 53 can be determined.

Further, on the mounting surface of the lid portion 860, a reinforcing portion 865A that connects the fitting portion 864A and the fitting portion 964B to reinforce their rigidity, and a reinforcing portion 865A that connects the fitting portion 864C and the fitting portion 864D to reinforce the rigidity of both. A reinforcing portion 865B is provided (FIGS. 57 and 58).

The opening 862 has a diameter larger than that of the fastening screw 858, and is formed so as to accommodate the fastening screw 858 inside when viewed from the front with the cover member 859 accommodated in the accommodation portion 853. .. Then, as shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, the opening 862 is provided with a cutting portion (first cutting portion 866, second cutting portion 867) so as to cover at least part of the opening portion 862. The cutting portion opens the opening 862 by cutting itself.

The cutting portion extends, for example, in the up-down direction (may be inclined) while passing through the center of the opening 862, and connects to the upper end and the lower end of the inner wall of the opening 862 (FIG. 57,
58, 59, 61) and the first cutting portion 86 when the opening 862 is viewed from the front side.
The second cutting portion 867 connected to the first cutting portion 866 in an arrangement orthogonal to (intersecting) 6 (see FIG. 57,
58, 59, and 62), and the opening 862 is covered with a cross shape (FIGS. 57 and 58) by the first cutting portion 866 and the second cutting portion 867. The second cutting section 867 is arranged so as to project to the front side of the lid section 860 (the side opposite to the side on which the third engaging section 863 is arranged) (FIG. 6).
0, FIG. 62), and is connected to the lid 860 at a position on the outer periphery of the opening 862 (FIGS. 59, 62).

The cutting portion (first cutting portion 866, second cutting portion 867) covers the front of the fastening screw 858 so that a driver or the like cannot access the fastening screw 858 for fraud prevention. But,
When the production control device 300 or the ROM substrate 840 is repaired or replaced, it is necessary to cut the cutting portion to open the opening 862 and remove the fastening screw 858. The cutting part is cut by cutting means such as a nipper.

Therefore, it is preferable that the first cutting portion 866 be formed to have a thickness smaller than that of the lid portion 860, as shown in FIG. Thereby, the first cutting portion 866 can be easily cut. Further, as shown in FIG. 62, it is also preferable to form a groove 867b in the second cutting portion 867 from the mounting surface (back surface) side. Accordingly, the second cutting portion 867 can be easily cut by cutting the portion where the groove 867b is formed. Here, the shape of the groove 867b is arbitrary, and as shown in FIGS. 57 and 58, a concentric circle with the opening 862 may be formed. If the cutting strength of the cutting means such as a nipper is sufficient, the thickness of the first cutting portion 866 may be the same as the thickness of the lid portion 860, and the groove 867b of the second cutting portion 867 may be omitted. ..

63A and 63B are views showing a cutting region 866a of the first cutting portion 866 of the cover member 859, where FIG. 63A is a front view and FIG. 63B is a back surface (mounting surface) view. 64 is a diagram showing a cutting region 867a of the second cutting portion 867 (and the first cutting portion 866) of the cover member 859, where FIG. 64 (a) is a front view and FIG. 64 (b) is a back surface (mounting). FIG.

When the cutting portion is cut, for example, first, as shown in FIG. 63, it is preferable to cut the cutting region 866a of the first cutting portion 866 by using a cutting device such as a nipper, and then, as shown in FIG. It is preferable to cut the cutting area 867a (groove 867b) of the second cutting portion 867 as shown in FIG. Alternatively, conversely, the cutting area 867a of the second cutting portion 867 may be cut, and then the cutting area of the first cutting portion may be cut. In any case, the cut piece 868 (FIG. 67 (a)) separated by cutting the first cutting portion 866 and the second cutting portion 867 is the front side of the lid portion 860 due to the component of the second cutting portion 867. Since the cutting piece 868 has a large weight in the lid 8,
It is possible to avoid falling on the front side of 60 and falling on the mounting surface side. As a result, the cutting piece 86
It is possible to avoid the complexity of taking 8 in the partition space 851 (FIG. 55) and taking it out. Of course, by cutting out the cutting piece 868 in a state where the operator supports the portion to be the cutting piece 868 in advance, it is possible to more reliably prevent the cutting piece 868 from entering the inside of the accommodation portion 853.

[Mounting process of cover member]
FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a process of attaching the cover member 859, FIG. 65 (a) shows a process of attaching the fastening screw 858, and FIG. 65 (b) shows a state before attaching the cover member 859. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a process of attaching the cover member 859, FIG. 66 (c) shows a state in which the cover member 859 is being attached to the box upper member 843, and FIG. 66 (d) shows the cover member 859 with the box upper member. The state of being attached to 843 is shown respectively.

The attaching process of the cover member 859 will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 65A, the lower fastening portion 849 (box lower member 842) and the upper fastening portion 852 (box upper member 843).
And the fastening screw 858 is inserted into the insertion hole 854 of the upper fastening portion 852 and screwed into the screw hole 850, whereby the lower fastening portion 849 and the upper fastening portion 852 are fastened to each other. And FIG.
As shown in (b), the cover member 859 is housed in the housing portion 853.

As shown in FIG. 66C, when the cover member 859 is accommodated in the accommodating portion 853, the wedge portion 863a of the third engaging portion 863 forming the cover member 859 causes the inclined surface 85 of the third engaged portion 856.
6a is abutted (pressed), the third engaging portion 863 applies stress to the third engaged portion 856 by a so-called wedge effect, and the pair of third engaged portions 856 are deformed in a direction away from each other. .. On the other hand, the third engaging portion 863 receives a reaction force (stress) from the third engaged portion 856, and is deformed in a direction in which the pair of third engaging portions 863 approach each other. While performing such deformation, the third engaging portion 863 (the wedge portion 86
3a) advances toward the through hole 855.

As shown in FIG. 66D, when the wedge portion 863a enters the through hole 855 and the wedge portion 893a passes through the third engaged portion 856, the third engaging portion 863 and the third engaged portion 856 are exposed. The applied stress is released, and the wedge portion 863a engages with the tip portion of the third engaged portion 856. As a result, the cover member 859 is attached to the upper fastening portion 852 while being accommodated in the accommodation portion 853. At this time, the fitting portions 864A-864D are the fitting portions 857A-857D.
Then, the peripheral edge of the lid portion 860 (and the notch 861) comes into contact with the peripheral edge of the accommodating portion 853 (see FIGS. 54A and 58).

[Cover member removal process]
67A and 67B are views showing a removing process of the cover member 859, FIG. 67A shows a process of cutting the cutting portion, and FIG. 67B shows a process of removing the fastening screw 858. Figure 6
8A and 8B are views showing a removing process of the cover member 859, and FIG.
FIG. 68 (d) shows a state in the middle of removing 9 from the box upper member 843.
Are each removed from the box upper member 843.

As shown in FIG. 67A, the first cutting portion 866 and the second cutting portion 867 are cut to take out the cutting piece 868, and the opening portion 862 is opened.

As shown in FIG. 67 (b), a screwdriver or the like is introduced through the opening 862 and the fastening screw 858 is inserted.
Then, the lower fastening portion 849 (box lower member 842) and the upper fastening portion 852 (box upper member 843) are separated.

As shown in FIG. 68 (c), the third engagement portion 863 and the third engaged portion 856 are deformed to take out the wedge portion 863 a from the through hole 855. At this time, for example, the wedge portions 863a of the pair of third engaging portions 863 are deformed so as to approach each other, and / or the pair of third engaged portions 856 are used.
The wedge portions 863a may be disengaged from the tip portions of the third engaged portions 856 by deforming the tip portions of the wedge portions 863a so as to be separated from each other, and the wedge portions 863a may be pushed toward the lid portion 860 in that state.
As a result, the wedge portion 863a comes into contact with the inclined surface 856a of the third engaged portion 856. When the wedge portion 863a is pushed further toward the lid portion 860, the deformation of the third engaged portion 856 becomes smaller.

As shown in FIG. 68 (d), when the wedge portion 863a is continuously pushed, the third engaging portion 863 is formed.
The third engaged portion 856 returns to its original shape, and the wedge portion 863a is separated from the third engaged portion 856, so that the used cover member 859 is separated from the accommodating portion 853 (upper fastening portion 852). To do. When fastening again, the cover member 859 is newly prepared, the box lower member 842 and the box upper member 843 are reused, and the steps shown in FIGS. 65 and 66 may be performed.

[First Modification of Cover Member]
FIG. 69 is a sectional view of a first modification of the cover member 859. Cover member 8 of the first modification
59a has the same outer shape as the cover member 859 (see FIG. 62), but a portion corresponding to the second cut portion 867 of the cover member 859a is an extending portion 869. Extension 869
Are connected in a state of being orthogonal (intersecting) to the first cut portion 866, similarly to the second cut portion 867. However, unlike the second cutting portion 867, the lid portion 860 is in a non-connected (not connected) state with the lid portion 860 at a position on the outer periphery of the opening portion 862, or the lid portion 8 is at a predetermined interval.
It is separated from 60.

Thereby, only the first cutting portion 866 is cut and a part of the first cutting portion 866 and the extension portion 86 are formed.
Since the cutting piece 870 by 9 is formed and separated from the lid portion 860, the working efficiency is improved. Furthermore, since the length of the extending portion 869 that constitutes the cutting piece 870 is longer than the diameter of the opening portion 862, it is possible to prevent the cutting piece 870 from entering the inside of the cover member 859a.

[Second Modification of Cover Member]
70 is a second modification of the cover member 859, FIG. 70 (a) is a front view and FIG. 70 (b).
) Is a back view. The cover member 859b of the second modified example has a configuration in which the first cutting portion 866 and the second cutting portion 867c are connected in the opening portion 862. The second cutting portion 877c is orthogonal (intersecting) to the first cutting portion 866 and both ends thereof are connected to the left and right inner walls of the opening portion 862, and the first cutting portion 866 and the second cutting portion 867c open in a cross shape. It covers the portion 862. In this modification, the cutting piece 866a and the cutting area 867d may be cut so that the cutting piece 871 may enter the inside of the cover member 859b, but when the cutting piece 871 does not obstruct the removal of the cover member 859b. The second modification can also be applied.

In the second modification, the opening 862 is covered with a cross shape, however, other shapes than the cross shape may be used as long as they leave a gap into which the tip of the cutting means such as a nipper can enter the opening 862. For example, the configuration may be such that the three first cutting portions 866 (or the second cutting portions 867c) are connected to the opening portion 862 in a state where they intersect each other at 120 degrees. Alternatively, for example, one first cutting portion 866 and two second cutting portions 867 may be connected to the opening portion 862 in a state where they intersect each other at 120 degrees.

[Operation / Effect of Third Embodiment]
According to the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment, the first case member (box upper member 843) and the second case member
In the gaming machine 10 having the board (production control device 300) housed in the (sub-board box 841) internal space 841a formed by the case member (box lower member 842)
Fastening means (insertion hole 854, screw hole 850, fastening screw 858) for fastening the case member (box upper member 843) and the second case member (box lower member 842), and the first case member (
The cover member 859 is provided so as to engage with the box upper member 843) and cover the fastening means (the insertion hole 854, the screw hole 850, and the fastening screw 858).
Is removably engaged with the first case member (box upper member 843).

Conventionally, the cover member (cover member 859) is replaced with the board box (sub-board box 841).
) (When the fastening means (fastening screw 858, etc.) is covered again with the cover member)
However, there is a problem in that the whole substrate box to which the cover member is attached after cutting (opening) is replaced, which causes a cost. Further, when the opened substrate box is fastened again by the fastening means, the cover member is in a cut (opened) state, which is vulnerable to security and may be fraudulent.

However, with the above configuration, by removing the cover member 859, the first case member (box upper member 843) and the second case member (box lower member 842) can be reused, so that the cost can be suppressed. Also, the first case member (box upper member 843)
When the second case member (box lower member 842) is fastened again by the fastening means, the fastening means can be covered with a new cover member 859 after that, so that the board (production control device 3
It is possible to prevent an illegal operation on (00) and to suppress the cost.

In the third embodiment, the cover member 859 is a fastening means (insertion hole 854, screw hole 850).
, The fastening screw 858) is provided with an opening portion 862 at a position facing the fastening screw 858, and the opening portion 862 has the opening portion 858.
62 is provided so as to cover at least a part of 62, and is provided with a cutting portion (first cutting portion 866, second cutting portions 867, 867c) that opens the opening portion 862 by cutting.
As a result, the cutting portion prohibits access to the means (driver or the like) for releasing the fastening of the fastening means (fastening screw 858). Further, since the cutting portions (first cutting portion 866, second cutting portions 867, 867c) cover the opening 862, leaving a gap into which the tip of a means (nipper or the like) for cutting the cutting portion is inserted, The cutting can be easily performed.

In the third embodiment, the cutting portion is arranged so as to intersect with the first cutting portion 866 having both ends attached to the inner wall of the opening portion 862 and the first cutting portion 866 when the opening portion 862 is viewed from the front. A cover member 859 (lid portion 860) and a second cutting portion 867 connected to the first cutting portion 866, and the second cutting portion 867 is a fastening means (insertion hole 85) for the cover member 859.
4, the screw hole 850 and the fastening screw 858 are connected to the surface (mounting surface) opposite to the surface (front surface).

Conventionally, when the cover member is cut, a part of the cover member (a part that is cut and removed) falls into the substrate box or outside the substrate box, resulting in poor cutting efficiency.

However, with the above configuration, the cutting section can be realized with a simple configuration, and the first cutting section 86
The cutting piece 868 that cuts and separates the 6 and the second cutting portion 867 drops to the front side by the weight of the second cutting portion 867. Therefore, it is not necessary to take out the cutting piece 868 without dropping the cutting piece 868 inside the cover member 559, and the direction in which the cutting piece 868 falls can be predicted, so that the complexity of the work can be reduced.

The third embodiment is characterized in that a groove 867b is formed at the cutting position of the second cutting portion 867. This allows the second cutting portion 867 to be easily cut.

In the third embodiment, the cutting portion extends from the first cutting portion 866 so as to intersect the first cutting portion 866 whose both ends are connected to the inner wall of the opening 862, and the both ends are the same. And a second cutting portion 867c connected to the inner wall. Thereby, the cutting unit can be realized with a simple configuration.

In the third embodiment, the cutting portion is arranged so as to intersect with the first cutting portion 866 whose both ends are connected to the inner wall of the opening portion 862 and the first cutting portion 866 when the opening portion 862 is viewed from the front. And is connected to the first cutting portion 866 and is also a cover member 859 (cover portion 860).
And an extending portion 869 that is in a non-connection state with the extending portion 869.
It is characterized in that it is arranged on the surface (front surface) opposite to the surface (mounting surface) facing the fastening means (insertion hole 854, screw hole 850, fastening screw 858) of (lid portion 860).

Thereby, only the first cutting portion 866 is cut and a part of the first cutting portion 866 and the extension portion 86 are formed.
Since the cutting piece 870 by 9 is formed and separated from the lid portion 860, the working efficiency is improved. Furthermore, since the length of the extending portion 869 that constitutes the cutting piece 870 is longer than the diameter of the opening portion 862, it is possible to prevent the cutting piece 870 from entering the inside of the cover member 859a.

In the third embodiment, the cover member 859 includes an engaging portion (third engaging portion 863), and the first case member (the box upper member 843, the upper fastening portion 852) includes the engaged portion (third engaged portion). Engagement part 8
56), the cover member 859 is engaged with the engaged portion (third engaged portion 856) by the engaging portion (third engaging portion 863), so that the cover member 859 becomes the first case member (box upper member 843, Upper fastening part 852)
The engaging portion (third engaging portion 863) and the engaged portion (third engaged portion 856) are deformable in a direction in which the engagement is released during engagement. Is characterized by.
This makes it possible to realize the detachable cover member 859 with a simple structure.

In the third embodiment, the cover member 859 includes fitting portions 864A-864D,
The first case member (upper fastening portion 852) includes fitted portions 857A-857D, and the fitted portions 864A-864D are fitted into the fitted portions 857A-857D at the time of engagement. This can reduce rattling of the cover member 859 after the third engaging portion 863 engages with the third engaged portion 856.

In the third embodiment, the first case member (upper fastening portion 852) has the cover member 8 when engaged.
It is characterized in that it is provided with an accommodating portion 853 capable of accommodating 59, and the peripheral edge of the cover member 859 (lid portion 860) is in contact with the peripheral edge of the accommodating portion 853 when engaged. Accordingly, the rattling of the cover member 859 accommodated in the accommodating portion 853 can be reduced.

In the third embodiment, a notch 861 is formed on the peripheral edge of the cover member 859 (lid portion 860), and the accommodating portion 853 is formed following the outer shape of the peripheral edge of the cover member 859 (lid portion 860) including the notch 861. It is characterized by being. Thereby, the mounting direction of the cover member 859 to the accommodation portion 853 can be determined.

In the third embodiment, a partition space 851 different from the internal space 841a is provided between the first case member (upper fastening portion 852) and the second case member (lower fastening portion 849), and the fastening means is
A screw (fastening screw 858) for fastening the first case member (upper fastening portion 852) and the second case member (lower fastening portion 849) is provided, and the screw (fastening screw 858) can be accommodated in the partition space 851. It is characterized by Accordingly, even when the fastening screw 858 is not used for fastening, the fastening screw 858 can be prevented from being lost by being housed in the partition space 851.

In the third embodiment, the first case member (box upper member 843) has a first upper fastening portion (
The upper fastening portion 852) and the second upper fastening portion (upper fastening portion 852) arranged at different positions.
And an upper fastening portion (upper fastening portion 852). The second case member (box lower member 842) is
It includes a first lower fastening portion (lower fastening portion 849) and a second lower fastening portion (lower fastening portion 849) arranged at a position different from that of the first lower fastening portion (lower fastening portion 849). By engaging the first case member (box upper member 843) and the second case member (box lower member 842), the first upper fastening portion (
The upper fastening portion 852) and the first lower fastening portion (lower fastening portion 849) face each other, and the second upper fastening portion and the second lower fastening portion face each other. The screws include a first screw (fastening screw 858) for fastening the first upper fastening portion (upper fastening portion 852) and the first lower fastening portion (lower fastening portion 849), and a second upper fastening portion (upper fastening portion 852). ) And the second lower fastening portion (lower fastening portion 849) are fastened together with a second screw (fastening screw 858). The partition space 851 is a first partition space (partition space 851) formed by overlapping the first upper fastening portion (upper fastening portion 852) and the first lower fastening portion (lower fastening portion 849).
) And a second partition space (partition space 851) formed by overlapping the second upper fastening part (upper fastening part 852) and the second lower fastening part (lower fastening part 849). Then, with the first screw (fastening screw 858) housed in the first partition space (dividing space 851), the second upper fastening portion (upper fastening portion 852) and the second lower fastening are fastened by the second screw (fastening screw 858). Part (the lower fastening part 849) can be fastened or the second screw (fastening screw 858) can be fastened to the second partition space (partition space 8).
51), the first upper fastening portion (upper fastening portion 85) is fastened by the first screw (fastening screw 858).
2) and the first lower fastening portion (lower fastening portion 849) can be fastened.

With the above configuration, the cover member 859 can be attached to both upper fastening portions 852 while the fastening screws 858 are housed in the one partition space 851. When the board (production control device 300) is taken out for reasons such as inspection, the cover member 859 attached to the other upper fastening portion 852 is opened and the fastening screw 858 used for fastening is removed to remove the board (production). The control device 300) and the fastening screw 858 housed in the one partition space 851 can be taken out. After that, when re-fastening, the unopened cover member 859 attached to one upper fastening portion 852 is temporarily removed from the upper fastening portion 852, and both upper fastening portions 852 and lower fastening portions 849 are fastened with fastening screws 858. The unsealed cover member 859 can be attached to one of the upper fastening portions 852 while fastening each. That is, one partition space 85
By storing the fastening screw 858 in 1, even if it is opened once, it can be fastened again.
It is possible to perform one inspection to re-fastening without replacing both cover members 859, and it is possible to reduce the cost.

[Fourth Embodiment]
A fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 78. The fourth embodiment relates to details of the configuration of the upper special winning opening unit 800 (V attacker, large winning unit). The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to third embodiments. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals will be used for the configurations having the same functions as those of the first to third embodiments, and the duplicate description will be appropriately omitted.

  FIG. 71 is an exploded view of the game board 30, the control base unit 813, and the like.

The structure of the game board 30 is as described above (see FIG. 35, etc.), but the game board 30 is the storage unit 3
In addition to the special winning opening unit 800 housed in 0f, it also has a decorative member 831 arranged on the game board center side (left side here) of the special winning opening unit 800. The decorative member 831 is an opaque member on which a character or the like is drawn, and even if the casing of the special winning opening unit 800 is transparent on the game board center side (here, the left side), the player can view it from the game board center side. Winning prize unit 80
Make the inside of 0 invisible. The central portion 831a located at the vertical center of the decorative member 831 is arranged so as to face the special winning opening unit 800 and to cover it from the game board center side. The upper portion 831b and the lower portion 831c of the decorative member 831 in the vertical direction may be arranged so as to face the flow path unit 802 and the universal electric unit 804, respectively, and to cover from the center side of the game board.

The control base unit 813 is attached to the back surface of the game board 30. The control base unit 813 includes a falling accessory 810 (described above), a movable accessory 820 (described above), and a control unit 83.
0 and a logo member 832. The control unit 830 has a substantially box-like shape and has a predetermined depth in the front-rear direction, and accommodates the drop accessory 810 (described above), the movable accessory 820 (described above), the logo member 832, and the like. The control unit 830 integrally includes a rear plate 830a serving as a bottom, an upper plate 830b serving as a wall, a right plate 830c, a left plate 830d, and a lower plate 830e.
The rear plate 830a has an opening 8 for making the display screen of the display device 41 (FIG. 35) visible.
30f is formed, and the display device 41 (FIG. 35) is attached to the back surface of the opening 830f. Further, on the rear side of the control unit 830, the game control device 100 and the effect control device 300 are arranged (FIG. 51).

The drop accessory 810 is attached to the control unit 830 at a position facing the upper plate 830b. The movable accessory 820 is attached to the control unit 830 at a position facing the left plate 830d and the lower plate 830e. The logo member 832 is attached to the control unit 830 at a position facing the lower plate 830e on the rear side behind the movable accessory 820. A logo (character) such as the model name of the gaming machine 10 is displayed on the logo member 832, and the logo is visible to the player through the transparent lower portion of the center case 40 (on the stage portion 40b) (
(See FIG. 35).

  FIG. 72 is an exploded view of the special winning opening unit 800 (V attacker, large winning unit).

The special winning opening unit 800 includes a big winning unit base 902 and a big winning unit base 902.
An intermediate member 904 arranged at the rear of the lower left part of the above, and a movable portion drive mechanism 906 arranged at the rear of the lower right part of the large insertion unit base 902 so as to be partially adjacent to the right side of the intermediate member 904.
A general winning opening discharging unit 908 arranged rearward of the right central portion of the special winning unit base 902 and substantially above the movable part driving mechanism 906, and a special winning portion driving unit 910 arranged substantially rearward of the intermediate member 904. , A transparent front decoration member 91 arranged in front of the large insertion unit base 902
2 and a special winning opening wing portion 914 (wing member) which is driven by the big winning honey portion driving mechanism 910 to open and close the wing member 914a.

In addition, the special winning opening unit 800 has a special winning opening switch 35a that detects a game ball that has passed through the general winning opening 35 and a special winning opening switch 43 that detects a game ball that has passed through the special winning opening 902h.
(Upper special winning opening switch 39a, special winning count switch), a specific area switch 72 (V switch) that detects a game ball that has passed through the specific area 86 (V winning opening), and the special winning opening 902h is specified. It is provided with a residual ball discharge port switch 73 (detection means, residual ball switch) that detects a game ball that has not passed through the area 86 as a residual ball. The special winning opening 902h may be defined as an entrance portion (FIG. 72, FIG. 74) that is opened and closed by a blade member 914a of a first inflow path 917 (FIG. 75, FIG. 77) which will be described later. It may be defined as the opening (FIGS. 72 and 75) of the switch 43 (39a).

The special winning opening unit 800 is a combination of the special winning unit base 902, the intermediate member 904, and the general winning opening discharging unit 908, so that the specific area switch 72 (specific area 86), the remaining ball discharging switch 73, and the first described later. A housing including the inflow path 917 (and the second inflow path 918) is configured, and the housing has a general winning opening 35 and a distribution path of the game balls winning the general winning opening 35. As a result, the entire unit is downsized and the occupied area for the game area 32 (
Volume) can be reduced.

The large insertion unit base 902 is a flow path forming member, and by attaching the front decoration member 912 so as to cover it from the front, various flow paths of the game ball (upper left flow path 902a, which will be described later with reference to FIGS. 74 and 76, right) Upper channel 902b, lower right channel 902d, etc.) are formed. Therefore, the large insertion unit base 902 is provided at various positions on the plate-shaped rear surface portion 902f and the rear surface portion 902.
and a flow path wall 902g extending in the front-rear direction from f. Further, the flow path forming portion 904c of the intermediate member 904 is attached from the rear side to form the lower left back flow path 902c.

The large insertion unit base 902 has a passage frame 902k (a part of the passage wall 902g) that forms a passage of the game ball that has passed through the specific region 86 or has passed. The passage frame 902k has a rectangular cross section perpendicular to the front-rear direction, and has a rectangular shape in a front view. The specific area switch 72 is inserted and installed in the passage frame 902k, and the opening (corresponding to the specific area 86) of the specific area switch 72 is arranged in the passage frame 902k. On the back surface 902f of the special winning unit base 902, the winning opening switch 35a, the special winning opening switch 43, and the remaining ball discharging opening switch 73 are arranged so as to face each other from the rear. The special winning unit base 902 has the general winning opening 35 at the upper part, and the winning opening switch 35a is arranged behind the general winning opening 35.

From the upper part of the special winning unit base 902, the special winning opening switch 35a, the special winning opening switch 43
, A specific area switch 72, and a remaining ball discharge port switch 73 are sequentially provided. The opening of the special winning opening switch 43 through which the game balls pass is vertically overlapped with the rear portion of the specific area switch 72 and the front portion of the remaining ball discharging port switch 73 (see FIGS. 75 and 77). ..

The big winning unit base 902 is a rod-shaped magnetic sensor 90 of the general winning opening discharging unit 908.
8a has an insertion hole 902e to be inserted, and the shaft portion 914 of the special winning opening bead portion 914.
b has a through hole 902i penetrating in the front-rear direction and a guide hole 902j through which a guide 914c of the special winning opening fringe portion 914 is slidably guided. Further, the large insertion unit base 902 has an LED board 902m having a plurality of LEDs mounted on a back surface portion 902f. LED
The LED on the substrate 902m is provided when the specific area switch 72 is detected (V winning).
It may emit light. It should be noted that a semi-transparent front decoration 911 (FIGS. 74 and 7) having a different color and pattern from the front decoration member 912 is provided at a position corresponding to the front opening of the specific area 86 of the large insertion unit base 902.
6) may be attached.

The intermediate member 904 has an LED substrate 904a having a plurality of LEDs on the upper portion, a through hole 904b through which the shaft portion 914b of the special winning opening fringe portion 914 penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a flow path forming portion provided in front of the LED substrate 904a. And 904c. The inside of the flow path forming section 904c is a lower left back flow path 902c, and the special winning opening switch 43 is arranged below the flow path forming section 904c. The remaining ball discharge port switch 73 is attached to the lower portion of the intermediate member 904 with the opening portion arranged rearward. The LED of the LED substrate 904a can irradiate light to the lower left inner flow path 902c, and may emit light when the special winning opening switch 43 detects the light.

As will be described later, when the blade member 914a of the special winning opening splash portion 914 is in the open state, the upper left passage 902a or the upper right passage 902b (above the special winning opening splash portion 914 and the special winning opening 902h). (See FIG. 74), the game ball that has passed through the special winning opening 902h passes through the lower left rear passage 902c and is detected by the special winning opening switch 43. After that, the game ball detected by the special winning opening switch 43 is detected by the specific area switch 72 or the remaining ball outlet switch 73 (detection means) according to the position of the movable member 906a of the movable portion drive mechanism 906 ( Figure 7
4-See Figure 77). When the blade member 914a of the special winning opening splash portion 914 is in the closed state,
The game ball flowing down the upper left flow path 902a or the upper right flow path 902b enters the lower right flow path 902d.

The movable portion drive mechanism 906 includes a movable member 906a, a lever solenoid 906b (86b) (first drive means) that is a drive source for driving the movable member 906a, and a lever solenoid 906.
The lever 9 for converting the longitudinal force of the shaft portion of b into the lateral force and transmitting the force to the movable member 906a.
06c (first link mechanism). In addition, the movable unit drive mechanism 906 includes a lever 906.
The partition portion 906d arranged on the left side of c and the branch portion 9 arranged further on the left side of the partition portion 906d.
06e and a support portion 906f disposed below the branch portion 906e. Bifurcation 906
A gap portion 906g is formed between e and the support portion 906f, and the specific area switch 72 is inserted from the front and the remaining ball discharge port switch 73 is inserted from the rear in the gap portion 906g (FIG. 75). , FIG. 77).

As will be described later, the branch portion 906e has an inclined surface 915 (front upper end surface) that is inclined forward, and can send the game ball that has passed through the special winning opening switch 43 to the front specific area 86. (See Figures 75 and 77). From the opening of the special winning opening switch 43 to the flow path on the inclined surface 915, a first inflow path 917 (FIG. 75, FIG. 77) that allows the game ball to flow into the specific area 86 is formed. Further, the branching portion 906e has a rear upper end surface 916 that is slightly inclined rearward on the rear side of the inclined surface 915. On the rear upper end surface 916, a second inflow path 918 (FIG. 75, FIG. 77) for allowing the game ball to flow into the remaining ball outlet switch 73 (detection means) is formed.

The movable member 906a is disposed above the branch portion 906e at the normal position (initial position), and does not exist above the branch portion 906e when retracted to the right side of the partition portion 906d and moved to the operating position. When the movable member 906a is in the normal position above the branching portion 906e, the game ball cannot be entered into the first inflow path 917 on the inclined surface 915, being disturbed by the movable member 906a.
The second inflow path 918 is entered (see FIG. 75). On the other hand, when the movable member 906a is in the operating position that is not above the branch portion 906e, the game ball can enter the first inflow path 917 on the inclined surface 915 without being obstructed by the movable member 906a ( See FIG. 77). In this way, the movable member 906a is arranged in the first inflow path 917 at a branch position from the second inflow path 918. In the present embodiment, the branch position, that is, the position of the tip portion (or the vicinity thereof) of the movable member 906a in the normal position is below the opening of the special winning opening switch 43, but the position is not limited to this.

The general winning opening discharge unit 908 is provided with a magnetic sensor 908a as a part of the magnetic sensor switches 61 (FIG. 79) for fraud detection. The magnetic sensor switch 61 is
The large entry unit base 902 penetrates the insertion hole 902e of the large entry unit base 902.
It is possible to detect fraud caused by a magnet on the special winning opening 902h.

Further, the general winning opening discharging unit 908 has a winning opening switch mounting portion 908c to which the winning opening switch 35a is attached, and the winning opening switch 35a is provided on the upper part of the front plate 908d. The general winning opening discharging unit 908 is a general winning opening discharging passage 908b for discharging a game ball.
The game sphere having the winning opening switch 35a flows down along the front plate 908d and passes through the general winning opening discharging passage 908b from the entrance 908e. The large unit base 90
2 and the front plate 908 of the general winning opening discharge unit 908
By d, the flow path of the game ball is formed.

The front plate 908d of the general winning opening discharge unit 908 is provided substantially to the right of the LED substrate 904a of the intermediate member 904. General prize hole discharge passage 9 of the general prize hole discharge unit 908
08b is provided substantially above the lever solenoid 906b (86b) of the movable unit drive mechanism 906.

The special winning portion driving mechanism 910 includes a shaft hole portion 910a to which the shaft portion 914b of the special winning portion splash portion 914 (wing member) is attached, and a driving portion driving solenoid 910b (second driving means, special winning portion). The solenoid 39b), the plate-shaped front surface portion 910c of the intermediate member 904, which is arranged behind the LED substrate 904a, and the vertical force of the blade driving solenoid 910b are used as the rotational force of the game board 30 in the board surface direction. And a cam mechanism 910d (second link mechanism) for converting.

The front decoration member 912 has an arc-shaped opening 912a for maintenance which is arranged substantially in front of the special winning opening fringe portion 914. A rod-shaped object can be inserted into the arc-shaped opening 912a, and ball clogging (ball biting) or the like due to the blade member 914a of the special winning opening splash portion 914 can be eliminated. The front decoration member 912 has a rectangular shape inside the passage frame 902k of the large entry unit base 902 so that the player can visually recognize the passage of the game ball through the opening of the specific area switch 72 (corresponding to the specific area 86). Although the portion corresponding to is transparent at least, only that portion may be transparent or entirely transparent. Further, the front decoration member 912 may have the semi-transparent front decoration 911 (FIGS. 74 and 76) attached to the portion corresponding to the rectangular interior of the passage frame 902k.

The special winning opening splash portion 914 includes a blade member 914a for opening and closing the special winning opening 902h, a shaft portion 914b connected to the axial hole portion 910a of the special winning stroke portion driving mechanism 910, and the special winning unit base 90.
And a guide 914c that moves along the second guide hole 902j. As described above, the shaft portion 914b includes the through hole 902i of the large insertion unit base 902 and the through hole 9 of the intermediate member 904.
04b to connect to the shaft hole portion 910a. Further, the blade member 914a rotates in the board surface direction of the game board 30 with the shaft portion 914b extending in the front-rear direction as a rotation axis.

[Operation of the large entry section drive mechanism]
73A is a perspective view showing the operation of the special winning edge portion driving mechanism 910 of the special winning opening unit 800. FIG. 73A (a) shows the initial state, and FIG. 73A (b) shows the V switch or the remaining ball switch. The state of being able to enter the ball (the state of being able to enter the special winning opening switch 43 (39a)) is shown.

As shown in FIG. 73A, the blade drive solenoid 9 that constitutes the large entry blade drive mechanism 910.
10b is for vertically moving a rod 910e extending in the vertical direction with the vertical direction being the driving direction. The blade driving solenoid 910b maintains the rod 910e extended downward when not driven as shown in FIG. 73A (a), and pulls it upward when driven as shown in FIG. 73A (b). The blade driving solenoid 910b includes an urging spring (not shown) therein, and when the driving of the honey driving solenoid 910b is stopped, the rod 910e is extended downward by the urging force of the urging spring (not shown). Then, the rod 91 is driven by a driving force stronger than the biasing force.
0e is pulled up.

The cam mechanism 910d is a cam 910f that rotates the shaft hole portion 910a coaxially with the shaft portion 914b.
A connecting portion 910h which is connected to the tip of the rod 910e and has a slide hole 910i extending in the left-right direction at a position facing the cam 910f, and the connecting portion 910 from the cam 910f.
and a rod 910g extending toward h and entering the slide hole 910i. The rod 910g is in contact with the inner wall on the upper side and the inner wall on the lower side of the slide hole 910i and slides on the slide hole 91i.
It is movable to the left and right with respect to 0i.

The cam 910f is in the longitudinal direction (radial direction of the shaft portion 914b) in FIG. 73A (a).
Is arranged at an angle (for example, 45 degrees) inclined downward, and in FIG. 73A (b), the longitudinal direction is arranged at an angle (for example, 45 degrees) inclined upward. Therefore, when the blade driving solenoid 910b is driven, the cam 910f causes the connecting portion 9 to move through the rod 910g.
It is pulled up by 10 h and rotated by a predetermined rotation angle (for example, 90 degrees) from an angle inclined downward to an angle inclined upward. At this time, the blade member 914a also rotates at the same rotation angle as the cam 910f.

At this time, the rod 910g rotates according to the rotation of the cam 910f and slides in the slide hole 91.
Move left and right with respect to 0i. More specifically, when the cam 910f starts to rotate from the initial position shown in FIG. 73A (a), the rod 910g is displaced in the left-right direction with respect to the slide hole 910i according to the displacement of the cam 910f in the left-right direction (cosine component), The displacement of the rod 910g becomes maximum when the longitudinal direction of the cam 910f becomes horizontal. Then, the cam 910 as it is
When f continues to rotate, the displacement of the rod 910g decreases, and when it reaches the maximum rotating position shown in FIG. 73A (b), the rod 910g returns to the original position.

As described above, the drive solenoid 910b has a vertical drive direction. As a result, due to vibration or impact from the front direction, the blade drive solenoid 910b (rod 9
10e) does not rotate the blade member 914a due to the displacement of the blade 10e), so that the large-entry blade driving mechanism 910 is strong against vibration and impact.

When the displacement of the rod 910g in the left-right direction when the cam 910f is rotated is small and the splash drive solenoid 910b can tolerate the displacement, the rod 910g and the slide hole 9 are not moved.
It is also possible to omit 10i and pin the cam 910f to the connecting portion 910h.

[Operation of movable part drive mechanism]
73B is a plan view of the movable portion drive mechanism 906 of the special winning opening unit 800, and FIG.
3B (a) shows the remaining ball switch enterable state (initial state), and FIG. 73B (b) shows the V switch enterable state (winning possible state).

As shown in FIG. 73B, the lever solenoid 906 b ((
86b) moves the rod 906k, which extends in the front-rear direction with the front-rear direction as the driving direction, in the front-rear direction. The lever solenoid 906b is used when the rod 9 is not driven as shown in FIG. 73B (a).
The state in which 06k is fed forward is maintained and is pulled back backward during the driving shown in FIG. 73B (b). The lever solenoid 906b includes an urging spring (not shown) inside, and
When the driving of 06b is stopped, the rod 906k is forwarded by the biasing force of the biasing spring (not shown), but when driven, the rod 906k is pulled back by the driving force stronger than the biasing force.

In this way, by setting the drive direction of the lever solenoid 906b (86b) that constitutes the movable part drive mechanism 906 to the front-rear direction, it is possible to secure a visible area of the game ball on the front surface of the large insertion unit base 902. The connecting portion 906m is attached to the tip of the rod 906k.
Are arranged.

The movable member 906a has an insertion hole 906n (FIGS. 75 and 77) that follows the outer shape of its cross-sectional shape.
It is inserted into a partition part 906d provided with, and its longitudinal direction is movable in the left-right direction. This prevents the movable member 906a from being displaced by vibration or impact from the front direction,
The movable member 906a is resistant to vibration and shock. In addition, the movable member 906a is shown in FIG. 73B (a).
In the initial state (normal position, initial position) shown in Fig. 73, the tip end portion thereof is extended from the insertion hole 906n and is arranged above the branching portion 906e, but in the drive state (operating position) shown in Fig. 73B (b), The tip portion is adapted to enter the insertion hole 906n.

The lever 906c includes a pin coupling portion 906h that is pin-coupled to the main body of the movable portion driving mechanism 906 with the vertical direction as an axis. The lever 906c moves from the pin coupling portion 906h to the movable member 90.
6a and a second arm 906j extending from the pin coupling portion 906h toward the connecting portion 906m, the first arm 906i and the second arm 906j have an L-shaped shape substantially orthogonal to each other. Have

Although illustration is omitted, a slide hole (similar to the slide hole 910i) having an opening extending in the front-rear direction is provided at a position of the movable member 906a that overlaps with the first arm 906i in the vertical direction, and the first arm 906i is provided. A rod (similar to the rod 910g) that enters the slide hole is provided at a position facing the slide hole. Similarly, a slide hole having an opening extending in the left-right direction at a position where the second arm 906j of the connecting portion 906m overlaps in the vertical direction (
The same as the slide hole 910i) is provided, and a rod (similar to the rod 910g) that enters the slide hole is provided at a position of the second arm 906j facing the slide hole.

Therefore, when the lever solenoid 906b (86b) is driven in the state of FIG. 73B (a), the rod 906k and the connecting portion 906m are moved to the lever solenoid 906b (86b) side (rear).
Attracted to.

At this time, the second arm 906j receives a force pulled rearward from the connecting portion 906m via a rod (not shown) connected to the second arm 906j, but the rod (not shown) is
A slide hole (not shown) of the connection portion 906m allows the movement in the left-right direction. Therefore, the second arm 906j can rotate about the pin coupling portion 906h, and the turning force associated with the rotation can be transmitted to the first arm 906i.

The rod of the first arm 906i (which is not shown) in the slide hole of the movable member 906a (
The rod (not shown) can move the rotational force received from the second arm 906j to the movable member 906a, but the rod (not shown) can move in the front-rear direction by the slide hole (not shown). .. Therefore, the first arm 906i can transmit the horizontal component of the rotational force received from the second arm 906j to the movable member 906a with almost no resistance.

Therefore, when the lever solenoid 906b (86b) is driven in the state of FIG. 73B (a), the lever 906c rotates about the pin coupling portion 906h, and the movable member 906a is inserted through the pin coupling portion 906h as shown in FIG. 73B (b). It can be moved in the direction to be retracted into the hole 906n. In addition, when the driving of the lever solenoid 906b (86b) is stopped in this state, the rod 9 is driven by the urging force of the urging spring (not shown) provided in the lever solenoid 906b (86b).
06k and the connecting portion 906m are extended in the front direction, and the lever 906c is rotated in the opposite direction.
The movable member 906a can be moved from the insertion hole 906n to the branching portion 906e.

When the lever 906c is rotated, the displacement of the first arm 906i in the front-rear direction is small,
When the movable member 906a can tolerate the displacement, the first arm 906i may be pin-connected to the movable member. Similarly, when the lateral displacement of the second arm 906j is small and the lever solenoid 906b (86) can tolerate the displacement, the second arm 906j is connected to the connecting portion 9
It may be pin-connected to 06 m.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the movable portion drive mechanism 906 (lever solenoid 906b (8
The movable member 906a is moved to the operating position outside the first inflow path 917 by driving 6b)). As a result, if the driving of the movable unit drive mechanism 906 is stopped, the movable member 906a is always
Is arranged at the normal position in the first inflow path 917, so that it is possible to prevent the game ball from winning the specific area switch 72 unexpectedly.

Here, the branch portion 906e (specific area 86) has a width (width in the left-right direction) that is about the diameter of the game ball and allows the game ball to pass through (see FIG. 74). Therefore, the lever solenoid 90
At the time of driving 6b (FIG. 73B (b)), the movable member 906a has at least the insertion hole 90.
It is necessary to be in a state of being almost accommodated on the right side of 6n (a state of being separated from the first inflow path 917).

On the other hand, when the lever solenoid 906b is stopped (FIG. 73B (a)), the movable member 90
If the distance between the left end of 6a (on the side of the branch 906e) and the end on the left of the branch 906e (which is the bottleneck width to the specific area 86) is at least smaller than the diameter of the game ball,
It is possible to prevent the game ball from flowing into the specific area 86 (first inflow path 917).

Therefore, it is preferable that the amount of extension of the movable member 906a is smaller than the diameter of the game ball, for example, about the radius of the game ball (see FIG. 74). As a result, the lever solenoid 90
Since the feeding amount of 6b can be shortened, the power consumption of the lever solenoid 906b can be reduced.

In addition, the shape of the special winning opening unit 800 including the movable member 906a may be a laterally inverted shape when viewed from the front direction. In this case, when the large entry splash drive mechanism 910 is driven, the movable member 906a moves to the left and is disposed outside the first inflow path, and the large entry splash drive mechanism 9 is driven.
When the driving of 10 is stopped, the movable member 906a moves to the right and is arranged in the first inflow path 917.

[Inflow route of game balls in the special winning opening unit]
FIG. 74 is a front view of the special winning opening unit 800, and is a view showing a V switch entry prohibited state. 75 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 74. 76 is a special winning opening unit 800
FIG. 8 is a front view of the V switch and is a view showing a state in which the V switch can be entered. 77 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 76.

As shown in FIGS. 74 and 76, the big winning unit base 902 includes an upper left flow path 902a, an upper right flow path 902b, and a general winning opening 35 as the flow paths into which the game balls flow. The game ball that has won the general winning opening 35 as described above passes through the winning opening switch 35a and is discharged to the outside from the general winning opening discharging passage 908b (FIGS. 72 and 75).

At the merging position of the upper left channel 902a and the upper right channel 902b of the large insertion unit base 902,
The blade member 914a is arranged. The blade member 914a (broken line) closes the special winning opening 902h in an initial state (for example, a normal game state). Therefore, the game ball that has flowed into the upper left channel 902a or the upper right channel 902b does not enter the big winning opening 902h, and the lower right channel 90
It flows to 2d and is discharged to the outside.

On the other hand, as described above, when the special mode 1 variable display game result mode is the special result (big hit), or when the special figure 2 variable display game result mode is the special result (big hit, small hit), the blade member 914a. (Solid line) rotates and the special winning opening 902h is opened for a predetermined time, and the game ball can enter the big winning opening 902h.

As shown in FIG. 75 and FIG. 77, as a path of the game ball that has won the special winning opening 902h, it flows down along the inclined surface of the blade member 914a and flows into the special winning opening switch 43 (39a), and the big winning opening switch 43 (39a) and then falls to reach the branch portion 906e, flows down along the inclined surface 915 inclined forward of the branch portion 906e, flows into the specific area switch 72 (specific area 86), and reaches the specific area switch. First inflow path 91 that passes through 72 and is discharged to the outside
There is 7.

Further, as another path, the movable member 906a disposed between the special winning opening switch 43 (39a) and the branch portion 906e branches from the first inflow path 917, and the inclined surface 906p inclined to the rear of the movable member 906a. And a second inflow path 918 that flows down along the rear upper end surface 916, flows into the remaining ball discharge port switch 73, passes through the remaining ball discharge port switch 73, and is discharged to the outside.
There is.

The first inflow path 917 is arranged so as to face the front surface from a branch point with the second inflow path 918, and the specific area switch 72 (specific area 86) is arranged at a position facing the front surface. Thereby, the visibility of the specific area switch 72 (V switch) can be secured.

In the initial state shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the movable member 906a is extended onto the branch portion 906e. At this time, the opening of the special winning opening switch 43 (39a) through which the game ball passes faces the inclined surface 906p of the movable member 906a when viewed from above. Therefore, the special winning opening switch 4
The game ball that has passed 3 (39a) is brought into contact with the movable member 906a and is introduced into the second inflow path 918, and flows down to the rear upper end surface 916 according to the inclined surface 906p of the movable member 906a to cause the remaining ball discharge port switch 73 to operate. Will pass through.

In the driving state shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, the movable member 906a is not arranged on the branch portion 906e. At this time, most of the opening through which the game ball of the special winning opening switch 43 (39a) passes faces the inclined surface 915 of the branch portion 906e. Therefore, the special winning opening switch 43 (
The game ball that has passed 39a) contacts the branch portion 906e and continues to stay in the first inflow path 917, flows down along the inclined surface 915 of the branch portion 906e, and passes through the specific area switch 72.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 75 and 77, the movable member 906a has a mountain-shaped (or triangular) cross-sectional shape (a shape viewed from the left-right direction), and one side thereof is an inclined surface inclined rearward. It is equipped with 906p. Thereby, the movable member 906a can be formed with a simple shape. In addition, the insertion hole 906n is opened in a shape that follows the outer shape of the cross-sectional shape of the movable member 906a. As a result, rattling of the movable member 906a during operation can be reduced.

By the way, a movable portion drive mechanism 906 (lever solenoid 9) for driving the movable member 906a.
06b (86b)), and a special winning edge portion driving mechanism 910 for driving the special winning opening edge portion 914.
(Split portion drive solenoid 910b (39b)) is controlled by the game control device 100 (see FIG. 79). Then, the game control device 100 synchronizes the drive of the movable portion drive mechanism 906 with the drive of the large-incidence blade portion drive mechanism 910. Specifically, when a particular type of jackpot (probability variation jackpot) is won with a certain probability, the jackpot driving unit 910 is driven and movable in a given number (eg, the first) jackpot round. Part drive mechanism 90
6 is driven (see the fifth embodiment). In this case, the movable portion drive mechanism 906 is driven at the same time as the large-incidence blade driving mechanism 910 is driven, or the movable portion drive mechanism 906 is driven immediately before the large-incidence blade driving mechanism 910 is driven.

As a result, since the movable portion drive mechanism 906 is not driven after the special winning portion drive mechanism 910 is driven, the movable member 906a is driven at the timing when the game ball passing through the special winning opening 902h passes through the movable member 906a. Then, the problem that the movable member 906a bites the game ball can be avoided.

As shown in FIGS. 74 and 76, the LED board 902m is the special winning opening unit 800.
Of the specific area 86, but is located on the right side of the specific area 86. As a result, the LED substrate 902m does not impair the visibility of the specific area 86. LED
Since the board 902m is not arranged on the back surface (rear side) of the specific area switch 72, L
The ED board 902m does not prevent passage of the game ball to the specific area switch 72.

In addition, in the special winning opening unit 800, the attachment position (first inflow route 917) of the specific region switch 72 (specific region 86) and the attachment position (second inflow route 918) of the remaining ball discharge port switch 73 may be replaced. .. In this case, when the movable part driving mechanism 906 is driven, the movable member 906a is arranged in the first inflow path 917, the game ball flows into the specific area switch 72, and when the driving of the movable part driving mechanism 906 is stopped, the movable member is moved. 906a is the first inflow path 91
7 is arranged outside the game ball flows into the remaining ball discharge port switch 73. Thereby, the gaming machine 1
The game mode of 0 can be easily changed.

[Operation / Effect of Fourth Embodiment]
According to the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, in the gaming machine 10 including the specific area 86 into which the game balls can flow in the special game state that occurs when the result of the game (variable display game) is a special result, A detecting means (remaining ball outlet switch 73) capable of detecting that a game ball has passed in a region different from the specific region 86 (specific region switch 72) in the special game state, and the gaming machine 10. And a movable member 906a disposed upstream of the specific area 86 (specific area switch 72) and the detection means (remaining ball discharge port switch 73). The game ball can flow into the specific area 86 (specific area switch 72) by operating in one direction, and the movable member 906a operates in the other direction in the left-right direction. Game ball to the means (residual ball outlet switch 73) out, characterized in that can flow.

In a conventional gaming machine, there is a movable member that operates to cause a game ball to flow into a specific area (specific area 86) and that moves in the front-rear direction. If vibration or impact is applied to the movable member from the front of the gaming machine, the movable member may be displaced at an unintended timing and the game ball may flow into the specific area. On the other hand, it is conceivable to provide detection means for detecting vibrations, impacts, etc. (illegal acts) from the front of the gaming machine, but this is costly. Further, by moving the movable member in the front-rear direction, it is easy to visually recognize that the specific area (V switch) has been passed, but it is weak against vibration and impact from the front of the gaming machine, and is vulnerable to fraud. Become an opportunity.

However, with the above configuration, since the moving direction of the movable member 906a is the left-right direction, the movable member 906a is not displaced by vibration or impact from the front direction, and is resistant to vibration and impact. Therefore, by avoiding the unintended displacement of the movable member 906a,
The game machine 10 is resistant to fraudulent acts against a.

In the fourth embodiment, the first inflow path 917 that allows the game ball to flow into the specific area 86 (specific area switch 72) is provided, and the movable member 906a operates in one direction to move the first inflow path 917.
The game ball can flow into the specific area 86 (specific area switch 72) by being arranged outside, and the detecting means (remaining ball discharge port by operating in the other direction and being arranged in the first inflow path 917) It is characterized in that a game ball can flow into the switch 73). Thereby, the movable member 906a
The inflow destination of the game ball can be changed by a simple operation.

In the fourth embodiment, the second inflow path 918 that branches from the middle of the first inflow path 917 and flows the game ball into the detection means (remaining ball discharge port switch 73) is provided, and the movable member 906a is the first inflow path. The game ball can be flown into the first inflow path 917 by being arranged at a branch position with the second inflow path 918 in 917 and operating in one direction and arranged outside the first inflow path 917, and the other direction. Is operated to be placed in the first inflow path 917 to play the game ball in the first inflow path 9
It is characterized in that a path (path formed by the inclined surface 906p of the movable member 906a) from 17 to the second inflow path 918 is formed. Thereby, the inflow destination of the game ball can be reliably changed by the simple operation of the movable member 906a.

In the fourth embodiment, the first inflow path 917 is characterized in that it is arranged so as to extend from the branch position (with the second inflow path 918) toward the front side of the gaming machine 10. Thereby, the visibility of the specific area switch 72 (V switch) can be secured.

In the fourth embodiment, the movable member 906a is characterized in that the upper surface thereof is provided with an inclined surface 906p that is inclined toward the second inflow path 918. As a result, the movable member 90 has a simple structure.
The game ball can be flowed into the second inflow path 918 from 6a.

The fourth embodiment is characterized in that the movable member 906a has a triangular shape or a mountain shape in cross section, and is provided with a side relating to the inclined surface 906p. Thereby, the movable member 906a can be constructed with a simple shape.

In the fourth embodiment, a first drive unit (movable part drive mechanism 906) for operating (driving) the movable member 906a is provided, and the first drive unit (movable part drive mechanism 906) drives the movable member 906a. It is characterized in that it is moved to the outside of the first inflow path 917. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from accidentally flowing into the specific area 86 (specific area switch 72).

In the fourth embodiment, the driving direction of the first driving means (movable part driving mechanism 906) is the front-back direction of the gaming machine 10, and the first driving means (movable part driving mechanism 906) moves the force in the front-back direction to the left and right. It is characterized in that it is connected to the movable member 906a via a first link mechanism (lever 906c) which converts it into a directional force. Thereby, for example, the first drive means (movable part drive mechanism 90
It is possible to secure the visible area of the game ball arranged in front of 6) (front of the special winning opening unit 800).

In the fourth embodiment, the width of the first inflow path 917 is substantially the same as the diameter of the game ball, and the size of the game ball can be distributed. The moving length of the movable member 906a is greater than the diameter of the game ball. It is also characterized by being short. As a result, power consumption and drive time (moving time of the movable member 906a) can be reduced by shortening the driving length (stroke length) of the first driving unit (movable portion driving mechanism 906).

In the fourth embodiment, the game sphere detecting means (when the mounting positions of the specific area 86 (specific area switch 72) and the detecting means (remaining ball outlet switch 73) are exchanged)
The movable member 906a is provided with a first inflow path 917 for flowing into the remaining ball discharge port switch 73).
The game ball can flow into the detection means (remaining ball discharge port switch 73) by operating in one direction and arranged outside the first inflow route 917, and operates in the other direction to move the first inflow route 917. It is characterized in that the game balls can flow into the specific area 86 (specific area switch 72) by being arranged inside. Thereby, the game mode of the game machine 10 can be easily changed.

In the fourth embodiment, in the special gaming state, a wing member (large winning opening splay portion 914) that rotates in the board surface direction of the gaming machine 10 so as to introduce the game ball into the first inflow path 917, and the wing member (
It is provided with the 2nd drive means (large entrance honey portion drive mechanism 910) which rotates the special winning opening honey portion 914, and the drive direction of the 2nd drive means (large entrance honey portion drive mechanism 910) is the game machine 10. And the second driving means (large-increasing blade driving mechanism 910) is a wing member (large mechanism) via a second link mechanism (cam mechanism 910d) that converts vertical force into rotational force in the board surface direction. Winning mouth splash section 91
It is connected to 4). As a result, the second drive means (large winning edge driving section 910) and the wing member (large winning edge splashing section 914) will not be displaced due to vibrations or impacts from the front surface, and thus will not be tampered with from the outside. It can be avoided.

In the fourth embodiment, in the special gaming state, a wing member (large winning opening splay portion 914) that rotates in the board surface direction of the gaming machine 10 so as to introduce the game ball into the first inflow path 917, and the wing member (
Second driving means (large winning edge driving mechanism 910) for rotating the special winning opening splash portion 914, first driving means (movable portion driving mechanism 906) and second driving means (large winning edge driving mechanism 910). ) Driving game control means (game control device 100), and the game control means (game control device 100) drives the first drive means (movable part drive mechanism 906) to the second drive means (large input). It is characterized in that it is synchronized with the driving of the blade driving mechanism 910).

As a result, it is possible to prevent the movable portion drive mechanism 906 from being driven after the special winning edge drive mechanism 910 is driven, and the game ball that has passed through the special winning opening 902h is the movable member 906.
It is possible to avoid the problem that the movable member 906a is driven at the timing of passing a and the movable member 906a bites the game ball.

In the fourth embodiment, a housing (large insertion unit base 90) including the specific area 86 (specific area switch 72), the detection means (residual ball outlet switch 73), and the first inflow path 917.
2, an intermediate member 904, a general winning opening discharge unit 908 are combined), the housing is
The distribution path of the general winning opening 35 and the game balls that have won the general winning opening 35 (general winning opening discharging passage 90
8b). As a result, the entire unit is downsized and the game area 32
It is possible to reduce the occupied area (volume) with respect to.

In the fourth embodiment, the special winning opening unit 800 may be associated with the effect described in the second embodiment. FIG. 78 is a front view of the game board of the game machine according to the fourth embodiment, and FIG.
It is a figure at the time of shifting to the special game state from the state shown in. As shown in FIG. 78, the probability change state (
When a big hit (special game state) occurs from a state where a small hit rush can occur, an arrow image 619a intersecting (orthogonal) with the virtual line 822 in place of the arrow image 619 and the effect image 617 as shown in FIG. 78. Can be displayed. The arrow image 619a is, for example,
It has an arrow shape extending toward the special winning opening unit 800 (V attacker) with a position overlapping the imaginary line 822 as a base end, and having a tip pointing to the special winning opening unit 800 (V attacker). Further, in association with the display of the arrow image 619a, it is possible to display the promotion information 619b including, for example, the word "aiming". The promotion information 619b is displayed at substantially the same position as the effect image 617, for example. By displaying in this way, the object to be watched by the player when shifting from the probability changing state to the special game state is switched from the special winning opening unit 806 to the special winning opening unit 800, and the player looks at the probability changing state. The special winning opening unit 800 (V
Since the display regarding the attacker) is performed, the player does not miss these displays, and it is possible to easily recognize that the player is instructed to "target the special winning opening unit 800 (V attacker)."

In FIG. 78, a specific type of big hit (probably strange big hit, etc.) has occurred, and since it is in the surely changed state (a state in which a small hit rush can occur) even after the special game state ends, the mode display portion 674 (
The first suggestion information) remains in the "tiger mode" so as to notify the probability change state (small hit rush) after the end of the special game state. That is, in FIG. 78, the mode display unit 674 (first suggestion information) keeps displaying the effect mode related to the “tiger mode” even when the probability variation state shifts to the special game state. In addition, when the probability change state does not become after the special game state ends, or regardless of the game state after the special game state ends, the "tiger mode" display is erased and the "tiger mode" is displayed during the transition. An arbitrary word, such as "tiger bonus", may be displayed at the position to notify that the game is in the special game state.

The effect by the arrow image 619a and the promotion information 619b in FIG. 78 is effective when the V winning occurs immediately after the start of the special game state, and therefore, in the first jackpot round, V
It is preferable to drive the movable member 906a so that winning can be achieved. However, the invention is not limited to this, and the movable member 906a may be driven in a round other than the first big hit round.

[Fifth Embodiment]
The fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 111. The fifth embodiment relates to a configuration of the game control device 100 and details of the game control thereof, and a configuration of the effect control device 300 and details of the effect control thereof. The configurations other than those described below may be similar to those of the first to fourth embodiments. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals will be used for the configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first to fourth embodiments, and duplicate descriptions will be appropriately omitted.

[Game control device]
FIG. 79 is a block diagram of a game control system of the gaming machine 10. The game machine 10 is a game control device 1
00 (main board), the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls the game in a centralized manner, and is a game microcomputer (hereinafter, referred to as a game microcomputer) 111.
A CPU section 110 having an input port, an input section 120 having an input port, an output section 130 having an output port and a driver, a data bus 140 connecting the CPU section 110, the input section 120 and the output section 130, and the like. ..

The CPU section 110 is a game microcomputer (CP) called an amusement chip (IC).
U) 111, an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 for generating a CPU operation clock, a timer interrupt, and a clock serving as a reference for a random number generation circuit. DC32V, DC12V, DC5 generated by the power supply device 400 are provided in the game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100.
A predetermined level of DC voltage such as V is supplied to enable operation.

The power supply device 400 includes a normal power supply unit 410 having an ACDC converter that generates a DC voltage of 32V DC from an AC power supply of 24V and a DC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of a lower level such as DC 12V and DC 5V from a voltage of 32V DC. , Game microcomputer 11
1. A backup power supply unit 420 for supplying a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of 1 and a power failure monitoring circuit, and control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal for notifying the occurrence and recovery of the power failure to the game control device 100. And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs.

In the present embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100,
The backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 may be provided on separate boards or integrated with the game control device 100, that is, on the main board. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are subject to replacement when changing the model, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 43 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the embodiment.
By providing 0, the cost can be reduced by excluding it from the replacement target.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is the game microcomputer 111 (of the game control device 100 (
In particular, the data stored in the RAM is retained even after the power is supplied to the built-in RAM) or after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the reset signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. RAM
When the initialization switch 112 is pushed down and turned on, an initialization switch signal is generated,
Based on this, RAM111c in the game microcomputer 111 and RA in the payout control device 200
Processing for forcibly initializing the information stored in M is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is the game microcomputer 1
11 is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

In addition, the game control device 100 (main board) includes a setting key switch 93. The setting key switch 93 is turned on by a rotation operation of the operator or the like to make it possible to change the probability setting value (setting value) according to the setting relating to the game condition (game). The RAM initialization switch 112 can also be used as a setting value changing switch that can change the probability setting value according to the operation of the operator. In the present embodiment, the probability setting value is a setting value for setting a winning probability such as a big winning probability or a small winning probability, but other game conditions (production etc.) other than the probability are also changed according to the probability setting value. It is possible. The setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are
A setting changing unit (setting changing device 42) capable of changing the setting (probability setting value) relating to the game condition is configured. It should be noted that instead of the RAM initialization switch 112, another switch may also serve as the set value change switch, or a dedicated set value change switch may be provided exclusively.

The setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are provided on the game control device 100 inside the game machine 10 or adjacent to the game control device 100, so that the front frame 12 (
It will be placed in a position where it cannot be operated (where it cannot be accessed) unless the body frame is opened.
That is, a general player cannot access and operate the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112.

As will be described later, when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on (power failure restoration, power restoration), the gaming machine 10 sets the probability setting value according to the ON / OFF states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112. It is possible to shift to various states such as a changeable setting variable state (setting change state, setting change mode) and a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed.

In the present embodiment, the probability setting value is defined by, for example, 6 levels, and the probability setting value 1 (setting 1
), Probability setting value 2 (setting 2), probability setting value 3 (setting 3), probability setting value 4 (setting 4), probability setting value 5 (setting 5), and probability setting value 6 (setting 6). Generally, setting 1 is the most unfavorable setting for the player and setting 6 is the most unfavorable setting for the player. Settings 1 and 2 are low settings, settings 3 and 4 are intermediate settings (intermediate settings), and settings 5 and 6 are high settings.

In the probability setting change process, every time the operator presses the RAM initialization switch 112, the work setting value (setting) in the work setting value area is set to 0 (setting 1, probability setting 1).
→ setting value 1 (setting 2, probability setting value 2) → setting value 2 (setting 3, probability setting value 3) → setting value 3 (
Setting 4, probability setting value 4) → setting value 4 (setting 5, probability setting value 5) → setting value 5 (setting 6, probability setting value 6) → setting value 0 (setting 1) → setting value 1 (setting 2) → It is changed like .... In this way, the RAM initialization switch 112 also functions as a set value change switch. For convenience of description, the work setting values 0 to 5 are provided corresponding to the probability setting values 1 to 6 in the setting changing state (setting changing mode), but the work setting value and the probability setting value are the same. They may be treated as the same by aligning with the numerical range (that is, 0 to 5 or 1 to 6) (the work setting value and the probability setting value are set to the same numerical value).

The probability setting value may be changed by rotating the setting key switch 93 to a predetermined position instead of operating the RAM initialization switch 112 (setting value changing switch). The probability setting value is not limited to 6 levels. The display probability setting value corresponding to the selected work setting value 0 to 5 is, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment type (8-segment type including the dot Dp) display device 152. Etc. are displayed.

The gaming microcomputer 111 is a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a.
, Read-only ROM (Read Only Memory) 111b and RA that can be read and written at any time
An M (random access memory) 111c is provided.

The ROM 111b stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, judgment values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control in a non-volatile manner. The RAM 111c is used as a work area of the CPU 111a and a storage area for various signals and random values at the time of game control, stores information about games (game information), and stores and retains the stored information even when a power failure occurs. It becomes a holding storage means capable of An electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111b or the RAM 111c.

Further, the ROM 111b stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect contents, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111a to refer to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as start-up memory to determine the fluctuation pattern. Further, the variation pattern table includes a deviation variation pattern table selected when the result is a loss, a jackpot variation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, in these pattern tables, there are tables for determining the latter half variation pattern which is the variation pattern after reaching the reach state (the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation pattern selection table, etc.) and the variation before the reach state. A table (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) for determining a first half variation pattern that is a pattern is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the special result mode, the game state is advantageous for the player (special game state)
In the gaming machine 10 that becomes, at the stage where some of the plurality of display results have not been derived and displayed yet,
A display state in which the display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the condition of the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is deviated from the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result reaches the stage before the derived display. Refers to the non-display mode. Then, for example, a state in which the variable display is performed by a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining the state in which the special result forms are uniform (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses to reach the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. A display state in which at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfying the condition satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game varies a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle and right variation display areas of the display device. After displaying, in the case of displaying the result form by stopping the variable display in the order of left, right, and middle, in the left and right variable display areas, the condition that satisfies the special result form (for example, The state where the variable display is stopped by the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two variable display areas of left, middle, and right (for example, the same identification information May be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

Then, the reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and a normal reach (N reach) is provided as a system (type) of reach effects having a different possibility (a different expectation) of deriving a special result mode (big hit mode), Special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP
2 Reach), Special 3 Reach (SP3 Reach), and Premier Reach are set.
It should be noted that the expectation level (expected value) of the jackpot is higher in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. In addition, the reach state is included in at least the variable display mode when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of sync). Therefore, the state in which the reach state is generated is a state in which there is a high possibility of a big hit, as compared with the case where the reach state is not generated.

The CPU 111a executes the game control program in the ROM 111b to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. Control of the whole 10 is performed. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a big hit random number for determining the big hit random number of the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, and a small hit for determining the small hit symbol. Random pattern generation circuit to generate random numbers for patterns, fluctuation patterns for special display variable display games (including execution time of variable display games for various reach and variable display without reach) A clock generator that generates a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec (milliseconds)) to the CPU 111a or an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. ing.

Further, the CPU 111a executes the ROM 111b in the processing related to the special figure variation display game.
One of the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in is acquired. Specifically, the CPU 111a controls the game result (big hit or miss) of the special figure variation display game, the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure variation display game as the current game state, and the number of starting memories. Based on the above, one of the fluctuation pattern tables is selected and acquired from the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables. Here, the CPU 11
The reference numeral 1a constitutes a fluctuation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b when executing the special figure fluctuation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit according to the prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to win the prize ball. Control for paying out.
Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on a ball rental request signal from the card unit 600, and performs control for paying out the ball.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 has a radio wave sensor 62 (a board radio wave sensor) for detecting the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a gate switch 34a of the universal figure starting gate 34, and a starting opening 1 in the first starting winning opening 36. The switch 36a, the start opening 2 switch 37a in the second start winning opening 37 (normal variation winning device), the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35, the special variation winning device 38
, 39 special winning opening switch 43 (lower special winning opening switch 38a, upper special winning opening switch 39a
), The high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level is 7V.
An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 for inputting a signal of negative logic as described above and converting it to a signal of positive logic of 0V-5V is provided.

Further, the interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is connected to the specific area switch 72, the remaining ball discharge port switch 73, and the out ball detection switch 74. Specific area switch 72
Detects the passage of a game ball (V winning) to the specific area 86 (V winning opening). The remaining ball outlet switch 73 detects a game ball that has passed through the remaining ball outlet that discharges the game balls from the special variation winning devices 38 and 39. The out ball detection switch 74 may detect only the game ball passing through the out opening 30b, or may detect all the game balls that have been shot in the game area and finished the game.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123, the third input port 124, or the fourth input port 126 and read by the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the gate switch 34a, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the special winning opening switch 43 are input to the third input port 124. ..

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when the abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the second input port 123.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the specific area switch 72, the remaining ball discharge port switch 73, or the out ball detection switch 74 are input to the fourth input port 126.

Further, in the second input port 123, a detection signal of a magnetic sensor switch 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or the like, a glass frame open detection provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10 or the like. A signal from a switch 63, a front frame open detection switch 64 (main frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame 12 (main frame), and a vibration sensor 6 that detects vibration of the gaming machine 10.
The signal from 5 is input.

Further, the second input port 123 takes in the setting key switch signal from the setting key switch 93 and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to the test shot test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121 are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the third input port 124.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V from the power supply device 400 in addition to the voltage of 5V required for normal IC operation. Is becoming

The data held by the third input port 124 is the enable signal CE when the gaming microcomputer 111 decodes the address assigned to the third input port 124.
It can be read by asserting 2 (changing to a valid level). The same applies to the second input port 123, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, to the input unit 120, a frame radio wave incorrect signal output from the payout control device 200, a payout busy signal, a status signal indicating a payout abnormality, a shoot ball out switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow. Overflow switch signal, touch switch signal based on input of touch switch provided on operation handle 24, RAM initialization switch 1
There is provided a first input port 122 which receives a signal from 12 and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. The overflow switch signal is a signal output when it is detected that the game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 at a predetermined amount or more (full). The frame radio wave incorrect signal is a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 (main body frame), and whether the payout busy signal is in a state in which the payout control device 200 can receive a command. This is a signal indicating whether or not.

Further, the input section 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmitt buffer 125 receives these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from.
The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 is once input to the first input port 122, and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 for receiving signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which the noise is removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111, and the output unit 13 is also provided.
0 is supplied to each port. In addition, the reset signal RST is directly output to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test shot test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test shot test apparatus. Is configured.

In addition, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test shot test device via the relay board 70. It should be noted that the reset signal RST corresponds to the ports 122 and 123 of the input unit 120.
, 124 is not supplied. The data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset in order to prevent a malfunction of the system, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that one-way communication is performed so that no signal can be input from the effect control device 300 side to the game control device 100.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and transmits data for notifying special test symbol information of the variable display game to a test shooting test device of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating a probability state of a big hit through the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of the pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass product for sale) installed in the game shop. A detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a starter switch output from the proximity I / F 121, is supplied to the test-shooting test device via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal, such as the magnetic sensor switch 61 or the radio wave sensor 62, which cannot be supplied to the test-shooting test device as it is, is once taken in by the game microcomputer 111 and processed into another signal or information, for example, a game machine controls the game. As an error signal indicating that the test is not possible, the error signal is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test-inspection test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70.

The relay board 70 is provided with a port for receiving a signal output from the buffer 133 and supplying the signal to the test-shooting test apparatus, a connector for relaying and transmitting a signal line of a detection signal of a switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. There is. At the port on the relay board 70, the game microcomputer 11
The chip enable signal CE output from 1 is also supplied, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 to open a solenoid (universal solenoid) 37c for opening the normal variable winning device 37, and a lower special winning opening solenoid 38b for opening the first special variable winning device 38 (large winning opening). The solenoid 1), the upper special winning opening solenoid 39b (the special winning opening solenoid 2) for opening the second special variation winning device 39, and the first for outputting the opening / closing data of the lever solenoid 86b for operating the lever to open the specific area 86. Two output ports 134 are provided.

In addition, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting ON / OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. Of the digit line connected to the cathode terminal of the LED
A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting off data.

Further, the output unit 130 outputs information about the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal 71.
A fifth output port 137 is provided for outputting to. The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photo relay and can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or an amusement hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store, and information related to the gaming machine 10 is externally transmitted. It can be supplied to the device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 has a universal solenoid 37 output from the second output port 134.
c and the special winning opening solenoid 38b, 39b and the like open / close data signal is received, the 1st driver (drive circuit) 138a which generates and outputs the solenoid drive signal, the current supply of the collective display device 50 output from the 3rd output port 135 Side driver 138b for outputting ON / OFF drive signal of segment line, and third driver 138b for outputting ON / OFF drive signal of digit line of current drawing side of collective display device 50 output from fourth output port 136 A fourth driver 138d that outputs an external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal 71 is provided.

The first driver 138a is supplied with 32V DC as a power supply voltage from the power supply device 400 in order to drive a solenoid that operates at 32V. In addition, the collective display device 50
The DC 12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line of. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for extracting the digit line according to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

The second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes a current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line, and the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential pulls out the current from the cathode terminal through the segment line, thereby providing a dynamic driving method. The power supply voltage flows to the LEDs selected in sequence and the LEDs are turned on. Fourth output of external information signal to external information terminal 71
The driver 138d is supplied with 12V DC in order to provide a 12V level to the external information signal. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided not on the output section 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the main board, but on the relay board 70 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code of each gaming machine and a program to the external inspection device 500. Photo coupler 13
9, the gaming microcomputer 111 is configured to be able to communicate with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since the data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Furthermore, the output unit 130 receives the serial data (control data, lighting pattern data, character code (character code), etc.) output from the second output port 134, and displays the performance display device 152 (status display device). A driver 150 for driving is provided. In the present embodiment, the performance display device 152 includes a plurality (four) of 7-segment type (8-segment type including the dot Dp) indicators (LED lamps), and the driver 150 is an LED driver. It is not limited to.

The performance display device 152 is provided on the game control device 100 (main board),
It may be provided in another place. For example, the performance display device 152 can display the display probability set value, the accessory ratio, the payout rate, and the number of discharged balls.

Here, the number of discharged balls is the number of game balls discharged from the game area 32 (also called the number of out balls).
Is the total of the number of gaming balls that have passed through the winning opening (the number of winnings) and the number of gaming balls that have passed through the outlet 30b. The number of discharged balls counts the signal of the out-ball detection switch 74, etc.
It can be obtained by doing. In the present embodiment, the winning openings are a general winning opening 35, a starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting opening 1), an ordinary variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting opening 2).
), And special variation winning devices 38, 39 (special winning opening) are included.

The payout rate is the ratio (ratio) of the total number of prize balls to the number of discharged balls (or the number of shot balls), (
Calculated as (number of balls acquired / number of balls discharged) × 100 (%). That is, the payout rate is the number of balls acquired (total number of prize balls) per 100 discharged balls.

For example, the winning character ratio is during the jackpot state, out of the total number of award balls (total number of award balls) obtained by winning the prize hole in a predetermined period (for example, from power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present). Is the ratio (%) of the number of prize balls (the number of balls acquired for each character) obtained by winning the big prize hole (= so-called continuous character ratio). The ratio of the prizes may be the ratio of the number of prize balls (during the big hit state and the small hit state) obtained by winning the big prize hole (= the big prize hole ratio) out of the total number of prize balls. Or, the ratio of the number of prize balls obtained by winning the large winning a prize and the ordinary variable winning a prize device 37 (the second starting winning a prize) (= the so-called character ratio (general character ratio) )).

[Production control device]
Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 (sub-board) will be described with reference to FIG. 80. FIG. 80 is a block diagram of the effect control system of the gaming machine 10.

The effect control device 300, like the game microcomputer 111, is an amusement chip (IC).
A main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing image processing for displaying an image on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. A sound source LSI 314 that controls the output of sound for reproducing various melody and sound effects from the speaker 19 is provided.

The main control microcomputer 311 has a P that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data.
A program ROM 321, which is a ROM (programmable read only memory), a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and an Fe that can retain stored contents even when power is not supplied at the time of power failure
A RAM 323 and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 338, which is a time counting unit that generates information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, etc.), are connected. A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311.

A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, determines the effect contents and instructs the VDP 312 on the contents of the output video, and the sound source LSI 314.
To perform reproduction sound instruction, lighting of decoration lamp, drive control of motor and solenoid, management of effect time, and the like.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for expanding and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, data is transmitted and received between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in a parallel manner, it is possible to transmit commands and data in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronizing signal VSYN for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 and the lighting of the decoration lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30.
C, a synchronization signal STS that gives a data transmission timing is input. In addition, VDP312
To the main control microcomputer 311 to wait for reception of interrupt signals INT0-n and command and data from the main control microcomputer 311 to notify the processing status such as completion of drawing in the VRAM. The signal WAIT or the like is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the image generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

A sound ROM 327 storing voice data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. An interrupt signal INT is input from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speakers 19a and 19b provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speakers 19c and 19d provided on the front frame 12. , Sound source LSI
The sound generated in 314 is output from the upper speakers 19a and 19b and the lower speakers 19c and 19d via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. Command I / F3
The decorative special figure reservation number command, the decorative special figure command, the variation command, the stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via 31 are received as an effect control command signal (effect command). .. The game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 is DC5
Since the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

In addition, in the effect control device 300, a board decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling the board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided in the game board 30 (including the center case 40) and the glass frame 15 are provided. A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided therein, a game board 3
0 (including the center case 40) board production device 44 (for example, display device 41)
A board production movable body control circuit 334 is provided for driving and controlling a movable accessory etc. that enhances the production effect in cooperation with the production display in FIG. The panel display device 46 includes the above-mentioned lamp display device 8
0 and RUSH lamps 812 may be included.

These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control the lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. A frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling a frame effect device such as a motor provided in the glass frame 15 may be provided.

Further, in the effect control device 300, the effect button switch 25 a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15 and the cross key 6 provided on the surface of the effect button 25.
90f, a function of detecting the on / off state of the production accessory switch 47 (production motor switch) for detecting the initial position of the motor in the board production device 44, and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311; A switch input circuit 336 for detecting the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the control device 300 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 has the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration.
32V for driving a motor and a solenoid, a display device 41 including a liquid crystal panel, a DC 12V for driving a motor and an LED, in order to supply a DC voltage of a desired level to the electronic components controlled by the DC5 that is the power supply voltage of the command I / F331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a DC 15V voltage for driving a motor, an LED, and a speaker.

Furthermore, when an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, DC- for generating DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V is used. A DC converter is provided in effect control device 300. DC-
The DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. In addition, the VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314 are output from the main control microcomputer 311.
, And is supplied to an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving a speaker and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) for driving and controlling a lamp, a motor, and the like, and resets them. In addition, the production control device 300 has a cooling FA that cools various parts of the gaming machine 10.
The cooling FAN 45 is driven in a state where N45 is connected and the effect control device 300 is powered on.

Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described. Game control device 1
In the CPU 111a of the game microcomputer 111 of 00, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the universal figure starting gate 34, the random number for hit determination of the universal figure is extracted and stored in the ROM 111b. The judgment result is compared with the judgment value that is present, and it is judged whether or not the general figure variation display game has hit.

Then, on the public figure display, after the identification symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time, the general figure variability display game is displayed in which it is stopped. When the result of the universal figure variation display game is a hit, a special result mode is displayed on the universal figure indicator, the universal electric solenoid 37c is operated, and the movable member 37b of the regular variation winning device 37 is operated for a predetermined time (for example, (0.3 seconds) The opening control is performed as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). When the result of the general-picture variation display game is off, control is performed to display the result mode of the off-screen on the general-picture display.

In addition, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning opening 36, the starting winning (starting memory) is stored, and the big hit determination of the special figure 1 variable display game is based on the starting memory. The random number for use is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game has missed.

In addition, the starting memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variation winning device 37, and based on the starting memory, the random number value for jackpot determination of the special figure 2 variation display game. Is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is missed.

Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game to the effect control device 300. Then, after the identification symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display device 51 or the special figure 2 display device 52, the special figure variation display game for stop display is displayed. That is, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball flowing down the game region 32 into the starting winning region (first starting winning port 36, normal variable winning device 37). Make up.

Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 displays the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game. Furthermore, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, setting of effect state, output of sounds from the speakers 19a to 19d, processing for controlling light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed.
That is, the effect control device 300 constitutes an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game or the like).

Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a hit, displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 and generates the special game state. Let In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111a
For example, the opening / closing door 39c of the special variation winning device 39 is opened by the special winning opening solenoid 39b, and control is performed to allow the game balls to flow into the special winning opening.

Either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are won in the special winning opening, or a predetermined openable time (for example, 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses from the opening of the special winning opening. One round (R) is to open the special winning opening until such condition is achieved, and this is repeated for a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times, 11 times or 2 times) (repetition) control (cycle game) I do. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a special winning opening opening / closing control means that controls the opening and closing of the special winning opening when the stop result appearance becomes the special result appearance. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is off, control is performed to display the deviation result mode on the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52.

In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the special game state ends, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. The high probability state (probability change state) is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than that in the normal probability state. In addition, even if the high probability state is reached based on the result mode of the special figure variable display game, that is, the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game, Both are in high probability states.

In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a time saving state (specific game state) as a game state after the special game state ends, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In the time saving state, control is performed such that the universal figure variation display game and the normal variation winning device 37 are set to the time saving operation state, and the normal variation winning device 37 per unit time is longer than that in the normal variation winning device 37 being in the normal operation state. Since it is controlled so that the opening time of is substantially increased, it becomes the universal communication support state. In addition, even in a high probability state (normal probability variation state) excluding the latent probability variation state, duplication support is performed by shortening the state in a redundant manner.

For example, in the time saving state, the execution time of the above-mentioned general figure fluctuation display game (general figure fluctuation time)
It is possible to perform a time-shortening variation to make the second variation display time shorter than the normal first variation display time (for example, 10000 msec is 1000 msec). In the time saving state, the execution time of the special figure variation display game (special figure variation time) is shortened as compared with the normal time, and the time reduction variation of the special figure variation display game is also executed.

In addition, in the time saving state, the general figure stop time for displaying the result of the general figure fluctuation display game is set to the first time.
Second stop time (eg 704 msec) shorter than stop time (eg 1604 msec)
It is possible to control so that

Further, in the time saving state, when the universal figure variation display game is a hit result and the regular variation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (normal communication opening time) is the first opening time in the normal state (for example, 100 msec). It is possible to control such that the second opening time is longer than that (for example, 1352 msec).

Further, in the time saving state, the number of times the normal variation winning device 37 is opened (the number of ordinary electric open times) is larger than the first number of times of opening (for example, two times) with respect to one hit result of the universal figure variation display game. It is possible to set the second opening number (for example, 4 times). In addition, in the time saving state, it is possible to set the probability of being a hit result of the universal figure changing display game (general figure probability) to be a high probability higher than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operation state.

In the time saving state, the general variation winning device 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the universal figure variation time, the universal figure stop time, the number of universal communication open, the universal communication open time, and the universal figure probability. Try to extend the conversion time longer than usual. As a result, in the time saving state, winning in the normal variation winning device 37 is easier than in the normal gaming state, and the number of executions of the special figure variation display game per unit time can be increased more than in the normal gaming state. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states that are different from each other. Further, in the normal operation state, the movable member 3
You may set so that 7b may not be opened (universal figure probability is 0). Moreover, you may make it select either the 1st opening aspect or the 2nd opening aspect when it becomes a hit. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be different. Further, the high-probability state and the short-time state can be independently generated, both of them can be simultaneously generated, or only one of them can be generated.

[Transition state when power is turned on]
FIG. 81 is a diagram illustrating a transition state when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on (power is restored). As described above, depending on the on / off state of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 when the power is turned on, the state shifts to four states (modes) as shown in FIG. 81.

First, when the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 are turned on when the power is turned on, a setting variable state (setting change state, setting change state) in which the probability setting value (setting value) can be changed.
(Setting change mode) (see A1027-A1036 in FIG. 82B and FIG. 84).

Next, when the setting key switch 93 is turned on but the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned off when the power is turned on, the state shifts to a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed (Fig. 82B, A1031-A1036 and FIG. 84).

Although the setting key switch 93 is off when the power is turned on, the RAM initialization switch 11
When 2 is turned on, it shifts to the RAM initialization state (RAM clear mode) and R
The AM initialization process (RAM clear process) is executed to initialize the RAM 111c (see A1042-1044 in FIG. 82B).

When the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are off when the power is turned on, the normal power recovery state (normal power recovery mode) is entered, and the power is simply restored.

[Control of game control device]
Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the gaming microcomputer (gaming microcomputer) 111 of the gaming control device 100 will be described. The control processing by the gaming microcomputer 111 is mainly shown in FIGS. 82A and 82B.
And a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 83, which is performed in a predetermined time cycle (4 msec (millisecond) in this embodiment). That is, the game control program corresponding to the control processing of the game microcomputer 111 is composed of a main program (caller routine) corresponding to main processing and an interrupt processing program (interrupt processing routine) corresponding to timer interrupt processing. ..

[Main processing (game control device)]
First, the main process will be described. 82A and 82B are flowcharts showing the procedure of main processing by the game control device 100. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In the flowchart of the process executed by the game control device 100,
The code (number) of the step is represented as “A ***”.

As shown in FIG. 82A, when starting the main process, the game control device 100 first executes a process of prohibiting interruption (A1001). Further, a stack pointer setting process for setting the stack pointer which is the top address of the area for saving the value of the register or the like when the interrupt occurs (A1002).

Subsequently, the register bank 0 is designated as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (A1004). For example, when the RAM address is in the range of 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

Next, the game control device 100 outputs a firing prohibition signal and sets the firing permission signal to the prohibited state (A1005). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing prohibition signal, and the firing of the game ball is prohibited. After that, the game control device 100 reads the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 (A1006). That is, the signals from the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are read.

Further, the game control device 100 sets a power supply delay timer (A1007). By setting a predetermined initial value in the power supply delay timer, the game control device 1 forming the main control means
Waiting time for waiting until the program of the secondary control means (for example, payout control device 200 or effect control device 300) that performs various controls in accordance with instructions from 00 (for example, 3
Seconds) is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device. Can avoid dropping commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control device 100) when the power is turned on, and the sub control devices (payout control device 200, effect control device 3).
(00, etc.) to form a standby means for setting a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of (00, etc.).

Further, the power supply delay timer counts time using a storage area (RAM area or register, etc. which is not the target of validity determination) that is not the target of RAM validity determination (checksum calculation). As a result, when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, a part of R
Since it is not necessary to calculate by excluding the AM area, it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

By reading the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 before the start of the standby time, the operations of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 can be reliably detected. That is, if the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are read after the waiting time has elapsed, the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are operated after the waiting time has elapsed, or the power is turned on. It is necessary to continue to operate the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 from the time until the waiting time elapses. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, a situation in which the operations of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112, which are performed when the power is turned on, cannot be accepted without performing such a troublesome operation. It can be prevented.

When the power supply delay timer is set (A1007), the game control device 100 executes the process of measuring the standby time and the process of monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (from A1008 to A).
1010).

When the power failure monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first determines whether or not a power failure occurs by reading a power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via a port and a data bus. (A1008). When a power failure occurs (result of A1008 is “Y”), the game machine waits until the power is cut off.

If the power failure has not occurred, the game control device 100 (the result of A1008 is “N”)
The power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (A1009), and it is determined whether the timer value is 0 (A1010). If the value of the timer is not 0 (result of A1010 is "N"), that is, if the waiting time has not ended, the process returns to step A1008.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of power failure in a predetermined standby time. As a result, it becomes possible to deal with a power failure that has occurred during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a defect at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the waiting time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power shutdown are retained, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control load can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the timer value is 0, the game control device 100 (the result of A1010 is “Y”).
) That is, when the waiting time is over, access to the read / write memory (Read / Write Memory) such as RAM or EEPROM is enabled (A1011), and OFF data is output to all output ports (no output). Set to (A1012).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a serial port (a port that is installed in the game microcomputer 111 in advance, and is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) (A1013). ).

Further, here, the driver 150 that drives the performance display device 152 (state display device) may be initialized. The game control device 100 writes a command including control data corresponding to the contents of the initial setting in the transmission buffer of the second output port 134 (serial communication circuit) and transmits it to the driver 150. For example, the game control device 100 sets the duty ratio in the initial setting. The duty ratio corresponds to the brightness of each LED (each segment) of the performance display device 152. The game control device 100 sets the number of used digits of the performance display device 152 in the initial setting. In this embodiment, the number of used digits is four.

Next, the game control device 100 generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator), and a CTC (Counter / Timer C).
ircuit) circuit is started (A1014). The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 by a frequency dividing circuit and a CP signal based on the frequency-divided signal.
It is provided with a CTC circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) for U111a and a signal CTC that gives a trigger for updating a random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 is an RA indicating an abnormality of the RAM (here, the RAM 111c).
The M abnormality flag is set (A1015). Here, the abnormality premise flag is temporarily set in a predetermined register.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1016). If it is normal (A101
The result of 6 is “Y”), and it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1017).

Furthermore, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (the result of A1017 is “Y”), the game control device 100 calculates a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM (for example, a game control work area). Calculation processing is executed (A1018), and it is determined whether the calculated checksum and the checksum at power-off match (A1019). If the checksums match (result of A1019 is “Y”), the RAM is normal and the RAM indicates an abnormality.
The abnormality flag is cleared (A1020). Then, the process proceeds to step A1021.

In addition, when the game control device 100 determines that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (the result of A1016 is “N” or the result of A1017 is “N”), the checksums do not match. (The result of A1019 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A1021 without clearing the RAM abnormality flag.

Next, the game control device 100, the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112
It is determined whether or not both switches are on (A1021). When both switches are ON (result of A1021 is “Y”), the game control device 100 shifts to a setting variable state (setting change mode), and executes the process of changing probability setting in steps A1027-A1037. ..

When at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (result of A1021 is “N”), the game control device 100 has RAM (here, RAM).
111c) whether or not the RAM abnormality flag indicating an abnormality is set (A102).
2). When the RAM abnormality flag is not set (result of A1022 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (A1023). If the probability setting changing flag is not set (result of A1023 is “N”), step A103
1-A1037 processing during probability setting confirmation (during setting confirmation state, setting confirmation mode), RAM initialization processing (RAM clear processing) in steps A1041-1044, or step A1
The processing of 041, A1045, and A1046 when the power is normally turned on (when the power is restored) is executed.

The game control device 100, when the probability setting changing flag is set (A1023)
Result is “Y”), a command for main abnormality error notification for notifying that there is an abnormality in the game control device 100 (main board, main board) is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (A1024).
. The effect control device 300 that has received the command of the main abnormality error notification is the game control device 10
Notify that there was 0 abnormality.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 causes the driver 15 of the performance display device 152 to display the 7-segment display data (error display data of “E1”) at the time of game stop on the performance display device 152.
It is output to 0 (A1025). Then, the ON data of the security signal for notifying an abnormality to an external device (game hall internal management device (hall computer), information collecting terminal, etc.) is output to the external information terminal 71 (A1026). Here, the information about the big hit is RAM
Even when it remains in 111c, other signals to the external information terminal 71 such as the big hit signal are maintained in the off state. After that, the processing of steps A1025 and A1026 is repeated, and the operation waits.
The setting change operation is again performed (the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are both turned on), and the power supply is turned on. While the process of steps A1025 and A1026 is repeated and waiting, the interrupt remains disabled (A1001), and the timer interrupt process capable of executing the special figure 1 and 2 game processing and the general figure game processing (FIG. ) Cannot be executed, a game (special figure variation display game, general figure variation display game) cannot be executed.

In this way, the setting change operation (setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112
Both of the ON operations of 1) are not executed, but if the probability setting changing flag is set, it is determined that there is an abnormality, and the processing of A1024-A1026 is executed. For example, if the power is turned off and restarted while the probability setting is being changed (before the setting is changed), the probability setting changing flag may be set even though the setting changing operation has not been executed. is there.

On the other hand, the game control device 100 also when the RAM abnormality flag is set (A102).
The result of 2 is "Y"), the command of the main abnormality error notification for notifying that there is an abnormality in the game control device 100 (main board) is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (A1024), and 7 segments when the game is stopped. Display data (error display data of "E1") is output to the driver 150 of the performance display device 152 (A1025), and on-data of the security signal is output to the external information terminal 71 to notify the external device of the RAM abnormality. (A1026). Note that, similarly to the above, even when the information about the big hit remains in the RAM 111c, other signals such as the big hit signal to the external information terminal 71 are maintained in the off state. After that, steps A1025 and A10
The process of 26 is repeated and the process waits.

When both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (the result of A1021 is “Y”), the game control device 100 starts the process of changing the probability setting (during the setting variable state). First, it is determined whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is set (A1027). When the RAM error flag is set (the result of A1027 is "Y
)), Since it is unknown whether the probability setting value is correct, after clearing the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c to the initial value (for example, the minimum setting value "1") (A1028). ), A probability setting changing flag indicating that the probability setting is being changed is set (
A1029). If the RAM error flag is not set (the result of A1027 is "N
)), The probability setting changing flag is set without clearing the probability setting value (A1029).
Next, the command of changing the probability setting is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1
030) and the process moves to step A1034. Note that the effect control device 300 that has received the command for changing the probability setting notifies the display device 41 or the like that the probability setting is being changed.

In the game control device 100, at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (result of A1021 is “N”), and the RAM abnormality flag is not set (result of A1022 is “N”). ), And when the probability setting changing flag is not set (result of A1023 is "N"), it is determined whether the setting key switch 93 is on (A1031). When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1031 is “Y”), the RAM initialization switch 112 is off, and the probability setting confirmation process (during the setting confirmation state) is started. A probability setting confirmation flag indicating that the setting is being confirmed is set (A1032). Then, the command for which the probability setting is being confirmed is used as the effect control device
0 (effect control board) (A1033), and the process proceeds to step A1034. The effect control device 300 that has received the command for changing the probability setting notifies the display device 41 or the like that the probability setting is being confirmed.

After step A1030 or step A1033, the game control device 100 executes the processing of steps A1034 to A1040 as common processing during the probability setting change and the probability setting confirmation.

The game control device 100 first saves 128 ms (predetermined time) in the security signal control timer area in order to output the security signal during the probability setting change and the probability setting confirmation (A1034). Although the count of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed in the probability setting change / confirmation processing (FIG. 84) described later, when the probability setting change or the probability setting confirmation ends early, the remaining The counting of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed in the external information editing process (A1321). During the probability setting change and the probability setting confirmation, the security signal is output for at least 50 ms.

Next, the game control device 100 permits interruption (A1035). As a result, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 83) can be executed. Then, it is determined whether the setting key switch 93 is off (A1036). When the setting key switch 93 is on (A1036
Is "N"), it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred (A1037). If no power failure has occurred (result of A1037 is "N"), the process returns to step A1036. On the other hand, when a power failure has occurred (the result of A1037 is “Y”), steps A1055-A1
The processing at 061 when a power failure occurs is executed.

As described above, as long as the setting key switch 93 is on and a power failure has not occurred, it is possible to confirm the setting variable state (setting changing state, setting changing mode) in which the probability setting value can be changed, or the probability setting value. The setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) continues.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the setting key switch 93 is off (A1036)
The result is “Y”), interrupts are prohibited (A1038), and a notification end command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1039). In addition, the effect control device 300 that has received the notification end command ends the notification that the probability setting is being confirmed or the notification that the probability setting is being changed.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set, that is, whether or not the probability setting is being changed so far (A1040). If the probability setting changing flag is set (the result of A1040 is "Y"), that is, if the probability setting is being changed so far, the RAM initialization process (to be described later) of steps A1042-A1044 is executed. To do. On the other hand, when the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A1040 is “N”), that is, when the probability setting is being confirmed so far, when the power is turned on after step A1045 (when the power is restored). Perform the normal processing of.

When the setting key switch 93 is off (result of A1031 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (A1041).
. If the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (result of A1041 is “Y”), RA
In M111c, the RAM area other than the probability setting value area for storing the probability setting value is set to 0.
Clear (A1042). That is, the game information stored in the RAM 111c is cleared to 0 except for the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area. Further, the above-mentioned probability setting changing flag is also cleared here. In addition to the probability setting value area, it is also possible to configure such that the stack area and unused area are not cleared, or the work area and stack area related to performance information and its display (performance display) are not cleared. .. The performance information is derived on the basis of the number of prize balls obtained by winning. For example, the payout rate, the base value (the payout rate in the normal gaming state), the ratio of the winning character, the number of discharged balls, etc. is there.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1043). Then, the command for RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1044), and the process proceeds to step A1047.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (A1
The result of 041 is “N”), and since both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are off, normal power-on (power-on) processing is started and power-out recovery processing is executed ( A1045). For example, the initial value at the time of power recovery (when power is restored) is saved in the area to be initialized. Further, the above-mentioned probability setting confirmation flag is also cleared here. Next, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to a process number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game process described later is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1046), and step A10.
The processing moves to 47.

The command for RAM initialization transmitted in the process of step A1044 and the command for restoration of power failure transmitted in the process of step A1046 include a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine and suspension of special figures 1 and 2. Number of decoration special figure 1 hold number command and decoration special figure 2 hold number command, probability state command (probability state or low probability state) or probability information command indicating presence / absence of time saving state, special figure variation in predetermined production mode An effect number information command indicating the number of times the display game has been executed, and a power failure recovery command indicating that the power has been turned on are included.

Further, the command at the time of RAM initialization and the command at the time of power failure recovery include a setting value information command (probability setting value information command) indicating setting value information which is information of the probability setting value (setting value) of the gaming machine 10. Be done. The game control device 100 need only transmit the setting value information command to the effect control device 300 only once when the power is restored (turned on), and thereafter, the effect control device 300 refers to the setting value information stored by itself. You can control production.

The RAM initialization command also includes a RAM initialization command (RAM clear command). The effect control device 300 that has received the RAM initialization command, for example,
A customer waiting demo is displayed on the display device 41, and the RAM of the sound of the LED and the speaker of the panel decoration device 46 is displayed.
Notification of initialization (RAM clear) is performed for 30 seconds. In addition, the command at the time of restoration from a power failure includes a screen designation command that designates the display content of the screen of the display device 41. In addition, the command to specify the screen is normally under processing for both Toku-zu 1 and 2 (when it is neither changing nor hitting).
, A customer waiting demo command, and a recovery screen command otherwise.

After step A1044 or step A1046, the game control device 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (A1047). Specifically, a predetermined register (C
The CPU 111a sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in the TC update permission register. Also, a bit transposed pattern of hard random numbers (here, big hit random numbers) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set.

The bit transposition pattern is the method of exchanging the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (arrangement before the bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after the bit transposition in the lower row). Is a pattern that determines.

In the present embodiment, by exchanging the bits of the random number according to the bit transposed pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may be allowed to arbitrarily set it.

After that, the game control device 100 extracts the value of a predetermined register (soft random number register 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on, and various corresponding initial value random numbers (the big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol) Initial value (big hit symbol initial value random number), initial value of small hit symbol random number to determine small hit symbol (small hit symbol initial value random number), initial value of hit random number to determine hit of ordinary figure (random initial value random number) , The initial value of the random number of the falling lottery used in the falling lottery (a random number of the initial value of the falling lottery) is saved as a start value in a predetermined area of the RWM (A1048), and interruption is permitted (A10).
49). Since the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111a used in this embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes each time the power is turned on, this value is used as the start value (initial value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software and make it difficult for the player to obtain an illegal random number.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes the initial value random number updating process for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers (A1050). Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit pattern random number, the hit random number, and the falling lottery random number are configured to be generated using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. There is. However,
The big hit random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU. CTC output with the same cycle (CTC of timer interrupt processing (
It is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on a CTC (CTC2) different from CTC0).

In addition, in the big hit symbol random number, the hit symbol random number, the falling lottery random number, the so-called "initial value changing method" is used in which the start value is changed using each initial value random number (generated by software) each time the random number makes a round. ing. Each of the random numbers may be updated by a counter method with +1 or 1, or may be a random method update in which all the values within the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number that is updated only by hardware, and the jackpot symbol random number, the hit random number, and the falling lottery random number are random numbers that are updated by hardware and software.

Next, the game control device 100 prohibits interruption (A1051), and executes performance display editing processing for editing performance information and its display (performance display) (A1052). Here, the performance information (such as the character ratio and the payout rate) may be calculated. If the RAM abnormality flag is set in the register, the work area and the stack area related to the performance information and its display (performance display) may be cleared (if not cleared in step A1042). After that, the interrupt is permitted (A1053). As a result, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 83) can be executed.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not a power failure has occurred (A1054).
When no power failure has occurred (result of A1054 is “N”), the process returns to step A1050. As a result, the processing of steps A1050-A1054 is repeated until a power failure occurs.

When a power failure occurs (result of A1054 is “Y”), the game control device 100 starts the process at the time of power failure, temporarily interrupts (A1055), and outputs off data to all output ports ( 1056). After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (A1057), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (A
1058). Further, a checksum calculation process for calculating the checksum at the time of power-off of the RWM is executed (A1059), and the calculated checksum is saved (A1060).
. Finally, a process of prohibiting access to the RWM is executed (A1061), and the process waits until the power of the gaming machine is cut off.

In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before power shutdown was correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing (interrupt processing program). The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, timer interrupt processing is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the game control device 100 first designates the register bank 1 as the register bank to be used (A1301), and sets the upper address of the RAM start address in a predetermined register (A1302). Switching from register bank 0 used in the main process to register bank 1 at the start of the timer interrupt process is equivalent to saving the registers used in the main process. When the timer interrupt process is started, the interrupt is automatically disabled.

Next, the game control device 100 inputs from various sensors and switches, captures signals,
That is, the input processing for reading the state of each input port is executed (A1303). Next, it is determined whether the probability setting is being changed or the probability setting is being confirmed, based on the probability setting changing flag and the probability setting confirming flag (A1304). When the probability setting is being changed or the probability setting is being confirmed (the result of A1304 is “Y”), the probability setting changing / confirming process for changing or confirming the probability setting value is executed (A1305).

The game control device 100 determines whether the probability setting is not being changed or the probability setting is being confirmed (A130).
The result of No. 4 is "N"), and based on the output data set in various processes, output process for performing drive control of actuators such as solenoids (special winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b) is executed (A1306). When the firing prohibition signal is output in the processing of step A1005 in the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permission state.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a payout command transmission process of outputting the command set in the transmission buffer to the payout control device 200 in various processes (A1307), and further, a random number update process 1 (A1308), a random number update. Process 2 (A1309) is executed. After that, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the winning opening switch 35a, the lower special winning opening switch 38a, and the upper special winning opening switch 39a are monitored to see if there is a normal signal input or an error is monitored. The winning opening switch / state monitoring process for performing (whether the front frame or the glass frame is opened) is executed (A1310).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not abnormal discharge of game balls is occurring at the special winning opening (A1311). When the abnormal discharge occurrence flag is set by the abnormal discharge monitoring process (A1320) described later, it can be determined that abnormal discharge is occurring. When abnormal discharge is occurring (result of A1311 is “Y”), the processes of step A1317 and thereafter are executed.

The game control device 100, when the abnormal discharge is not occurring (the result of A1311 is "N")
A start opening switch monitoring process for monitoring the winning of the start opening by the start opening 1 switch 36a and the start opening 2 switch 37a is executed (A1312). Then, the special figure 1 game process for performing the special figure 1 variable display game is executed (A1313), and the special figure 2 game process for performing the special figure 2 variable display game process is executed (A1314). The details of the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a universal figure game process for performing a process related to the universal figure variation display game (A1315). A segment LED edit process for driving a segment LED provided in the gaming machine 10 for displaying a special figure variation game and various information regarding a game so as to display desired contents is executed (A1316).

Further, the game control device 100 executes a magnet fraud monitoring process of checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 to determine whether there is any abnormality (A1317). Further, a radio wave fraud monitoring process (board radio wave fraud monitoring process) for checking whether a detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the game board is normal or not is executed (A1318).

After that, the game control device 100 executes vibration irregularity monitoring processing for monitoring irregularity due to vibration based on the input from the vibration sensor 65 (A1319). Next, an abnormal discharge monitoring process for monitoring abnormal discharge from the special winning opening is executed (A1320). In the abnormal discharge monitoring process, the special winning opening device 43, the special winning opening switch 43 (lower special winning opening switch 38a, upper special winning opening switch 39a), the specific area switch 72 (V winning opening switch, V switch), remaining Based on the input from the ball discharge port switch 73, the abnormal discharge of the special variation winning devices 38, 39 is monitored, and when the abnormal discharge occurs, the abnormal discharge occurrence flag is set. In addition, the game ball that has passed through the special winning opening switch 43 of the special variation winning device 38, 39 is a specific area switch 7
2 (V winning opening switch, V switch) or remaining ball discharging opening switch 73 to be discharged.

Next, the game control device 100 executes an external information editing process of setting a signal to be output to various external devices in the output buffer (A1321). Then, performance display monitor control processing for controlling the display of the performance display device 152 is executed (A1322). After that, the timer interrupt processing ends.

Note that when the timer interrupt processing returns, restoration of the interrupt disabled state and restoration of the register bank specification are configured to be performed automatically. However, depending on the CPU used, interrupts are enabled after the external information editing processing. It is also possible to perform the processing for returning or the processing for returning the designation of the register bank to the register bank 0.

[Probability setting change / confirmation process]
Next, details of the probability setting change / confirmation process (A1305) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the procedure of probability setting change / confirmation processing. In the probability setting change / confirmation process, the probability setting value can be changed or confirmed.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the probability setting value is within the normal range (A2
401). The probability setting value here is stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c.

The game control device 100, when the probability setting value is within the normal range (the result of A2401 is "
Y ”), probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is set (A2402), and output to the performance display device 152 via the driver 150 (A2404). When the probability setting value is not within the normal range (result of A2401 is “N”), the extinction data is set as the probability setting value display data (A2403) and is output to the performance display device 152 via the driver 150 (A
2404).

Here, the probability setting value display data is data of the display probability setting value displayed on the performance display device 152, and is stored in the probability setting value display data area. In order to prevent confusion among hall-related persons, if the probability setting values are different but the same big hit probability (and small hit probability), the display probability setting value is associated with the big hit probability (and small hit probability). May be the same. That is, the same display probability setting value may mean the same big hit probability (and small hit probability).

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the security signal control timer is not 0 (A2405). The security signal control timer is set to 1 in step A1034.
28 ms (predetermined time). Subsequently, the on-data of the security signal for notifying the external device (game hall internal management device (hall computer) or the like) of the abnormality is sent to the external information terminal 71.
To (A1026). Here, other signals to the external information terminal 71, such as the big hit signal, are maintained in the off state.

After that, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (A2407). If the probability setting changing flag is not set (A2407)
If the result is “N”), that is, if the probability setting is being confirmed, the probability setting changing / confirming process is terminated without doing anything.

The game control device 100, when the probability setting changing flag is set (A2407)
If the result is “Y”), that is, if the probability setting is being changed, it is determined whether or not it is the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (A2408). If it is the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (result of A2408 is “Y”), the probability setting change / confirmation process is terminated. This is to prevent the probability setting value from being unintentionally updated when the RAM initialization switch 112 is kept pressed.

The game control device 100, if it is not the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (A240
The result of 8 is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the RAM initialization switch 112 is input (A2).
409). If there is no input from the RAM initialization switch (result of A2409 is "N"), the probability setting change / confirmation processing ends.

The game control device 100, when there is an input of the RAM initialization switch 112 (A2409)
Is “Y”), the work setting value in the work setting value area (in the RAM 111c or the register) is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 5, and the probability of the probability setting value area corresponds to the work setting value. The set values 1 to 6 are updated by +1 (A2410). As a result, the RAM initialization switch 112
Each time is operated, the probability setting value in the probability setting value area is updated by one. After that, the probability setting change / confirmation process ends. A value corresponding to the probability setting value read from the probability setting value area (1 from the probability setting value is stored in the work setting value area (in the RAM 111c or the register) for storing the work setting value when the setting change mode is entered. The subtracted value) may be stored.

In the above description, each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, the probability setting value in the probability setting value area is directly updated corresponding to the update of the work setting value. However, the work setting value of the RAM 111c is updated. The probability setting value (work setting value) during setting change is stored in the area, and when the setting key switch 93 is turned off and the setting change work is completed (the result of A1036 is “Y”).
)), The value corresponding to the work setting value in the work setting value area may be stored in the probability setting value area for the first time. In this way, if a power outage occurs while changing the settings (A1037
It is possible to prevent a situation in which the probability setting value (probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area) used for game control, effect control, or the like is changed to an unintended value when the result is “Y”).

[Starting switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the starting opening switch monitoring process (A1312) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the starting opening switch monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first prepares a starting opening 1 winning award monitoring table that monitors winnings to the first starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2701), and acquires a hard random number as a big hit random number. Is executed (A2702). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a start mouth prize to the first start prize hole 36 (A2703). And if there is no starting mouth prize (A
When the result of 2703 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A2709.

The game control device 100, when there is a starting opening winning a prize to the first starting winning a prize opening 36 (A2703).
The result is "Y"), whether or not the probability of a big hit is a low-probability state and there is no time saving (a state without normal electric power support), that is, low probability of special map & no time saving (normal game) It is determined whether or not it is in the state (A2704). If the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is set in the special figure game mode flag area, it can be determined that the special figure low probability & no time saving is in progress (during a normal game state). When the probability is low and the time is not reduced (the result of A2704 is “Y”).
), That is, in the normal game state, the process proceeds to step A2707.

The game control device 100, when the probability of big hit occurrence is not in the low probability state (in the high probability state) or in the state with time saving (the state with universal communication support) (the result of A2704 is “N”), A right-handing instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A2705), and effect command setting processing is executed (A2706). As a result, the effect control device 300 displays the right-handing instruction display for instructing the right-handing as a warning when there is a starting mouth winning combination in the first starting winning opening 36 in the special figure high probability state or the time saving state. Can be displayed in. In the effect command setting process, the effect command is written in the serial transmission buffer, and the effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on hold by winning in the first starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2707), and executes special figure starting opening switch common processing (A2708). ).

Subsequently, the game control device 100, the normal variation winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting opening 2)
A starting mouth 2 winning award monitoring table for monitoring winning a prize is prepared (A2709), and a hard random number acquisition process for acquiring a hard random number as a big hit random number is executed (A2710). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a starting mouth prize to the normal variation winning device 37 (A2711). When there is no start opening prize (the result of A2711 is “N”), the start opening switch monitoring processing is ended.

The game control device 100, when there is a start opening winning a prize to the normal variation winning device 37 (A271)
The result of 1 is "Y"), and it is determined whether or not the normal variation winning device 37 is in operation (during normal power operation) (A2712). When the normal variable winning device 37 is not in operation (the result of A2712 is "
N ”), it is determined whether or not an illegality (universal telephone illegality) for the normal variation winning device 37 is occurring (A2713). If the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 is equal to or more than the fraudulent occurrence determination number (for example, 5 or more), it can be determined that the universal communication fraud is occurring. Ordinary variable winning device 37
If a fraud has occurred against the result (the result of A2713 is “Y”), the starting opening switch monitoring process is ended.

The game control device 100, if the fraud for the normal variation winning device 37 is not occurring (A2
The result of 713 is "N"), the table which sets the information of the withdrawal due to the winning in the normal variation winning device 37 (starting mouth 2) is prepared (A2714), and the special figure starting mouth switch common processing is executed (A).
2715), the start opening switch monitoring process is ended.

The game control device 100, when an irregularity is occurring in the normal variation winning device 37 (A2
If the result of 712 is “Y”), the process of step A2713 is not executed, and the processes of steps A2714 and A2715 are executed.

[Common processing for special drawing start switch]
Next, the special figure starting port switch common process (A270) in the starting port switch monitoring process described above.
8, A2715) will be described in detail. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure starting port switch common processing. Special process starting port switch common processing, starting port 1 switch 36
This is a process commonly performed for each input when there is an input to the switch a or the starting port 2 switch 37a.

The game control device 100 first outputs the information regarding the number of winnings to the start port switch to be monitored among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a to the management device outside the game machine 10. Is loaded (A2901), the loaded value is updated by +1 (A2902), and it is determined whether the output frequency overflows (A2903). If the output count does not overflow (result of A2903 is “N”),
Save the updated value in the starting port signal output count area of the RWM (A2904),
The processing moves to 2905. On the other hand, if the output count overflows (result of A2903 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A2905. In the present embodiment, a value from “0” to “255” can be stored in the starting port signal output frequency area. When the loaded value is "255", the value after updating becomes "0" by +1 update, and it is configured to determine that the output count overflows.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of special figure reservations (starting memory number) to be updated corresponding to the starting port switch to be monitored among the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit value. It is determined (A2905). When the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (the result of A2905 is "N"), the special figure starting port switch common processing ends. If the number of reserved special maps to be updated is less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is “Y”), the number of reserved special maps to be updated (the number of reserved special maps 1 or the number of reserved special maps 2) is updated by +1. Then, (A2906), the target starting opening winning flag is saved (A2907).

Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the starting mouth switch and the special figure reservation number to be monitored (A2908), and stores the jackpot random number prepared in step A2702 in the RWM jackpot random number. Save in the area (A2909). Next, the big hit symbol random number of the starting port switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (A2910), and saved in the big hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2911).

After that, the game control device 100 extracts and prepares a falling lottery random number for drawing a fall from a high-probability state with a special hit jackpot probability to a low-probability state (A2912), and stores the falling lottery random number with a falling lottery random number. Save in the area (A2913).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not a prize has been awarded to the normal variation winning device 37 (starting opening 2) (A2914). If the winning is not for the normal variable winning device 37 (the result of A2914 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A2917. On the other hand, when it is a winning in the starting winning opening 36 (the result of A2914 is “Y”), a small winning symbol random number is extracted and prepared (A
2915), save in the RWM small hit symbol random number storage area (A2916).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (A2917), and executes the special figure reservation information determination process (A2).
918). Then, a starter switch to be monitored and a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure reservation number are prepared as effect commands (A2919), and effect command setting processing (A292).
0) is executed, and the special figure starting port switch common processing is ended. The decoration special figure reservation number command is
With the opening 1 switch 36a, the decoration special figure 1 hold number command, and the opening 2 switch 37a
Then, it is the decoration special figure 2 hold number command.

The special figure reservation information determination process (A2918) is performed by the first start winning port 36 and the normal variation winning device 37.
It is executed for the special figures 1 and 2 starting memory generated based on the winning of the game ball to. In the special figure pending information determination process, prefetching for determining execution information (including stop symbol information) of the special figure variable display game before the special figure variable display game based on the special figures 1 and 2 starting memory is executed. The process (preliminary determination process) is executed. Further, in the special figure hold information determination process, the low-probability read-ahead stop command command (low probability) and / or the high-probability read-ahead stop command command (high) corresponding to the target opening switch and the determined stop pattern information. Probability) is prepared as an effect command, a look-ahead change pattern command corresponding to a change pattern number (determined) indicating a change mode of the special figure change display game is prepared as an effect command, and effect command setting processing is executed.
In the normal game state, as will be described later, the special figure 2 variable display game often changes for a long time (long variation) and is often forced to end with a deviation result. It is not necessary to execute the prefetch processing (preliminary determination processing).

In addition, production control device 300, when receiving both the read-ahead stop symbol command (low probability) and the read-ahead stop symbol command (high probability), if the jackpot probability at the time of reception is a low probability state, the read-ahead stop symbol Use the command (low probability) to execute look-ahead symbol-based command processing,
If the jackpot probability when received is a high probability state, the look-ahead stop symbol command (high probability) may be used to execute the look-ahead symbol type command processing.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM111c) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game balls into the starting winning area and the starting winning area of the normal variation winning device 37, and becomes the execution right of the variation display game. A starting storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit for the starting storage is provided. Also,
The starting memory means (game control device 100) stores various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting winning opening (starting winning opening 36) as a first starting memory with a predetermined number as an upper limit. , Various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting winning opening (ordinary variation winning device 37) are stored as a second starting memory with a predetermined number as an upper limit.

[Special Figure 1 Game Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 game process (A1313) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 game process.

The game control device 100 first of all, the special figure 1 showing that the special figure 1 variable display game is being suspended.
It is determined whether the game interruption flag is set (A3201).

When the special figure 1 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted is not set (result of A3201 is “N”), the game control device 100 is a big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game. It is determined whether or not it is in the state or in the small hit state (A3202). Toku-zu 2 In case of neither big hit state nor small hit state of variable display game (result of A3202 is "N"),
The special winning opening switch monitoring process is executed (A3203). In the special winning opening switch monitoring process,
The detection of a game ball is monitored by the lower special winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variation winning device 38 and the upper special winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variation winning device 39. Then, the specific area switch monitoring processing for monitoring the input from the specific area switch 72 is executed (A3204).

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0 (
1 is subtracted) (A3205). The Toku-zu 1 game processing timer is clocked for the interrupt period (4 msec) of the timer interrupt process by updating -1. The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0. When the big hit state or the small hit state of the special display 2 variable display game is in effect (the result of A3202 is "Y"), steps A3203 and A32
The processing of step A3205 is performed without performing the processing of 04. Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (A3206). When the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0 (result of A3206 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A3217.

The game control device 100, when the special processing 1 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3206 is “Y”), that is, when the time is up or has already been up, the special processing 1
The special figure 1 game sequence branch table that is referred to in order to branch to the process corresponding to the game process number is set in the register (A3207). Further, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game process number is acquired using the special figure 1 game sequence branch table (A3).
208). Subsequently, a subroutine call with the special figure 1 game process number is performed to execute a game branch process corresponding to the special figure 1 game process number (A3209).

If the game processing number is "0" in step A3209, the game control device 100,
Special figure 1 The variation start of the variable display game is monitored, and the variation start of the special figure 1 variation display game is set, the effect is set, and the information necessary for performing the processing during the variation of special figure 1 is set. (1) Execute normal processing (A3210). Details of the special process 1 normal process will be described later with reference to FIG. 89.

If the game process number is “1” in step A3209, the game control device 100:
The special figure 1 changing process for setting the stop display time of the special figure 1 and the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 displaying process is executed (A3211). Details of the processing during fluctuation of special figure 1 will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game process number is “2” in step A3209, the game control device 100:
Special Figure 1 If the game result of the variable display game is a big hit, set the big hit fanfare command according to the type of big hit, set the fanfare time according to the big winning opening pattern of each big hit, and process during the fanfare / interval The special figure 1 displaying process for setting the information necessary for the execution is executed (A3212).

In the special figure 1 display process, when the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, a hit design command corresponding to the big hit design is loaded from the hit design command area to prepare as a production command, and a big hit fanfare A command is prepared as a performance command, and performance command setting processing is executed. Then, the big hit fanfare time corresponding to the special winning opening opening information is set, and the big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area. Then, set "3" as the process number to shift to the fanfare / interval processing, save the special figure low probability & no time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area, and save it in the general figure game mode flag area. Save the no time saving flag. When the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is out of order, "0" is set as the process number of the special figure 1 normal process in order to shift to the special figure 1 normal process, and the special figure 1 game process number area is processed. Save the number.

If the game processing number is “3” in step A3209, the game control device 100,
The fanfare / interval processing is executed to set the opening time of the special winning opening, update the number of times of opening, and set the information necessary for performing the processing during opening of the special winning opening (A3213). Details of the fanfare / interval processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game processing number is "4" in step A3209, the game control device 100:
If the big hit round is not the final round, set the interval command while setting the ending command if it is the final round, and set the information necessary to perform the big winning opening remaining ball processing. Medium processing is executed (A3214).

If the game process number is “5” in step A3209, the game control device 100:
A special winning opening remaining ball process is executed to set an interval time and an ending time, and to set information necessary for performing a big hit ending process (A3215).

If the game process number is “6” in step A3209, the game control device 100:
The special figure 2 game wait time value (which will be described later) is set, and the special figure 1 jackpot end process is executed to set the information necessary to execute the special figure 1 normal process (A3216).

In the special figure 1 big hit end process, if the time reduction determination data (described later) set at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game is data without time saving, in order to shift to the normal game state after the big hit ends The big hit end setting process 1 is executed, and when the time reduction determination data is data with a time saving, the big hit end setting process 2 is executed to shift to the time saving state after the big hit ends. However, when there is specific area passage information indicating that the game ball has passed through the specific area 86 (V winning opening), the big hit end setting process 3 is performed in order to shift to the probability change state (probability change state) after the big hit ends. To execute. Further, in the special figure 1 big hit ending process, "0" is set as the process number in order to return to the special process 1 normal process, and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area.

In the case of the probability variation big hit which becomes the probability variation state after the big hit ends, in the predetermined number (for example, the first) big hit round, the specific region 86 is opened for a long time, and the specific region switch 72.
Reliably detects the passage of a game ball (V winning) to the specific area 86.

In the jackpot end setting process 1, the universal figure game mode no flag is saved in the universal figure game mode flag area, and the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area. The general / universal work time saving flag indicates that the general / universal work variation display game is not in the time-reducing variable state (time-saving state, universal communication support state). The special figure low probability & no time saving flag indicates that the probability of a big hit is low and not in a time saving state (universal power support state). After that, the game control device 100 clears the time reduction variation number region to zero.

In the big hit end setting process 2, the flag of the special figure time saving with the general figure game mode flag area is saved, and the low probability of special figure & time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area. The general / universal time saving flag indicates that the general / universal variable display game is in a time shortening variable state (time saving state, universal communication support state). The special figure low probability & time saving flag indicates that the probability of a big hit is low and is in a time saving state (universal power support state). Further, the game control device 100 saves an initial value (for example, 100) in the time reduction variation number area that stores the time reduction variation number.

In the big hit end setting process 3, the special figure high probability & time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area. The special figure high probability & time saving flag indicates that the probability of a big hit is high and is in a short time state (here, a time reduction change of the special figure change display game is executed).

When the processing based on the special figure 1 game process number is finished, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 variation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 (A3217), and then displays the special figure 1 The symbol variation control processing relating to the container 51 is executed (A3218), and the lever solenoid 86
A lever solenoid control process for controlling b is executed (A3219), and the special figure 1 game process ends.

On the other hand, when the special figure 1 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted is set (the result of A3201 is “Y”), the game control device 100 proceeds to step A32.
02 to A3216 without performing the processing of A3216, the special figure 1 for controlling the fluctuation of the indicator 51
After preparing the fluctuation control table (A3217), the symbol fluctuation control process relating to the special figure 1 display 51 is executed (A3218), and the lever solenoid control process for controlling the lever solenoid 86b is executed (A3219). The game process ends. In this way, when the special figure 1 variable display game is suspended, the time measurement (update) of the variable time timer (special figure 1 game processing timer) for measuring the variable time is stopped. By the symbol variation control process, the variation of the special symbol may be apparently continued on the special figure 1 display 51.

[Special Figure 2 game processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 game process (A1314) in the timer interrupt process will be described. 88A and 88B are flowcharts showing the first half and the second half of the special figure 2 game process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is in the big hit state (A3301). When the big hit state of the special figure 1 variable display game is not in progress (the result of A3301 is "N"), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is executed (A3302). In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, the game balls are played with the lower special winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variation winning device 38 and the upper special winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variation winning device 39. Monitor the detection. Then, the specific area switch monitoring process for monitoring the input from the specific area switch 72 is executed (A3303).

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (
Only 1 is subtracted) (A3304). The Toku-zu 2 game processing timer is clocked for the interrupt period (4 msec) of the timer interrupt process by updating -1. The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0.

When the game control device 100 is in the big hit state of the special figure 1 variable display game (A3301)
Result of “Y”), the process of steps A3302 and A3303 is not performed, and step A33
The processing of 04 is performed.

Next, it is determined whether the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (A3305). If the special processing 2 game processing timer is not 0 (result of A3305 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A3323.

When the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3305 is "Y"), that is, when the game control device 100 has timed up or has already timed up, the special figure 2
It is determined whether the number of times the game processing timer is repeated is 0 (A3306). If the number of repetitions of the special processing 2 game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A3306 is "N"),
The number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (A3307), and the long variation timer value (for example, 60000 msec (60 seconds)) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (
A3308). As will be described later, when the special figure 2 variable display game has a long variation and the variation time is a long time (for example, 10 minutes), the variation time timer cannot be set with 2 bytes, so steps A3306-A3308. The timer value for long fluctuation is counted by the number of times by the processing of 1, and a timer with a long fluctuation time for the special figure 2 variable display game is prepared.

The game control device 100, when the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (result of A3305 is "Y") and the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (result of A3306 is "Y"). The special figure 2 game sequence branch table to be referred to in order to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is set in the register (A3309). Further, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is acquired using the special figure 2 game sequence branch table (A3310). Subsequently, a subroutine call with the special figure 2 game process number is performed to execute a game branch process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number (A3311).

If the game processing number is “0” in step A3311, the gaming control device 100,
Special figure 2 The special figure that monitors the fluctuation start of the variable display game and sets the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 variable display game, the setting of the effect, and the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 changing process. 2 Perform normal processing (A3312). Details of the special figure 2 normal process will be described later with reference to FIG. 90.

If the game process number is “1” in step A3311, the game control device 100,
The special figure 2 changing process for setting the stop display time of the special figure 2 and the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 displaying process is executed (A3313). Details of the special figure 2 changing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 103.

If the game process number is “2” in step A3311, the game control device 100,
Special Figure 2 If the game result of the variable display game is a big hit, set the big hit fanfare command according to the type of big hit, set the fanfare time according to the big winning opening pattern of each big hit, and process during the fanfare / interval. The special figure 2 displaying process for setting the information necessary for the execution is executed (A3314).

In the special figure 2 displaying process, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, a big symbol command corresponding to the big hit symbol is loaded from the hit symbol command area to prepare as a production command, and a big hit fanfare A command is prepared as a performance command, and performance command setting processing is executed. Then, the big hit fanfare time corresponding to the big winning opening opening information is set, and the big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area. Then, “3” is set as the process number in order to shift to the fanfare / during-interval process.

In addition, in the special figure 2 display processing, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit, a hit symbol command corresponding to the small hit symbol is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared as an effect command, A small hit fanfare command is prepared as a performance command, and performance command setting processing is executed. Then, "7" is set as the processing number to shift to the small hit fanfare processing, the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area, and the small hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area. To do.

In the special figure 2 displaying process, if the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is out of order, "0" is set as the process number of the special figure 2 normal process in order to shift to the special figure 2 normal process. , Special map 2
Save the process number in the game process number area.

If the game process number is “3” in step A3311, the game control device 100,
The fanfare / interval processing for setting the opening time of the special winning opening, updating the number of times of opening, and setting the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the special winning opening is executed (A3315). The fanfare / interval processing is common to the processing executed in the special figure 1 game processing, and details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. 39.

If the game processing number is “4” in step A3311, the gaming control device 100,
If the big hit round is not the final round, set the interval command while setting the ending command if it is the final round, and set the information necessary to perform the big winning opening remaining ball processing. Medium processing is executed (A3316).

If the game process number is “5” in step A3311, the game control device 100,
A special winning opening remaining ball process is executed to set the interval time and ending time, and to set the information necessary to perform the big hit ending process (A3317).

If the game process number is “6” in step A3311, the game control device 100,
Special figure 2 The special figure 2 big hit ending processing which sets the information and the like which is necessary in order to execute processing is executed (A3318). In addition, the special figure 2 big hit ending process is "special figure 1 big hit ending process"
Is replaced with "Special figure 2".

If the game processing number is “7” in step A3311, the gaming control device 100,
The small hit fanfare middle processing is executed to set the opening time of the special winning opening, update the number of times of opening, and set the information necessary for performing the small hit processing (A3319). In the small hitting fanfare processing, the processing number "8" is saved in the special drawing 2 game processing number area, and the small hit opening time (for example, 1600 msec) is set as the opening time of the lower special winning opening. Save to.

If the game process number is “8” in step A3311, the game control device 100,
Processing for setting a small hit end command, processing for setting small information for performing small hit remaining ball processing, and the like are executed (A3320).

If the game processing number is “9” in step A3311, the game control device 100,
A small hit remaining ball process for setting the ending time and the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 small hit end process is executed (A3321).

When the game process number is “10” in step A3311, the game control device 100 executes a special figure 2 small hit end process for setting information necessary for executing the special figure 2 normal process. (A3322). In addition, in the special figure 2 small hit end process, in addition to setting "0" as the process number to return to the special figure 2 normal process, when the special figure 1 variable display game is suspended, the decoration special figure 1 restart command Is prepared as a production command, and production command setting processing is executed. In the special figure 2 small hit end processing, the flags in the normal figure game mode flag area and the special figure game mode flag area are maintained, and the probability state does not change due to the occurrence of the small hit.

When the processing based on the special figure 2 game process number is finished, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display device 52 (A3323), and then displays the special figure 2 The symbol variation control processing relating to the container 52 is executed (A3324), and the lever solenoid 86
A lever solenoid control process for controlling b is executed (A3325), and the special figure 2 game process is ended.

[Special Figure 1 Normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 normal process (A3210) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 89 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the normal process of special figure 1.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game can start changing (A3401). If the special display 1 variable display game cannot start changing (if the change cannot start) (the result of A3401 is "N"), the special processing 1 game processing number "0" is set as the special processing 1 game processing number. (A3416), save in the special figure 1 game processing number area of RWM (A3417). In addition, here, from the end of fluctuation of the big hit in the special figure 2 variable display game (during the process of displaying the special figure 2) to the end of the big hit operation (end processing of the special figure 2 big hit), and in the special figure 2 variable display game. From the end of the variation of the small hit (during the processing during the display of special figure 2) to the end of the small hit operation (the processing of ending the small figure 2 small hit), it is considered that the variation display game of the special figure 1 cannot be started.

The game control device 100, when the special figure 1 variable display game can start changing (A3401)
The result is “Y”), and it is determined whether the left-handing instruction has been informed (A3402). If the left-handing instruction notification command has already been prepared as an effect command and transmitted to the effect control device 300, it can be determined that the left-handing instruction notification has been completed. If the left-handed instruction has been notified (A34
If the result of 02 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A3406.

When the left-handing instruction notification is not completed based on the left-handing instruction notification flag (result of A3402 is “N”), the game control device 100 prepares a left-handing instruction notification command as an effect command (A3403), and effect command setting processing. Is executed (A3404), and a left-handing instruction notification flag indicating that the left-handing instruction is informed (displayed) on the display device 41 or the like is set (A340).
5).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (A3406).
. When the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (the result of A3406 is “Y”), the special figure 1 normal process number “0” is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area of the RWM (A3402). As a result, the special figure 1 normal process is repeated until the number of special figure 1 reservations becomes 1 or more.

Game control device 100, when the special figure 1 reservation number is not 0 (result of A3406 is "N"),
A variation start probability information command corresponding to the presence or absence of the current probability state (low probability state or high probability state) or the time saving state is prepared as an effect command (A3407), and effect command setting processing is executed (A3408). Then, the special figure 1 variation start process for starting the special figure 1 variation display game is executed (A3409). Then, a decoration special figure reservation number command (decoration special figure 1 reservation number command) corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number is prepared as an effect command (A3410), and effect command setting processing is executed (A3411).

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a remaining game number command corresponding to the number of time-reduced fluctuations, which is the number of remaining special figure variation display games in the time saving state, as an effect command (A34).
12), the effect command setting process is executed (A3413). The effect control device 300 that has received the remaining game number command can grasp the number of times of time reduction fluctuation.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the information during the change of the special figure 1 in the special figure status area in the RWM (information addition) (A3414). Here, in the special figure status area, information indicating that the special figure 1 is changing or ((special figure 1 changing + special figure 2 changing) is set. Next, a special figure 1 changing process shift setting process, which is a process for shifting to the special figure 1 changing process, is executed (
A3415). In the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process, for example, the process number “1” is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area.

[Special figure 2 daily processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 normal process (A3312) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special process 2 ordinary process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game can start changing (A3501). If the special display 2 variable display game cannot start changing (if it cannot start changing) (the result of A3501 is “N”), the special processing 2 normal processing number “0” is set as the special processing 2 game processing number. (A3518), save in the special figure 2 game processing number area of RWM (A3519). Here, from the end of the fluctuation of the big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game (during the processing of displaying the special figure 1) to the end of the big hit operation (the special figure 1 big hit end processing), the change of the special figure 2 variable display game It is said that it cannot be started.

The game control device 100, when the special figure 2 variable display game can start changing (A3501)
The result is “Y”), and it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 reservation number is 0 (A3502). Special figure 2 When the number of reservations is not 0 (the result of A3502 is "N"), the variation start probability information command corresponding to the presence or absence of the current probability state (low probability state or high probability state) or time saving state is prepared as a production command. (A3503), effect command setting processing is executed (A3504). Then, special figure 2
Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing for starting the fluctuation display game is executed (A3505).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a decoration special figure reservation number command (decoration special figure 2 reservation number command) corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number as a production command (A3506), and executes production command setting processing ( A3507). After that, the game control device 100 prepares a remaining game number command corresponding to the number of time-reduced fluctuations, which is the number of remaining special figure variation display games in the time saving state, as a production command (A3508), and executes production command setting processing. Yes (A3509
). The effect control device 300 that has received the remaining game number command can grasp the number of times of time reduction fluctuation.

Next, the game control device 100 sets information during fluctuation of special figure 2 in the special figure status area in the RWM (information addition) (A3510). Here, in the special figure status area, information indicating that the special figure 2 is changing or (special figure 1 changing + special figure 2 changing) is set. Next, the special figure 2 changing process shift setting process, which is a process for shifting to the special figure 2 changing process, is executed (
A3511). In the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process, for example, the process number “1” is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area.

If the special figure 2 reservation number is 0 (the result of A3502 is “Y”), the game control device 100,
It is determined whether or not the number of special figure 1 reservations is 0 (A3512). Special Figure 1 When the number of reservations is 0 (
The result of A3512 is “Y”), and it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is changing (the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed) (A3513). When Toku-zu 1 is not changing (result of A3513 is "N")
), It is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has started (A3514). If the customer waiting demo has not started (the result of A3514 is "N"), the customer waiting demo flag is set (A3515).
.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state as an effect command (A3516), and executes an effect command setting process (A3517).
The production control device 300 that has received the customer waiting demo command can execute the customer waiting demo on the display device 41. After that, the special figure 2 normal processing number “0” is set as the special figure 2 game processing number (A
3518), and save it in the special figure 2 game processing number area of the RWM (A3519). As a result, the special figure 2 normal process is repeated until the number of special figure 2 reservations becomes 1.

On the other hand, when the special figure 1 hold number is not 0 (the result of A3512 is “N”), the special figure 1 variable display game is executed, and therefore the special figure 2 is not prepared and the special figure 2 As the game process number, the special process number “0” of special figure 2 normal process is set (A3518), and the special process number 2 game process number area of the RWM is saved (A3519). In addition, when Toku-zu 1 is changing (A35
13 result is "Y"), or when the customer waiting demonstration has started (A3514 result is "Y").
)), The special figure 2 normal processing number “0” is set as the special figure 2 game processing number without preparing a customer waiting demo command (A3518), and the special figure 2 game processing number area of the RWM is set. Save (A3519).

[Special map 1 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 variation start process (A3409) in the special figure 1 normal process will be described. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 variation start process.

The game control device 100 first sets a special figure 1 information setting flag (A3601a).
The special figure 1 information setting flag is used for setting variation information (including distribution of prefetch variation patterns). Next, a random number is loaded from the special figure 1 falling lottery random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (A3602a), and the special figure 1 falling lottery random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (A3603a). Then, the falling lottery process described later is executed (A3604a). The reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure starting storage with the earliest digestion order (here, the earliest in special figure 1).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a big hit flag 1 setting process for setting deviation information and big hit information in the big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (
A3605a), special figure 1 stop design (design information) related to the setting of special figure 1 stop design (symbol information) (A
3606a), a special figure 1 information setting process (A3607a) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is executed.

In the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (A3606a), when the big hit flag 1 is a big hit, the stop symbol number corresponding to the big hit symbol random number is acquired, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, and the time reduction determination data. , Round number upper limit value information, and big winning opening opening information is acquired and saved, while the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit, the missed stop symbol pattern is saved in the stopped symbol pattern area. After that, the decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop design pattern is prepared as an effect command, and the effect command setting process is executed. The type of big hit corresponding to the big hit stop symbol number is, for example, 16R certainty variation big hit, 2R certainty variation big hit, 1
6R There is usually a big hit (time saving 100 times).

The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol indicator (here, the special symbol 1 indicator 51) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. The time reduction determination data includes information on the presence / absence of a time saving state (with or without time saving) after the end of the big hit, and is used in the special figure 1 big hit ending process and the special figure 2 big hit ending process. Round number upper limit value information and big winning opening information
This is for setting the execution mode of the special game state.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is set (A3608a). ). Next, a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (A3609a) for setting a fluctuation pattern that is a fluctuation mode in the special figure 1 variable display game, and a fluctuation start information setting process (A3609a) for setting fluctuation start information of the special figure 1 variable display game ( A3610a) is executed. Then, a time-reduced variation count updating process for updating the time-reduction variation count is executed (A3).
611a).

In the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process, by using the latter half fluctuation group table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 loaded from the fluctuation pattern random number 1 storage area (for the number of holding 1) of the special figure 1 is used. Based on this, the distribution process is executed to prepare the second half variation selection table. Next, by using the latter half fluctuation selection table, the fluctuation pattern random number 2 storage area of the special figure 1 (the number of holding 1
The distribution process is executed based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2 loaded from (for use)) to acquire the latter half fluctuation number and save it in the latter half fluctuation number area. Further, the first half variation selection table corresponding to the table selection pointer calculated based on the variation distribution information 1 and the second half variation number is prepared. Furthermore, the distribution process based on the variation pattern random number 3 loaded from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of holding 1) of special figure 1 is executed to obtain the first half variation number and save it in the first half variation number area.

In the time reduction fluctuation count update process, the time is shortened when the special map low probability & time saving flag is set in the special map game mode flag area and it is during special time saving The number of fluctuations is updated by -1 (only 1 is subtracted). The initial value of the number of times of shortening time reduction is the number of times that the time saving state is maintained after the big hit ends, and is set to 100 times, for example. Further, even when the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game starts to change, the time shortening change count is updated by -1. When the number of time shortening fluctuations becomes 0, the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area, and the general figure no time saving flag is saved in the general figure game mode flag area. If the number of shortened fluctuations does not become 0, nothing is done.

Next, the game control device 100, as the process number, shifts to “1
Is set (A3612a), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A3).
613a). Subsequently, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (A3614a), and the signal related to the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 (ON data of the special symbol 1 changing signal) is saved in the test signal output data area (A3615a).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the changing flag in the special figure 1 change control flag area (A3616a). Then, the initial value (for example, 100 msec) of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking period of the special figure 1 display 51) is saved in the special figure 1 blink control timer area (A3617).
a), the initial value of the changing symbol number (for example, 0 indicating a non-illuminated symbol) is saved in the changing symbol number region of the special figure 1 (A3618a), and the special figure 1 changing start process is ended.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 variation start process (A3505) in the special figure 2 normal process will be described. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 variation start process.

The special figure 2 variation start process is a variation of the special figure 1 variation start process (Fig. 91) in which "big hit flag 1" is replaced with "big hit flag 2" and "special figure 1" is replaced with "special figure 2". Since a process similar to the Toku-zu 1 variation start process is performed, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that steps A3601b-A3618b in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process correspond to steps A3601a-A3618a in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, respectively.

In the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (A3606b), when the big hit flag 2 is a big hit, the stop symbol number corresponding to the big hit symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, the time is shortened. Judgment data, round number upper limit value information, and big winning opening opening information is acquired and saved, while big hit flag 2 is a small hit, a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved. If the big hit flag 2 is out, the out-of-stop pattern pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area. After that, the decoration special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared as an effect command, and the effect command setting process is executed.

[Falling lottery processing]
Next, the falling lottery process (A3604) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing
a, A3604b) will be described in detail. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the falling lottery process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the jackpot occurrence probability is in a high-probability state (probability variation state), that is, whether or not it is in the special figure high probability (A3701). When it is not within the special figure high probability (the result of A3701 is “N”), the falling lottery process is ended.

When the special figure high probability is in effect (the result of A3701 is “Y”), the game control device 100 has the value of the falling lottery random number of the target (special figure 1 or special figure 2) is less than the falling lottery lower limit determination value. It is determined whether or not (A3702). When it is less than the lower limit value of the falling lottery (the result of A3702 is "Y
)), And ends the falling lottery process. When it is equal to or more than the falling lottery lower limit determination value (the result of A3702 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the value of the target falling lottery random number is larger than the falling lottery upper limit determination value (A3703). When it is larger than the upper limit value of the falling lottery (the result of A3703 is “Y”)
Then, the falling lottery process ends.

The game control device 100, when the falling lottery upper limit determination value or less (the result of A3703 is "N")
), Because the value of the target falling lottery random number becomes a value between the falling lottery upper limit judgment value and the falling lottery lower limit judgment value, the processing at the time of winning the falling lottery is started, and first, the signal regarding the high probability end of RWM is given. The data is saved in the external information output data area (A3704). Here, the signal for the high probability end is
There are two big hits of off data (off signal) and four big hits of off data (off signal). As a result, a signal related to the high probability end is output as external information to the external information terminal 71 and eventually to an external device (such as a hall computer).

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the end of high probability and shortening of time in the test signal output data area (A3705). High probability & signal regarding the end of time saving, for example, special symbol 1 high probability state signal off data, special symbol 2 high probability state signal off data, special symbol 1
The off-data of the variation time shortening state signal, the special symbol 2 off-data of the variation time shortening state signal.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the signal regarding the left-handed instruction in the test signal output data area (A3706). Then, the number without saving time is saved in the game state display number area of the RWM (A3707). The special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area of the RWM (A3708), and the falling lottery process is ended. The special figure low probability & no time saving flag indicates that the probability of a big hit is low and there is no time saving state (normal game state).

As described above, in the probability variation state (with a high probability of special map), the falling lottery is executed at the start of each special map variation display game, and when the falling lottery is won, the probability variation state (high probability state) is changed to the normal game state (low probability). Falling processing (A3704-A3708) of falling to the stochastic state is executed.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process (A3605a) in the special figure 1 variation start process will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit flag 1 setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves the deviation information in the jackpot flag 1 area of the RWM (A3801). Subsequently, a big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for the number of holding 1) of the RWM, and is prepared (A3802). The reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure starting storage with the earliest digestion order (here, the earliest in special figure 1). After that, the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for 1 hold number) is cleared to 0 (A3803).
.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit, that is, whether big hit information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (A3804). Jackpot flag 2
Is not a jackpot (result of A3804 is "N"), based on the obtained jackpot random value,
Special figure 1 The big hit decision processing which decides whether or not the variable display game is the big hit is executed (A38
05), it is determined whether or not the result of the determination is a big hit (A3806). When the result of the determination is a big hit (the result of A3806 is “Y”), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area where the deviation information is saved in step A3801 (A3807), and the big hit flag 1 setting process is executed. finish. The big hit flag 1 can be a big hit only when the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (the big hit information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area), so that the big hit flag 1 and the big hit flag 2 are prevented from being a big hit at the same time. ..

The game control device 100, when the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (the result of A3804 is "Y
)) Or if the determination result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A3806 is “N”), the big hit flag 1 setting process is ended.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, details of the big hit flag 2 setting process (A3605b) in the special figure 2 variation start process will be described. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit flag 2 setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves the deviation information in the small hit flag 2 area of the RWM (
A3901), the deviation information is saved in the jackpot flag 2 area of the RWM (A3902).
Next, load the big hit random number from the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for the number of holding 1) of RWM,
Prepare (A3903). The reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special figure starting storage in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2). Then, the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for the number of holding 1) is cleared to 0 (A3904).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit, that is, whether the big hit information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (A3905). Jackpot flag 1
Is not a big hit (the result of A3905 is "N"), based on the obtained big hit random number value,
Special figure 2 The big hit decision processing which decides whether or not the variable display game is the big hit is executed (A39
06), it is determined whether or not the result of the determination is a big hit (A3907). If the result of the determination is a big hit (the result of A3907 is "Y"), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 2 area where the deviation information is saved at step A3902 (A3908), and the big hit flag 2 setting process is executed. finish. The big hit flag 2 can be a big hit only when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (the big hit information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area), so that it is possible to prevent the big hit flag 1 and the big hit flag 2 from being big hits at the same time. ..

The game control device 100, when the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (the result of A3905 is "Y
)) Or if the determination result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A3907 is “N”), whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit based on the obtained big hit random number value. A small hit determination process for determining whether or not is executed (A3909), and it is determined whether or not the result of the determination is a small hit (A3910). In this embodiment, the big hit random number value is also used for the small hit judgment (in other words, the same random number value is used for the small hit judgment and the big hit judgment). Special figure 2
When the variable display game is a small hit (the result of A3910 is “Y”), step A3901
The small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag 2 area where the deviation information is saved (A
3911) and ends the jackpot flag 2 setting process. When the special display 2 variable display game is not a small hit (the result of A3910 is "N"), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated without saving the small hit information in the small hit flag 2 area.

[Big hit determination processing]
Next, the jackpot determination processing (such as jackpot flag 1 setting processing and jackpot flag 2 setting processing)
Details of (A3805, A3906) will be described. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process. The big hit determination process is a process common to the big hit determination processes in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process.

The game control device 100 first sets a lower limit judgment value of the big hit judgment value (A4001), and judges whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A4002). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value, and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value. , Determined to be a big hit.

The game control device 100, when the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A400
The result of No. 2 is “Y”), a deviation (other than the big hit) is set as the judgment result (A4007), and the big hit judgment process ends.

Further, the game control device 100, if the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (A4
The result of 002 is “N”), and it is determined whether or not there is a special figure high probability (A4003). If it is in the high probability of special figure (the result of A4003 is “Y”), the upper limit determination value in the high probability corresponding to the probability setting value is set (A4004). On the other hand, if the special map high probability is not in progress (A
The result of 4003 is “N”), and the upper limit judgment value in the low probability corresponding to the probability setting value is set (A
4005).

After setting the upper limit determination value of the value of the big hit random number, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (A4006). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A4006 is “Y”), a deviation (other than the big hit) is set as the judgment result (A4007). On the other hand, if the value of the big hit random number is not greater than the upper limit judgment value (
The result of A4006 is "N"), and a big hit is set as the determination result (A4008). When the determination result is set, the jackpot determination process ends.

[Small hit judgment processing]
Next, details of the small hit determination process (A3909) in the big hit flag 2 setting process and the like will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit determination process. The small hit determination process is common to the small hit determination processes in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (A4101). The small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a series of multiple values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the small hit lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the upper limit of the small hit judgment value, which is the upper limit value. When it is less than or equal to the determination value, it is determined to be a small hit.

As a matter of course, the range of the small hit judgment value (between the small hit lower limit judgment value and the small hit upper limit judgment value) should be the same as the above big hit judgment in order to avoid that the same special figure variable display game result is a small hit and a big hit. It does not overlap with the range of values (between the lower judgment value and the upper judgment value). In the present embodiment,
The small hit random number is not provided independently, but the big hit random number is also used for the small hit determination, but it is also possible to provide an original small hit random number.

Game control device 100, when the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (A
The result of 4101 is “Y”), a deviation is set as the determination result (A4103), and the small hit determination process ends.

When the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (the result of A4101 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value. Is determined (A4102). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (A
The result of 4102 is “Y”), and the deviation is set as the determination result (A4103). On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (the result of A4102 is “N”), the small hit is set as the determination result (A4104). When the determination result is set, the small hit determination process ends.

[Big hit probability, Small hit probability, Fall probability]
98 (a) (b) (c) is a special figure variation display game determined as a result of the above-described large hit determination process (FIG. 96), small hit determination process (FIG. 97) and falling lottery process (FIG. 93). It is a table which illustrates the big hit probability, the small hit probability, and the falling probability of.

In the example of FIG. 98 (a), the jackpot probability (high-probability state) in the high-probability state is the probability setting value 1 to
It is the same regardless of 6 (settings 1 to 6). On the other hand, jackpot probability in low probability state (low probability state)
Tends to increase as the probability setting value increases (becomes higher setting), and the larger the probability setting value, the easier it is for a big hit to occur, which is advantageous to the player. As described above, only one of the big hit probability in the low-probability state and the big hit probability in the high-probability state may be configured to increase as the probability setting value increases. The jackpot probability is obtained by dividing the difference between the upper limit determination value and the lower limit determination value in FIG. 96 by the range of the jackpot random number value. The big hit probability can be changed according to the probability setting value by changing the lower limit judgment value or the range of the value of the big hit random number in accordance with the probability setting value, in addition to the upper limit judgment value.

Also, with setting 1 and setting 2, setting 3 and setting 4, or setting 5 and setting 6, the jackpot probability (
The high-probability state) and the jackpot probability (low-probability state) are the same. Note that the jackpot probability may be different for all settings. Moreover, even if the jackpot probability is the same, the effect control device 300 can execute the effect according to each probability setting value (variable effect setting process described later).

In the example of FIG. 98 (b), the small hit probability is constant regardless of whether it is in the high-probability state or the low-probability state, or regardless of the probability setting value (setting). The small hit probability is the difference between the small hit upper limit judgment value and the small hit lower limit judgment value of FIG. 97 divided by the range of the value of the big hit random number. As shown in FIG. 87, a small hit does not occur in the special figure 1 variable display game (the small hit probability is zero). It is also possible to have a configuration in which a small hit occurs in the special figure 1 variable display game. In the low probability state, the small hit probability may be lower than in the high probability state.

In the example of FIG. 98 (c), the falling probability as the winning probability of the falling lottery is the probability setting value (setting).
It is constant (1/237) regardless of whether it is a high probability state or a low probability state, and whether it is a special figure 1 variable display game or a special figure 2 variable display game. is there. The falling probability is the difference between the falling lottery upper limit determination value and the falling lottery lower limit determination value of FIG. 93 divided by the range of the falling lottery random number value.

[Special map 1 information setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 1 information setting process (A3607a) in the special figure 1 variation start process will be described. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 information setting process.

The game control device 100 first sets a fluctuation pattern selection information table (A4401).
). Then, the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of the special figure 1 are acquired (A4402).

Here, the first-half offset data (fluctuation distribution information 1) is a table pointer for allocating the first-half fluctuations, and the second-half offset data (variation distribution information 2) is a table pointer for allocating the second-half fluctuations. The first half change is the change mode before the start of reach,
The second-half variation is a variation mode after the reach state is reached and corresponds to the type of reach (including normal reach, special reach, etc., including no reach).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (A4403), and when the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A4403 is "N"). ), The value is converted by adding the special figure 1 reserved number to the first half offset data in order to distribute the first half variation according to the special figure 1 reserved number (A4404). Then, the process proceeds to step A4405.

The game control device 100, when the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (A4403)
Result is “Y”), the process of step A4404 is not performed, the first half offset data acquired in step A4402 is not updated or converted, and the process proceeds to step A4405.

Then, the game control device 100 saves the first half offset data (variable distribution information 1) in the variable distribution information 1 area of the RWM (A4405), and the second half offset data (variable distribution information 2).
) Is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area of the RWM (A4406), and the special figure 1 information setting process ends.

[Special map 2 information setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 2 information setting process (A3607b) in the special figure 2 variation start process will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 information setting process.

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability of a big hit is in a low probability state and is in a state without time saving (a state without normal electric power support), that is, a special figure low probability & no time saving (normal game). It is determined whether or not it is in the state (A4501). Special map low probability & no time saving (A
When the result of 4501 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A4505.

If the game control device 100 is not in the special figure low probability & no time saving (the result of A4501 is "N
That is, in the case of the time saving state or the probability changing state, it is determined whether or not the special figure variation display game to be started is the time reduction final variation (A4502). The time reduction final variation is a final (eg, 100th) special figure variation display game in a time-saving state. When the special figure variation display game to be started from now is the time variation final variation (result of A4502 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A4506.

The game control device 100 sets the variation pattern selection information table when the special figure variation display game to be started is not the time reduction final variation (result of A4502 is “N”) (A
4503). Then, the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of the special figure 2 are acquired (A4504). As described above, the first-half offset data (fluctuation distribution information 1) is a table pointer for allocating the first-half fluctuation, and the second-half offset data (variation distribution information 2) is a table pointer for allocating the second-half fluctuation. ..

On the other hand, when the special map low probability & no time saving is in progress (the result of A4501 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure fluctuation display game to be started is a high probability final fluctuation. (A4505). Here, the high-probability final fluctuation is a special figure fluctuation display game when the winning lottery (FIG. 93) is won and the probability change state (high-probability state) is changed to the normal game state (low-probability state).

The game control device 100, when the special figure variation display game to be started is a high-probability final variation (result of A4505 is “Y”) or when it is a time reduction final variation (A450).
The result of No. 2 is “Y”), and in order to secure the time for notifying that it is the final fluctuation, the first half offset data and the latter half offset data for the final fluctuation are set (A4506), and the process proceeds to step A4511. ..

When the special figure variation display game to be started is not a high-probability final variation (result of A4505 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit ( A4507). Special Figure 2 If the result of the variable display game is not a big hit (A450
If the result of No. 7 is "N"), the first half offset data for deviation / small hit of Special Figure 2 at low probability is set (A4508), and the process proceeds to step A4510. When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (result of A4507 is "Y"), the first half offset data for big hit of special figure 2 at a low probability is set (A4509). Subsequently, the latter half offset data for long-term fluctuation of the special figure 2 variable display game is set (A4510). As a result, in the normal game state, the special figure 2 variable display game is changed for a long time (long change).

In the probability variation state (high probability state of special figure), since the second half offset data for long-time variation of the special figure 2 variable display game is not set, the special figure 2 variable display game does not normally change (long change). Short fluctuation compared to). As a result, in the probability change state (special probability high probability state),
The variable display game causes a small hit rush (RUSH) state in which a small hit frequently occurs. Since the probability state does not change in small hits, the small hit rush state where small hits frequently occur is
It continues from the start of the probability changing state to the occurrence of the big hit state (until the result of the special figure variation display game becomes the big hit result). It is also possible to adopt a configuration that enables a small hit rush state even in a time saving state.

After step A4504, A4506 or A4510, the game control device 100 saves the first half offset data (variable allocation information 1) in the variable allocation information 1 area of the RWM (A451
1), the latter half offset data (variable distribution information 2) is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area of the RWM (A4512), and the special figure 2 information setting process ends.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the fluctuation start information setting processing (A3 in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing
610a, A3610b) will be described in detail. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fluctuation start information setting process.

The game control device 100 first clears the random number storage area (for the reserved ball 1) of the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 of the used special map 1 (A5001).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the first half fluctuation time value table (A5002) and acquires the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number (A5003). Furthermore, the latter half fluctuation time value table is set (A5004), and the latter half fluctuation time value corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number is acquired (
A5005).

Then, the game control device 100 adds the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value (A500
6), the added value is saved in the target special figure game processing timer area (A5007). continue,
It is determined whether or not information is being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (A5008). Toku-zu 1 If information regarding the variable display game is not being set (result of A5008 is “N”), toku-zu 2
Since information is being set regarding the variable display game, it is determined whether or not to start the long variation (long-term variation) of the special figure 2 variable display game (A5009).

When the game control device 100 does not start the long fluctuation of the special figure 2 variable display game (A5009)
Result is "N"), 0 is saved in the repeat count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (A50).
10) When the long fluctuation of the special figure 2 variable display game is started (the result of A5009 is “Y”),
Special Figure 2 9 is saved in the repeat count area of the game processing timer (A5011). In the long variation of the special figure 2 variation display game, the variation time (for example, 10 minutes) that is not sufficient for the 2-byte timer is varied, so that the predetermined repetition number (here, 9) of the special figure 2 game processing timer is the number of repetitions. Set to area. In a timer interrupt process with an interrupt cycle of 4 msec (millisecond), a 2-byte timer can set up to about 262 seconds. The long variation of the special figure 2 variation display game is executed in the normal gaming state.

For example, by saving the above added value to the special figure game processing timer area, 60000 ms
When the timer of ec (60 seconds) is set and the number of times of repeating 9 times is saved,
The timer is subtracted in the timer interrupt process (particularly, the special figure 2 game process (FIG. 88)) (A3
304), when the time is up (the result of A3305 is “Y”), the number of repetitions is decremented by 1 (A3307), and the game processing timer is set again to the long fluctuation timer value of 60000 ms (60 seconds) (A3308). ). As a result, a long-varying special figure 2 variable display game,
It is possible to set a long fluctuation time of 60000 msec + (60000 msec × 9) = 10 minutes.

The variation time of the special figure 1 variable display game and the variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game when it is not a long variation (repetition count = 0) are the first half variation saved in the special figure game processing timer area in step A5007. It is the sum of the time value and the latter half fluctuation time value.

When the game control device 100 is in the process of setting information regarding the special figure 1 variable display game (A50
The result of step 08 is “Y”), and the step A5012
Move to.

After the steps A5008, A5010, A5011, the game control device 100 prepares a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number (A5012) and a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number (A5013). .. Then, the effect command setting process for transmitting the variation command as the effect command is executed (A5014).

Next, the game control device 100 updates the target special figure reservation number (special figure 1 reserved number or special figure 2 reserved number) of the target special figure variation display game by -1 (A5015), and the target special figure variation. The contents of the random number storage area relating to the display game are shifted (A5016), and the empty area after the shift is cleared (
A5017). Then, the fluctuation start information setting process ends.

By the above processing, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is,
The game control device 100 serves as a determination unit that determines various random number values stored in the start storage unit (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 constitutes a fluctuation pattern determination means capable of determining the fluctuation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variable display game, based on the determination information stored in the starting memory.

Then, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. Set the detailed effect contents in the decoration display variable display game. The information about the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decoration special figure hold number command including information about the number of starting memories (holding number), a decoration special figure command including information about a stop pattern, and variation of the special figure variation display game. Variable commands including information about patterns are given, and these commands are transmitted to the performance control device 300. In particular, by transmitting the decorative special drawing command before the variable command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Special figure 1 processing during fluctuation]
Next, details of the special figure 1 changing process (A3211) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the processing during fluctuation of Toku-zu 1.

The game control device 100 first updates the symbol confirmation count output count by +1 (A5301).
The number of times of symbol determination number output is used in the symbol determination number signal editing process (a part of the external information editing process) that outputs the symbol determination number signal generated when the stop symbol of the special figure variable display game is determined to the external device. To be done. Next, the decoration special drawing 1 command is loaded from the decoration special drawing 1 command area and prepared as an effect command (A5302), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5).
303). After that, a decoration special figure 1 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 1 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5304), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5).
305).

Next, the game control device 100, as the display time (stop display time) of the stop symbol of the special figure 1,
The display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of special figure 1 is set (A5306). For example, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is 6 if the stop symbol pattern is the deviating symbol of the special figure 1.
00 msec, 2000 msec if the big hit symbol of Toku-zu 1.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a failure (A5307). If the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is off (the result of A5307 is “Y”), the information saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of off) is the special figure 1 stop symbol Load from the save area and save to the special figure 1 stop symbol area (A5
322).

If the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not out of order (in the case of a big hit) (the result of A5307 is “N”), the game control device 100 is also changing the special figure 2 (the special figure 2 variable display game is also being executed).
Or not (A5308). Toku-zu 2 is not changing (result of A5308 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A5319. Toku-zu 2 is also changing (A53
The result of 08 is "Y"), and it is determined whether or not a special figure 2 display process described later is being executed (A5).
309).

The game control device 100, when the special figure 2 displaying process is being executed (the result of A5309 is "
Y ”), and the process proceeds to step A5311. When the special figure 2 process is not being executed (
The result of A5309 is “N”), and the number of times the symbol determination frequency is output is updated by +1 (A5310). Next, as the display time of the special figure 2, a display time of a value obtained by adding 4 msec to the display time of the special figure 1 (display time of the special figure + 4 msec) is set (A5311), and displayed in the special figure 2 game processing timer area. Save time (A5312). Here, 4 msec is an interrupt period (predetermined time period) of the timer interrupt process. 4 msec is added because the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 in the next special figure 2 game processing (4 msec corresponding to the interrupt period is subtracted) (A3304), and therefore is added. Thereby, the display time of the actual stop symbol of special figure 1 and the stop symbol of special figure 2 can be made the same. If the stop display of the special figure 2 has already been started, the display time is reset here (the display time is basically extended, but it may be shortened in some cases).

Next, the game control device 100 sets and prepares a falling edge design command of the decoration special drawing 2 as a production command (A5313), saves it in the decoration special drawing 2 command area (A5314), and executes production command setting processing ( A5315). Then, a decoration special figure 2 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 2 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5316), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5317). After that, the special figure 2 in-display process shift setting process 2 for making settings for executing the special figure 2 in-process is executed (A5318). In the special figure 2 displaying process shift setting process 2, the process number "2" is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area,
The processing for stopping the special display 2 variable display game as a result of the deviation is executed.

By the processing of steps A5311 to A5318, the result of deviation of the special figure 2 variable display game (including the decorative special figure 2 variable display game) is set in the special figure 1 changing process which is control related to the special figure 1 variable display game. , Execution of processing during display of special map 2 (end of special display 2 variable display game)
Is set. In this way, even if the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed (while the special figure 2 is changing), if the special figure 1 variable display game is a hit result (big hit), the special figure 2 variable display game is lost. As a result, it will be forced to end fluctuation (forced end).

The special figure 1 changing process is performed at the end of the changing time, that is, when the special figure 1 game processing timer (the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer area set in step A5007) is up (A3206). Since the result is executed "Y"), when the special figure 1 variable display game of the hit result stops changing, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly ended (forced end).

Next, the game control device 100 loads the decoration special drawing 1 command from the decoration special drawing 1 command area and saves it in the hit symbol command area (A5319). Next, the round number upper limit value information is loaded from the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (A5320). The winning opening opening information is loaded and saved in the special winning opening opening information area (A5321). After that, the information saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of big hit) is loaded from the special figure 1 stop symbol save area, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (A5322). Next, the special figure 1 display process shift setting process 1 for setting the special figure 1 display process is executed (A5323), and the special figure 1 changing process is ended. In the special figure 1 displaying process transition setting process 1, the special figure 1 game process number area is saved, the process number "2" is saved, the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped, and the like. Perform the necessary processing to move to the processing.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 constitutes stop time setting means (display time setting means) for setting the stop time (display time) for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. Moreover, the game control device 100 is executing the special figure 2 variable display game (during change of the special figure 2).
Even if the special figure 1 variable display game has a hit result, the special figure 2 variable display game constitutes a forced ending means for forcibly ending with the result.

[Special figure 2 processing during fluctuation]
Next, details of the special figure 2 changing process (A3313) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 103 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 changing process.

The game control device 100 first updates the symbol confirmation count output count by +1 (A5401).
The symbol determination frequency output frequency is used in the symbol determination frequency signal editing process (a part of the external information editing process) that outputs the symbol determination frequency signal generated when the stop symbol of the variable display game is determined to the external device. .. Next, the decoration special figure 2 command is loaded from the decoration special figure 2 command area and prepared as an effect command (A5402), and effect command setting processing is executed (A540).
3). After that, a decoration special figure 2 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 2 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5404), and effect command setting processing is executed (A540).
5).

Next, the game control device 100, as the display time (stop display time) of the stop symbol of the special figure 2,
The display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of special figure 2 is set (A5406). For example, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is 6 if the stop symbol pattern is the outlier symbol of the special figure 2.
00 msec, 600 msec for the big hit design of Special Figure 2, 136 msec for the small hit design of Special Figure 2. It should be noted that the display time of the outlying symbol and the big hit symbol of special figure 2 is the same, but it is longer than the display time of the small hit symbol of special figure 2.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a failure (A5407). If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is off (the result of A5407 is "Y"), the information (stop symbol number at the time of off) saved in the above-mentioned special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is the special figure 2 stop symbol. It is loaded from the save area and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (A5
427).

The game control device 100, if the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not missing (A5407)
The result is “N”), and it is determined whether the special figure 1 is also changing (the special figure 1 variable display game is also being executed) (A5408). Toku-zu 1 is not changing (result of A5408 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A5423. Toku-zu 1 is also changing (result of A5408 is "Y
)), It is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (A5409).

The game control device 100, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a big hit (A540
If the result of 9 is "N"), that is, if it is a small hit, the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set (
(A5412), the decoration special figure 1 interruption command is prepared as an effect command (A5413), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5414). Then, the process proceeds to step A5423. In this way, even if the special figure 1 variable display game is in execution (during change of special figure 1), if the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit, the special figure 1 variable display game will be changed to the special figure 1 game. It is interrupted by interrupting the measurement of the variable time by the processing timer. In this case, the derivation of the result of the special figure 1 variable display game (display of the stop symbol corresponding to the stop symbol number) is postponed, and the special figure 1 that was interrupted after the end of the small hitting operation relating to the special figure 2 variable display game The floating display game can be restarted.

The game control device 100, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (A540
The result of 9 is "Y"), and it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 display process described later is being executed (A54).
10). When the processing during the display of special figure 1 is being executed (the result of A5410 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A5415. When the special figure 1 displaying process is not being executed (result of A5410 is “N”), the symbol decision number output count is updated by +1 (A5411). Next, as the display time of special figure 1, a value obtained by adding 4 msec to the display time of special figure 2 (display time of special figure 2 + 4 mse
The display time of c) is set (A5415), and the display time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A5416). Here, 4 msec is an interrupt period (predetermined time period) of the timer interrupt process. 4 msec is added because the special figure 1 game processing timer is updated by -1 in the next special figure 1 game process (4 msec corresponding to the interrupt period is subtracted) (A3205).
), Is an extra addition. Thereby, the display time of the actual stop symbol of special figure 2 and the display time of the stop symbol of special figure 1 can be made the same. If the stop display of the special figure 1 has already started, the display time will be reset here (basically, the display time is extended, but it may be shortened in some cases).

Next, the game control device 100 sets and prepares an outlier design command of the decoration special drawing 1 as an effect command (A5417), saves it in the decoration special drawing 1 command area (A5418), and executes effect command setting processing ( A5419). Then, a decoration special figure 1 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 1 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5420), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5421). After that, the special figure 1 in-display process shift setting process 2 for making settings for executing the special figure 1 in-process is executed (A5422). In the special figure 1 display processing transition setting processing 2, the processing number "2" is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area,
Toku-zu 1 The process of stopping the variable display game as a result of losing is executed.

By the processing of steps A5415 to A5422, the result of deviation of the special figure 1 variable display game (including the decorative special figure 1 variable display game) is set in the special figure 2 changing process which is the control relating to the special figure 2 variable display game. , Execution of processing during display of special map 1 (end of special display 1 variable display game)
Is set. In this way, even if the special figure 1 variable display game is in execution (during change of the special figure 1), if the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a big hit, the special figure 1 variable display game will be forced with a loss result. Will be changed (end of execution).

The special figure 2 changing process is performed at the end of the changing time, that is, when the special figure 2 game processing timer has repeated 0 times and the special figure 2 game processing timer is up (results of A3305 and A3306). Is executed in "Y"), the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly ended in variation (end of execution) when the special result 2 variable display game in which the hit result changes.

Next, the game control device 100 loads the decoration special drawing 2 command from the decoration special drawing 2 command area, and saves it in the hit symbol command area (A5423). Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit (A5424). Special Figure 2 If the result of the variable display game is a small hit (the result of A5424 is "Y"), the information saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of a small hit) is special figure 2 It is loaded from the stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (A5427).

When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a small hit (when it is a big hit) (the result of A5424 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines the upper limit of the number of rounds from the aforementioned special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area. Load the value information and save it in the round number upper limit value information area (A5425).
The special winning opening opening information is loaded from the special figure 2 special winning opening opening information area and saved in the special winning opening opening information area (A5426). After that, the information saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of a big hit) is loaded from the special figure 2 stop symbol save area, and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (A5427). Next, the special figure 2 displaying process shift setting process 1 for setting to execute the special figure 2 displaying process is executed (A5428), and the special figure 2 changing process is ended. In the special figure 2 display processing shift setting process 1, the process number "2" is displayed in the special figure 2 game process number area.
Is performed, processing for stopping the special figure 2 variable display game is executed, and other processing necessary for shifting to the processing during display of special figure 2 is performed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 constitutes stop time setting means (display time setting means) for setting the stop time (display time) for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. Further, the game control device 100 is executing the special figure 1 variable display game (during change of special figure 1).
Even if the special figure 2 variable display game has a hit result, the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly terminated with the result of the miss.

[Processing during fanfare / interval]
Next, details of the fanfare / interval processing (A3213, A3315) in the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing will be described. 104A and 104B are
It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing during fanfare / interval.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the remaining ball counter for counting the remaining balls of the special variation winning devices 38, 39 is 0 (A6001). When the remaining ball counter is not 0 (result of A6001 is “N”), the fanfare / interval processing is ended.
When the remaining ball counter is 0 (the result of A6001 is “Y”). It is determined whether or not it is the first big hit round (A6002). If it is not the first big hit round (A600
The result of 2 is "N"), and the process proceeds to step A6010.

If the game control device 100 is the first big hit round (the result of A6002 is "Y
)), It is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the universal figure starting gate 34 (A6003). When the game ball has not passed through the universal starting gate 34 (the result of A6003 is "N"), the fanfare / interval processing is ended. That is, the right-hand strike is started and the universal figure starting gate 34
Until the game ball passes, the process related to the big hit (such as the process of opening the special winning opening) does not proceed.

The game control device 100, when the game ball passes through the universal figure starting gate 34 (A600
When the result of No. 3 is “Y”), that is, when the right hit is started, the setting of the information on the start of the big hit is executed (A6004-A6009). First, set the round number upper limit value table (
A6004), the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information in the round number upper limit value information area is acquired from the round number upper limit value table and saved in the round number upper limit value area of the RWM (A6005). In the present embodiment, the upper limit value of the number of rounds is 16R, 8R,
2R.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information in the round number upper limit value information area from the round number upper limit value table and saves it in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (A6006). Then, in the present embodiment, since the upper special winning opening is opened in the big hit, the upper special winning opening illegal prize number area is cleared (A6007), and R
Save the flag outside fraud monitoring period in the fraud monitoring period flag area of the WM's upper prize hole (A600
8), ON output data of the signal indicating that the accessory continuously operating device is operating is saved in the test signal output data area (A6009).

Next, the game control device 100 updates the number of rounds in the number-of-rounds area by +1 (A601).
0). The number of rounds in the number-of-rounds area is cleared to 0 before the start of the big hit operation this time because it is cleared to 0 in the fanfare / interval processing shift setting processing.
After that, a big command opening information and a round command corresponding to the number of rounds are prepared as an effect command (A6011), and effect command setting processing is executed (A6012).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a big winning medium processing control pointer initial value corresponding to the special winning opening opening information and the number of rounds (A6013), and saves it in the big winning medium processing control pointer area of the RWM (A6014). Here, 0 is set as the initial value in the case of a pattern in which the special winning opening is repeatedly opened and closed during one round, and in the case of a pattern in which the special winning opening is opened only once in one round, the initial value is suddenly set to the upper limit. Set the value (= 21). In the case of a pattern that repeats opening and closing, the initial value is not necessarily 0, but may be a value larger than 0 and less than the upper limit value (that is,
Start with the value in the middle). Next, the special winning opening opening information and the special winning opening opening time corresponding to the number of rounds are set (A6015).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is a lever solenoid operation round that operates the lever solenoid 86b that opens the specific area 86 (V winning opening) (A60).
16). In the present embodiment, the lever solenoid operation round is the big hit round 1 (first big hit round).

In the case of the lever solenoid operation round (the result of A6016 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the operation data of the lever solenoid 86b (A6017). Here, the specific area 86 is opened for a long time in the case of probability variation big hit (for example, 16R, 8R, or 2R probability variation big hit) and for a short time (very short time) in the case of normal big hit (for example, 16R normal big hit). Then, the operation data of the lever solenoid 86b is set. Specifically, data is set in the lever solenoid control pointer area and the lever solenoid control timer is cleared to zero. On the other hand, when it is not the lever solenoid operation round (the result of A6016 is “N”), the stop data of the lever solenoid is set (A6018).

Next, the game control device 100 shifts to the process of opening the special winning opening as the process number.
4 ”is set (A6019), and it is determined whether or not it is a big hit in the special figure 1 variable display game (
A6020). Special Figure 1 When it is a big hit in the variable display game (the result of A6020 is "Y")
The processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A6021), and the special winning opening opening time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A6022). Special Figure 1 If the variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A6020 is "N"), save this processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6023), and set the special winning opening time to the special figure 2 game processing timer. Save in the area (A6024).

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the opening of the upper special winning opening (ON data of the signal during operation of the special electric auditors product 1) in the test signal output data area (A6025), and outputs the special winning opening solenoid of the RWM. In the data area, the special winning opening solenoid 39b (special winning opening solenoid 2) is turned on, the upper special winning opening on data is saved (A6026), the special winning opening count is cleared (A6027), and the fanfare / interval processing is performed. To finish.

In addition, in the present embodiment, there is only a big hit that opens only the upper special winning opening, but it is possible to provide two types of big hits that open only the upper special winning opening and big hits that open only the lower special winning opening,
It is also possible to provide a jackpot that opens both the upper and lower winning holes.

[Control of production control device]
The control (process) executed by the effect control device 300 by the effect control program will be described below.

[Main processing (production control device)]
First, the details of the main process executed by the effect control device 300 will be described. Figure 10
5 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a main process (main program) executed by the effect control device 300. The main processing is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (production microcomputer) when the game machine 10 is powered on. In addition, in the flowchart of the process executed by the performance control device 300, the code (number) of the step is represented as “B ***”.

When the execution of the main process is started, effect control device 300 first prohibits interruption (
B0001). Next, the CPU 311 and VDP 312 are initialized (B0002, B
0003) and permit interrupts (B0004). When the interruption is permitted, the game control device 1
The command reception interrupt process for receiving the command transmitted from 00 is ready to be executed.

Next, the production control device 300 permits generation of display data to be displayed on the display device 41 or the like (B0005), and sets a random number seed used for random number generation (B0006). Then, the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (B0007).

Then, production control device 300 clears WDT (watchdog timer) (B0.
008). The WDT is started by the above-mentioned CPU initial setting (B0002), and the CPU 311
Monitor whether is working properly. If the WDT is not cleared even after the lapse of a certain period, the WDT times out and the CPU 311 is reset.

After that, the effect control device 300 uses the RTC (real time clock) 3 as a time measuring means.
The RTC reading process for reading the time information from 38 is executed (B0009).

In the RTC reading process, the time information may be read from the RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle (eg, every one minute), and it is not necessary to read the time information each time the process moves to step B0009. Moreover, when the power supply to the effect control device 300 is turned on (that is, the power supply to the game machine 10 is turned on), the RTC reading process may be executed only once (by changing the position of the RTC reading process, for example, step B0003). Between B and B0004). The production control device 300 sets a time timer (time measuring means) for measuring the time in the timer area in the RAM, and reads the time information from the RTC 338 only once when the time information is read from the RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle or when the power is turned on. The time timer may be adjusted to the time of the RTC 338 when the information is read. And production control device 300 may use a timer for time instead of RTC 338 to execute various processes. By doing so, the number of times of processing for reading the time from the RTC 338 can be reduced, and the load on the CPU 311 is reduced.

In the RTC reading process, when the read time matches any of a plurality of predetermined times (first predetermined time, second predetermined time, ...), a predetermined effect may be executed. The player can estimate the set value from the time interval by randomly selecting the time interval of the predetermined time according to the set value. For example, the selection rate for a long time interval may be drawn such that the larger the set value, the smaller the selection rate. In addition, the player can estimate the set value from the execution period of the predetermined effect by drawing the execution period of executing the predetermined effect with a probability according to the set value. For example, the selection rate for a long execution period may be selected so that the larger the set value, the larger the selection rate.

Next, the effect control device 300 detects an operation signal of the effect button 25 (a signal of the effect button switch 25a or the cross key 690f) by the player, or changes the effect content (setting) according to the detected signal. Perform production button input processing (B0010). Subsequently, a hall / player setting mode process is executed for accepting operations such as changes in the brightness and volume of the LEDs and liquid crystal by the manager of the game hall (game shop) or the player (B0011). In the hall / player setting mode process, the player can customize the effect according to the effect points described later.

Next, the production control device 300 executes production point control processing for executing addition and clearing of production points (B0012). In the production point control processing, the production points to be added to the production points by performing the productions and the operations to be added to the production points are performed, and the production points can be carried over to the next game. For example, information including information on effect points is displayed on the display device 41 as a QR code (registered trademark). For example, the effect control device 300 can display the QR code (registered trademark) on the display device 41 in the hall / player setting mode process. The player can estimate the set value from the added value by lottery the value to be added to the effect points (added value) with a probability according to the set value. For example, the lottery may be performed such that the selection rate of a large addition value increases as the setting value increases.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes a random number update process for updating a random number such as effect random numbers (B0013), analyzes the received command received from the game control device 100, and executes the corresponding received command check process. (B0014). Details of the received command check processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the effect control device 300 updates various data according to the contents displayed on the display device (display means) such as the display device 41, or sets the drawing to be displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer. Perform effect display edit processing (B0015). The drawing data set at this time can update the image of the display device 41 without any problem as long as the VDP 312 can complete the drawing within a frame period of 1/30 second (about 33.3 msec). Then, the drawing preparation for the display frame buffer is completed and the drawing command preparation end setting is executed (B0016).

Next, the production control device 300 determines whether or not it is the frame switching timing (B
0017). If it is not the frame switching timing (result of B0017 is “N”), the process of B0017 is repeated until the frame switching timing is reached. If it is the frame switching timing (result of B0017 is “Y”), the display device 41 is displayed. Instruct screen drawing (B0
018). Since the frame cycle of the present embodiment is 1/30 second, for example, when the periodic V blank (image update) is executed twice every 1/60 second (1/2 of the frame cycle), the frame switching is performed. .. The image may not be updated in 1/60 seconds, and the interval may be further increased.

The effect control device 300 also executes a sound control process for controlling the sound output from the speaker 19 (B0019).

In addition, the production control device 300 executes a decoration control process for controlling the decoration device (the board decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18) including LEDs or the like (B0020). In the decoration control process, for example, light emission control of a decoration device such as an LED is executed.

Furthermore, the performance control device 300 executes a movable body control process for controlling a performance device (a panel performance device 44, a frame performance device) such as an electric accessory driven by a motor and a solenoid (B002).
1). In the movable body control process, for example, an accessory motion effect for driving a motor is set.

And production control device 300 will return to the processing of B0008, after finishing the processing of B0021 mentioned above. After that, the processing from B0008 to B0021 is repeated.

[Reception command check processing]
Details of the received command check process (B0014) in the above-described main process (FIG. 105) will be described below with reference to FIG. 106. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command check process executed by production control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as the command reception number in order to check the number of commands received from the game control device 100 (B1101). Then, it is determined whether the command reception number is not 0 (B1102). If the number of received commands is 0, that is, if there is no command received from the game control device 100 (result of B1102 is “N”), there is no command to analyze, and the received command check process is ended.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300, when the command reception number is not 0, that is, when the command is received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is “Y”), the command reception counter in the command reception counter area. After subtracting the value by the number of received commands (B1103
), The contents of the received command buffer of RAM are copied to the command area for analysis (B11).
04). Here, since the received command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem in subtracting the number of received commands before copying the contents of the buffer to the command area. Further, even if a new command is received during copying, the data will not be overwritten.

Then, production control device 300 updates the command read index by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (adds 1) (B1105). The received command buffer stores the received command to 32
It is configured to store up to individual items. The received commands are stored in the received command buffer in the order of command read indexes 0 to 31, and here the commands received in the order of index are read and copied to the command area for analysis. It should be noted that at the timing when copying to the command area for analysis is completed, the storage area of the received command buffer corresponding to the read command read index is cleared.

The production control device 300 determines whether or not the copying of the command for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1106), and when the copying is not completed (the result of B1106 is “N )), The processes of steps B1104 to B1106 are repeated.

When the effect control device 300 receives the command transmitted from the game control device 100, the content of the received command is stored in the received command buffer, and at the same time, the command reception counter value in the command reception counter area is added and updated. Although 32 commands can be stored in the received command buffer, the received command is analyzed separately in the command area for analysis. Then, when the contents of the received command are copied to the analysis command area, the reception command buffer and the command reception counter value are cleared. As described above, by always allocating a free area in the received command buffer without directly analyzing it, it is possible to prepare for a large number of command reception.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines that the result of B1106 is "Y" when the copying is completed.
)), The received command contents of the analysis command area are loaded (B1107), and a received command analysis process for analyzing the contents is executed (B1108). Details of the received command analysis processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 107. In addition, the address of the command area for analysis is updated (B1109). After that, it is determined whether or not the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1110), and if the analysis is not completed (result of B1110 is “N”), step The processing from B1107 to B1110 is repeated. When the analysis is completed (the result of B1110 is “Y”), the received command check processing is ended.

[Reception command analysis processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 107, details of the received command analysis processing (B1108) in the received command check processing (FIG. 106) described above will be described. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command analysis process executed by the production control device 300.

The production control device 300 first separates the upper byte of the received command into the MODE part and the lower byte into the ACTION part (ACT part) (B1201). The command transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 is a MODE section (MODE command) and A.
It is composed of a CTION unit (ACTION command), and is normally continuously transmitted from a MODE unit indicating the type of command. Therefore, the upper and lower parts of the received command are M
The ODE section and the ACTION section are arranged in this order.

Next, the production control device 300 determines whether the MODE part is within the normal range (B12).
02). That is, it is determined whether or not it is a value that can be taken by the MODE part indicating the type of command (value assigned as the command specification indicating the type). Then, when the MODE part is within the normal range (the result of B1202 is “Y”), it is similarly determined whether or not the ACTION part is within the normal range (B1203). That is, it is determined whether or not the value is a value (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the content) that can be taken by the ACTION section indicating the content of the command (a concrete effect instruction or the like). If the ACTION part is within the normal range (B1203
Result of "Y"), and further, the ACTION part for the MODE part determines whether or not the combination is correct (B1204). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the ACTION section is a value that the command of the type specified by the MODE section can take. If the combination is correct (the result of B1204 is “Y”), the command processing corresponding to the command system is executed in the processing of B1205 and thereafter.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the value of the MODE part is within the range of the variable system command (B1205). The variation system command is a command for instructing a variation pattern of the decorative special symbol, and there is a variation command (set by the variation start information setting process). And MODE
If the part represents a variable system command (result of B1205 is “Y”), the variable system command process is executed (B1206), and the received command analysis process ends.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent a variable command (B12
The result of 05 is "N"), and then it is determined whether the MODE part is within the range of the hit command (B
1207). In addition, the hit system command is a command for instructing an action (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) related to a performance during a hit, and includes, for example, a big hit fanfare command (set in special figure display processing), a round command (fanfare / Set during interval processing), Interval command (set during big winning opening processing), Ending command (set during big winning opening processing), small hit fanfare command, small hit opening command (small hit round command), It is a small hit end screen command (small hit ending command) or the like. When the MODE part indicates a hit command (the result of B1207 is "Y"), hit command processing is executed (B1208), and the received command analysis processing ends.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the hit system command (B12
The result of 07 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the symbol type command (B).
1209). Note that the symbol-based commands include a decoration special drawing 1 command and a decoration special drawing 2 command corresponding to the stop design pattern. Then, when the MODE part represents a symbol type command (
The result of B1209 is "Y"), symbol-based command processing is executed (B1210), and the received command analysis processing ends.

Production control device 300, in the case where the MODE part does not represent a symbol type command (B12
The result of 09 is "N"), and then it is determined whether the MODE part is within the range of the single-shot command (B).
1211). Then, when the MODE part indicates a single-shot system command (result of B1211 is “Y”), single-shot system command process is executed (B1212), and the received command analysis process is ended.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent a single-shot system command (B12
The result of 11 is “N”), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the prefetch symbol type command (B1213). The read-ahead symbol system command includes a read-ahead stop symbol command. Then, when the MODE part indicates the prefetching symbol type command (the result of B1213 is "Y"), the prefetching symbol type command process is executed (B1214), and the received command analysis process is ended. In the prefetch symbol system command processing, if the latest received special special figure reservation number command is the decorative special figure 1 reserved number command, the special symbol corresponding to the special figure 1 reserved number is the prefetch symbol system command (prefetch stop pattern command) 1 Save in the pre-reading pattern command area, if the latest received special special figure reservation number command is the decorative special figure 2 reservation number command, the pre-reading pattern system command (pre-reading stop command) corresponds to the special figure 2 reservation number Special figure 2 Save in the prefetch symbol command area. If the jackpot probability when received is a low probability state, the look-ahead stop symbol command (low probability) is used to execute the look-ahead symbol system command processing, and if the jackpot probability when received is a high probability state, the look-ahead The look-ahead symbol-based command processing may be executed using the stop symbol command (low probability).

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the look-ahead symbol system command (
The result of B1213 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the prefetch variable system command (B1215). The look-ahead variation system command includes a look-ahead variation pattern command. Then, when the MODE part indicates a prefetch change type command (the result of B1215 is "
Y ”), the prefetching variable system command processing is executed (B1216), and the received command analysis processing is ended. In the prefetching variable system command process, the prefetching lottery process regarding the prefetching effect is executed based on the prefetching variation pattern command or the prefetching symbol system command (prefetching stop symbol command). Examples of the look-ahead effect include continuous notice effect (including chance eye effect), look-ahead zone effect, and pending change notice.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300 may receive an unexpected command (for example, a command to be used only in the test mode) when the MODE part does not represent the look-ahead variable system command (the result of B1215 is “N”). Therefore, the received command analysis processing ends. When the MODE part is not in the normal range (result of B1202 is “N”), the ACTION part is not in normal range (result of B1203 is “N”), or the AC for the MODE part
Even when the TION unit is not the correct combination (the result of B1204 is “N”), the received command analysis processing is ended.

[Single-shot command processing]
Details of the single-shot command processing (B1212) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 107) described above will be described below with reference to FIG. 108. FIG. 108 shows the production control device 30.
6 is a flowchart showing a procedure of single-shot command processing executed by 0.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE section represents a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine (B1301). If the MODE part indicates a model designation command (result of B1301 is "Y"), model setting processing for setting the type of gaming machine is executed (B
1302) and terminates the single-shot command processing.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the model designation command (B1
The result of 301 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE section represents a RAM initialization command (B1303). If the MODE part represents a command for RAM initialization, (
When the result of B1303 is "Y"), the RAM initialization setting process for notifying the RAM initialization is executed (B1304), and the one-shot system command process ends.

When the MODE section does not represent the RAM initialization command (result of B1303 is “N”), production control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE section represents a power failure recovery command (B1305). ). When the MODE part indicates a power failure recovery command (B13
The result of 05 is "Y"), the power failure recovery setting process is executed (B1306), and the single-shot system command process ends.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent a power failure recovery command (B1
The result of 305 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE part represents a customer waiting demo command (B1307). When the MODE part represents a customer waiting demo command (B130
The result of 7 is "Y"), the customer waiting demo setting process is executed (B1308), and the single-shot system command process is ended.

If the MODE part does not represent the customer waiting demo command, the effect control device 300 (B
The result of 1307 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 1 reserved number command (B1309). If the MODE part indicates the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (the result of B1309 is "Y"), the special figure 1 reservation information setting process is executed (B1310),
Terminates single-shot command processing.

If the MODE part does not represent the decoration special figure 1 hold number command (the result of B1309 is “N”), then the production control device 300 determines whether the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 2 hold number command. It is determined (B1311). If the MODE part indicates the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (the result of B1311 is "Y"), the special figure 2 reservation information setting process is executed (B131).
2) The single command processing is ended.

If the MODE part does not represent the decoration special figure 2 hold number command (result of B1311 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE part represents a probability information command. (B1313). If the MODE part represents the probability information command (B1
The result of 313 is “Y”), the probability information setting process is executed (B1314), and the one-shot system command process ends.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the probability information command (B1
The result of 313 is “N”), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE part represents an error / illegal command (B1315). The error / illegal commands include, for example, a fraud command, a fraud cancellation command, a state off command, and a state on command. As a state-on command, a signal is generated from the glass frame opening detection switch 63 (glass frame opening error) and a signal is generated from the front frame opening detection switch 64 (body frame opening detection switch) (body frame opening error, front frame opening error). There is a command indicating a release error). The status off command indicates that no error has occurred.

When the MODE part indicates an error / illegal command (result of B1315 is “Y”), an error / illegal setting process for notifying or canceling the error or fraud is executed (
(B1316), terminates the single-shot command processing.

When the MODE section does not represent an error / illegal command (result of B1315 is “N”), the MODE control section 300 next causes the MODE section to execute a command for production mode switching (special figure display processing). Etc.) is determined (B1317). Then, when the MODE part indicates a command for effect mode switching (result of B1317 is “Y”), effect mode switching setting processing is executed (B1318), and the single shot system command processing ends.

If the MODE part does not represent the command for mode switching (result of B1317 is "N"), the production control device 300 next indicates whether the MODE part represents an out ball number command indicating the out ball number. It is determined whether or not (B1319). If the MODE part indicates the out-ball number command (result of B1319 is “Y”), the out-ball number receiving process is executed (B1).
320) and terminates the single command processing.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the out-ball number command (B
The result of 1319 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE part represents a count command (special winning opening count command) (B1321). Then, when the MODE section indicates the command for counting the special winning opening switch (the result of B1321 is “Y”), the count information setting process is executed (B1322), and the single shot system command process is ended.

If the MODE part does not represent the count command, the effect control device 300 (B
The result of 1321 is "N"), and it is determined whether the MODE part represents a setting value information command (probability setting value information command) (B1323). The set value information command is included in the command at the time of power recovery from step A1046 and the command at the time of RAM initialization transmitted in the process of step A1044 in FIG. 82B. When the MODE part indicates the set value information command (result of B1323 is “Y”), the set value receiving process is executed (B1324), and the single-shot system command process is ended. In the set value reception process, the set value (probability set value) is stored in a storage unit such as a RAM and necessary processing is executed.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the set value information command (B
The result of 1323 is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the MODE part represents a setting change type command (B1325). As a command for setting change, for example, a command (A
1030). When the MODE part indicates a setting change type command (B13
The result of No. 25 is “Y”), the setting change system information setting process is executed (B1326), and the one-shot system command process is ended. In the setting change type information setting process, the contents of the setting change type command are stored and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when the command for changing the probability setting is received, the setting change system information setting process displays a setting change display for notifying the player that the setting is being changed on the display device 41.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the command of the setting change system (
The result of B1325 is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the MODE part represents a command of the setting confirmation system (B1327). As a command for setting confirmation, for example, a command (
A1033). If the MODE part indicates a command for setting confirmation, (B1
The result of 327 is "Y"), the setting confirmation system information setting process is executed (B1328), and the single-shot system command process is ended. In the setting confirmation system information setting process, the contents of the setting confirmation system command are stored and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when the command for confirming the probability setting is received, the setting confirmation system information setting process displays a setting confirmation display for informing the player that the setting is being confirmed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the MODE part represents a symbol stop command (B1329). The command to stop the symbols includes, for example, the symbol stop command of special figure 1 (decorative special figure 1 stop command) and the symbol stop command of special figure 2 (decorative special figure 2 stop command). And MODE
When the part represents a command to stop the symbol (the result of B1329 is “Y”), the effect control device 3
00 then determines whether the command in the MODE section is a normal command (B13).
30).

When the MODE part command is a normal command (result of B1330 is “Y”)
The effect control device 300 sets the stop mode of the corresponding special figure (B1331), sets the game state flag to the normal state after all the symbols stop (B1332), and ends the single shot system command process. In the process of B1332, as an example, the game state flag is set to the normal state, but the game state flag is set to a "changing", "big hit" or "small hit" flag depending on the timing at which this process is executed. Is set.

On the other hand, when the MODE part does not represent the command to stop the symbol (the result of B1329 is "N
)), Or when the command of the MODE part is not normal (the result of B1330 is “N”)
In effect, the effect control device 300 ends the single-shot command processing.

In addition, although not shown in FIG. 108, the MODE part is a decorative special figure 1 interruption command (A
5413) or a decorative special figure 1 restart command (A7311), the effect control device 30
0 may execute a process of interrupting or restarting the decorative special figure 1 variable display game. MO
When the DE portion represents information indicating that a V prize has been received (a specific area passing command or the like), the effect control device 300 may notify the V prize on the display device 41 or the like.

[Design command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 109, the details of the symbol-based command processing (B1210) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 107) described above will be described. FIG. 109 shows the production control device 30.
It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the design command processing performed by 0.

The production control device 300 receives the received symbol-based command (decoration special figure 1 command or decoration special figure 2
The special figure type corresponding to the MODE part of (command) is set (B1801). The special map type is special map 1 or special map 2. And the MODE part and the ACTION part (ACT
Set the symbol type corresponding to the combination of (part) and save it in a predetermined area such as RAM (B180).
2). Here, in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, since the distribution ratio of the symbols changes, the symbol type is set using the table for each MODE. In addition, in the present embodiment, the symbol type is a deviating symbol, a 16R certainty variation jackpot design, a 2R certainty variation jackpot design, a 16R normal jackpot design, or the like.

[Variable command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the details of the variable system command processing (B1206) in the above-described received command analysis processing (FIG. 107) will be described. FIG. 110 shows the effect control device 30.
9 is a flowchart showing a procedure of variable system command processing executed by 0.

Production control device 300, the special figure type (special figure 1
Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2) is undetermined (B1901). When the special figure type is not determined (the result of B1901 is “Y”), the variable system command processing is ended. If the special figure type is not undetermined (the result of B1901 is "N"), the combination of the received variable system command and the symbol system command is checked (B1902), and whether the variable system command and the symbol type are inconsistent or not. Is determined (B1903). Here, the inconsistency is a contradiction in performing an effect, such as when a symbol system command of a big hit symbol is received although an outlying variable system command is received. If the variable type command and the symbol type do not match (result of B1903 is "Y")
, The variable command processing ends.

Rendering control device 300, when the variation system command and the symbol type is not inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "N"), determines the variation pattern type from the variation system command (variation command) (B1
904), the variable effect setting process for setting the variable effect which is the effect during change is executed (B19).
05). It should be noted that there are a plurality of effects for the same variable command. Subsequently, the special state is set to change in the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) (B1906), and if the number of pre-reading effects of the continuous notice effect (remaining number of continuous notice effects) is not 0, -1 is updated. Yes (B1907
).

[Variation effect setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 111, the details of the variable effect setting process (B1905) in the above-described variable system command process (FIG. 110) will be described. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variable effect setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the variation pattern type is a variation without reach (variation that does not reach the reach state) (B2001). When the variation pattern type is variation without reach (the result of B2001 is “Y”), the number of production points, model code,
Set the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to special figure type, effect mode, and set value (probability set value) (B2002), and support the MODE part of variable system commands (variable command) and the number of pending special figure types Acquire the address of the first half notice distribution group table (B200
3). In the case of the fluctuation without reach, the fluctuation time is shortened as the number of holdings increases, and therefore the address of the table corresponding to the number of holdings is acquired.

If the variation pattern type is not the reachless variation (the result of B2001 is “N”), that is, if the reachable variation, the production control device 300, the number of production points, the model code, the special figure type, the production mode, The first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the symbol type and the setting value (probability setting value) is set (B2004), and the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE part of the variation system command (variation command) and the variation pattern type To obtain the address (B2005).

After the steps B2003 and B2005, the effect control device 300 performs the lottery of the notice that appears during the first half fluctuation (before the reach) (B2006). In addition, the probability of the advance lottery depends on the set value. Next, the second half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the number of effect points, model code, special figure type, effect mode, symbol type, and setting value (probability setting value) is set (B2007), and the variation system command The address of the latter half notice distribution group table corresponding to the ACT unit is acquired (B2008), and the notice lottery that appears during the second half change (during reach) is performed (B2009). In addition, the probability of the advance lottery depends on the set value. After that, the contents of the variation effect corresponding to the MODE part and the ACT part of the variation system command (variation command) are determined (B2010). In addition, the variation time and main reach contents can be known from the variation system command.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines the content of the effect (notice effect) corresponding to the result of the announcement lottery (B2011). Then, the content of the setting suggestion effect for suggesting the set value (probability set value, setting) is determined (B2012). Then, for example, a stop symbol setting process for determining a stop symbol of the decorative special figure variable display game is executed according to the contents of the variable effect such as the reach effect and the notice effect (B2013). Here, the decorative stop design is specifically determined, such as determining the separation in the case of the outlying design.

Next, the effect control device 300 performs display setting of setting suggestion effect (B2014). The display setting of the variable effect such as the reach effect is set (B2015), and the display setting of the notice effect is set (B20).
16). Next, display setting of hold reduction (hold shift) corresponding to the special map type is performed, and, for example, a display in which the hold display corresponding to the decorative special map that changes this time is reduced is set, and the look-ahead effect during the hold shift is set. The corresponding display information (B1717) and the like are read (B2017). Then, a voice number that determines the effect mode (sound output mode) by the sound of the speaker and a decoration number that determines the effect mode by the light emission of the decoration device are set (B2018). The decorating device (board decorating device 46, frame decorating device 18) has a plurality of decorative light emitting portions (decorative LEDs, etc.), and emits light in a light emitting mode (color of each LED, light emitting timing, etc.) determined by a decoration number. ..

The voice number and the decoration number can be set not only based on the contents of the effect, but also by lottery with a lottery probability according to the set value (probability set value). In this way, the player can change the light emitting mode of the decoration device, that is, the light emitting mode of the decorative light emitting unit (LED) from the game machine 10
You can enjoy guessing the setting value (probability setting value) of.

Next, the effect control device 300 performs display setting of the decorative special figure variation corresponding to the special figure type (B
2019), in addition to the first to third special symbols, the display setting of the fourth symbol variation regarding the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol, identification information) is performed (B2020). In addition, the fourth symbol variation, the display device 41
Other than the above, the lamp display units 1 and 2 (LED) of the above-described lamp display device 80 and / or
It is displayed on the display device 41.

[Operation / Effect of Fifth Embodiment]
According to the fifth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 can be controlled as a so-called simultaneous variation machine, and the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be independently (at the same time) in a running state. .. Even if one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is running, if the other becomes a big hit, one of the variable display games can be forcibly ended with the disengagement result. Further, in the probability change state, a small hit RUSH (rush) state in which a small hit occurs frequently due to the special figure 2 variable display game becomes possible. Further, it is possible to realize game control and effect control according to the probability setting value.

[Sixth Embodiment]
The sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 to 125. In the sixth embodiment,
An alert display unit 929 (an alert display means) mainly arranged on the upper surface 15a of the glass frame 15.
And the wall portion 920 (position specifying means). The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to fifth embodiments. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals will be used for the configurations having the same functions as those of the first to fifth embodiments, and the duplicate description will be appropriately omitted.

[Caution display part and wall part]
FIG. 112 is a perspective view of the gaming machine 10 as viewed diagonally from the right. FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming machine 10. FIG. 114 shows the glass frame 1 excluding the decoration device 18a (top unit).
5 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. FIG. 115 is a front view (a) of the glass frame 15 excluding the decoration device 18a (top unit), a cross-sectional view (b) taken along the line AA, and a speaker decoration member 470.
It is the front view (c) and back view (d) of the glass frame 15 except a and 470b. FIG. 116 shows
FIG. 116A is a plan view of the gaming machine 10 (as viewed from directly above), FIG. 116A shows a state before the front frame and the glass frame are rotated forward of the gaming machine, and FIG. The state after rotating a frame and a glass frame to the front of a game machine is shown. 117 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 116.
FIG. 118 is a diagram showing an example of the alert display unit 929.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, on the upper surface 15a of the glass frame 15 (front frame), for example,
An alert display unit 929 (seal) displaying the contents of the alert regarding the removal (and attachment) of the decoration device 18a is arranged (attached) (FIG. 118).

The reminder display unit 929 (FIG. 118) has, for example, a rectangular shape and a background color of yellow, and the character representing the reminder is displayed in, for example, black (or red or another color different from the background color). There is. On the other hand, the glass frame 15 (upper surface 15a) is colored black, for example. As a result, the alert display unit 929 is not only arranged in a conspicuous place on the upper surface 15a of the glass frame 15, but also displayed (attached) with the color of the glass frame 15 as the background color, so that it is positionally colorful. It is also very noticeable.

By the way, since the alerting by the alerting display unit 929 is performed in a conspicuous place as described above, there is a possibility that it may not match the motif or the decorative member of the gaming machine 10, which may impair the appearance. In addition, the alert display unit 929 alerts an operator (a person involved in the game hall, etc.) who makes adjustments such as hall settings of the gaming machine 10 when the decorative device 18a is removed, or the decorative device 18a, for example. Although this suggests how to handle and remove 18a (FIG. 118), it is an unnecessary display for the player. Therefore, when the yellow reminder display unit 929 is arranged on the black background as described above, the reminder display unit 929 is very conspicuous, so be careful when the reminder display unit 929 enters the player's field of view. This may reduce the interest of the player. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the wall portion 920 is provided on the upper surface 15a of the glass frame 15, and the warning display portion 929 is arranged in the wall portion 920, so that at least the player and the seat seated during the game (during the game) The rearward alert display unit 929 is made difficult to visually recognize from the player who has stood up. Note that the caution display unit 929 may display cautions that are not directly related to the decoration device 18a (for example, cautions regarding the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15).

The wall portion 920 has a left-right direction (width direction of the glass frame 15) as a longitudinal direction, and its length is slightly shorter than the left-right direction length of the attachment portion 442 of the decoration device 18a. The wall 920 is
The rear end portion of the wall portion 920, which is arranged inside the mounting portion 442 in the left-right direction, is flush with the back surface of the glass frame 15. The wall portion 920 is the upper surface 15 a of the glass frame 15.
It can be arranged so as to protrude slightly upward (see FIG. 115).

The wall portion 920 is a portion forming the outer wall (FIG. 120, front wall 921, side wall 922, side wall 923).
) And a bottom surface 924 surrounded by the outer wall (FIG. 120), and a caution display portion 929 is arranged on the bottom surface 924 (FIG. 120). As a result, the alert display unit 929 is invisible at least from the vicinity of the height of the upper surface 15a of the glass frame 15 (the same height as the upper surface 15a) (see FIG. 119 and the like), and at least in front of the gaming machine. It is difficult for the player to visually recognize the alert display unit 929. Although the wall portion 920 is formed integrally with the glass frame 15, it may be formed as a separate body and attached to the upper surface 15a.

An upper tank 448 is attached to the rear of the front frame 12 (glass frame 15). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 116 (a), the wall portion 920 is disposed between the decoration device 18a and the upper tank 448 in a plan view. In the state where the glass frame 15 is closed, the wall portion 920 is disposed between the mounting portion 442 of the decoration device 18a and the frame 11 of the outer frame unit 17 in a plan view, and the upper tank 448 is located above the frame 11. Is also located behind. On the other hand, when the front frame 12 is rotated forward with the glass frame 15 closed with the hinge 16a (and the hinge 16b (FIG. 113)) as a center, the upper tank 448 moves under the frame 11 and passes through the frame 11.
Rotate to a position in front of. At this time, there is no obstacle between the wall 920 and the upper tank 448 (see FIG. 116 (b)).

By the way, the game ball stored in the upper tank 448 may cause a ball clogging in the upper tank 448. At this time, in order to easily take out the game ball, the front frame 12 is rotated with the glass frame 15 closed as described above so that the frame 11 does not come on the upper tank 448, so that the operator can play the game. It is possible to secure a space for taking out the ball. However, when the worker performs the work of taking out the game ball in that state, the game ball may jump out of the upper tank 448 and get on the decoration device 18a (is scattered).

Here, the decoration device 18a is arranged to be higher than the wall portion 920 (front wall 921). Further, the upper surface of the main body portion 432 of the decoration device 18a and the upper surface of the mounting portion 442 are inclined rearward (see FIG. 117). Therefore, the game ball on the decoration device 18a is the wall portion 920.
It will flow down to.

Therefore, the wall portion 920 requires at least the player's attention display portion 929 as described above.
Is not only difficult to visually recognize, but also a structure for temporarily retaining (storing) the game balls that have flowed down from the decoration device 18a and discharging them to the upper tank 448 (that is, three-side front wall 921, side wall 922). It is preferable to have a structure having a side wall 923 but no rear wall). It should be noted that since there is no rear wall on the wall portion 920, it is easy to discharge the game balls to the upper tank 448, but the bottom surface 9
When it is premised that the game balls stored on 24 are moved to the upper tank 448 by hand, the wall portion 920 may be provided with a rear wall.

[Arrangement relationship of alert display part, wall part, and decoration device]
FIG. 119 is a cross-sectional view (a portion surrounded by a dashed ellipse in FIG. 117) showing a positional relationship between the wall portion 920 and the decoration device 18a (top unit). FIG. 120 is a rear view showing the positional relationship between the wall portion 920 and the hinge 16a.

As shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the wall portion 920 is formed in the width direction (left-right direction) of the glass frame 15.
A front wall 921 that extends along the front wall 921 of the decoration device 18a and faces the attachment portion 442 of the decoration device 18a, and one end of the front wall 921 in the width direction (left-right direction) facing the hinge 16a side. A side wall 922 extending rearward of the frame 15 (not shown in FIG. 119), a side wall 923 extending rearward of the glass frame 15 from the other end of the front wall 921, a front wall 921, a side wall 922, and a side wall 92.
3 and a bottom surface 924 on which the alert display unit 929 is arranged.
Although the load of the decoration device 18a is applied to the upper surface 15a of the glass frame 15, the front wall 921, the side wall 922, and the side wall 923 also function as a reinforcing portion that reinforces the strength of the upper surface 15a.

As shown in FIG. 119, in the wall portion 920, the distance D1 between the front wall 921 of the wall portion 920 and the rear end portion of the glass frame 15 of the mounting portion 442 (hereinafter referred to as the rear end portion) is a game. It is arranged to be smaller than the diameter D of the sphere. As a result, the game ball flowing down from the mounting portion 442 does not fit into the interval D1 and the game ball can be reliably flowed down to the wall portion 920.
The length D2 of the bottom surface 924 of the wall portion 920 in the front-rear direction (thickness direction) of the glass frame 15 is formed to be longer than the diameter D of the game ball. As a result, the game balls can be temporarily retained (stored) on the bottom surface 924, and, for example, the game balls hit the rear side edge of the glass frame 15 of the bottom surface 924 and greatly jump backward to jump over the upper tank 448. You can prevent going. When the upper surface 15a of the glass frame 15 and the upper surface of the front frame 12 form the same plane, the length D2 is set to be the length of the bottom surface 924 in the front-back direction (thickness direction) and the front frame 12.
May be defined as the total length of the thickness of the.

As shown in FIG. 119, the upper surfaces of the front wall 921, the side wall 922, and the side wall 923 form substantially the same plane inclined rearward, and the substantially same plane forms a part of the virtual inclined surface 920a. There is. On the other hand, the upper surface of the mounting portion 442 also has an inclined surface 442a that inclines rearward of the glass frame 15.
And the inclined surface 442a forms a part of the virtual inclined surface 442b. Here, the virtual inclined surface 442b is an extension of the inclined surface 442a. The mounting portion 4
The upper surface of 42 and the upper surface of the main body 432 (FIG. 117) also form substantially the same plane.

The inclination angle (α- (π / 2)) (rad) of the inclined surface 920a is the inclination angle of the inclined surface 442b (
φ− (π / 2)), but the inclined surface 920a is arranged to be lower than the inclined surface 442b by the distance D3 in the vertical direction. That is, the wall portion 920 is the mounting portion 44.
The second upper surface (the inclined surface 442a) is arranged so as not to intersect the same plane (the inclined surface 442b). As a result, even if the direction of the frame 11 is viewed from the vicinity of the upper end of the decoration device 18a, the wall portion 920 and the attention display portion 929 can be made difficult to visually recognize, and the appearance of the gaming machine 10 is not spoiled. The height of the outer wall (the front wall 921, the side wall 922, and the side wall 923) of the wall portion 920 is such that the outer wall preferably shields the attention display portion 929, while the outer wall itself stands up by the decoration device 18a. It may be appropriately adjusted to provide sufficient shielding from.

The attention display portion 929 is preferably arranged at a position closer to the front wall 921 side than the rear end of the bottom surface 924. As a result, the inclination angle of the line of sight from the front of the gaming machine 10 through the upper surface of the front wall 921 to the attention display portion 929 is higher than the inclination angle of the inclined surface 442b. Therefore, even if the gaming machine 10 is viewed from a height at which the wall portion 920 can be visually recognized, the attention display portion 929 is difficult to visually recognize, so that the aesthetic appearance of the gaming machine 10 is not spoiled. Note that the alert display unit 92
9 may be arranged so as to contact the front wall 921, and the length of the attention display portion 929 in the front-rear direction may be shorter than half the length D2 of the bottom surface 924. By doing so, the attention display portion 929 becomes more difficult to visually recognize.

Further, as shown in FIG. 120, the wall portion 920 is arranged so as to be lower than the hinge 16a. Thereby, the wall portion 920 (the front wall 921, the side wall 922, the side wall 9) is seen from the side surface where the hinge 16a of the gaming machine 10 is arranged and when the gaming machine 10 is seen from the height position of the hinge 16a.
23) is difficult to see and does not spoil the appearance of the gaming machine 10. The attention display portion 929 may be arranged so as to contact the side wall 923 on the side where the hinge 16a is not arranged, and the length of the attention display portion 929 in the left-right direction may be set to the left-right direction of the bottom surface 924. May be less than half the length of. With this configuration, the attention display portion 929 becomes difficult to be visually recognized from the other side surface on which the hinge 16a is not arranged.

In this embodiment, the wall portion 920 is arranged so as to project from the upper surface 15a of the glass frame 15 (FIGS. 117 and 119). As a result, even when the glass frame 15 is viewed from the height position of the upper surface 15a of the glass frame 15 while avoiding the decoration device 18a from the side of the decoration device 18a, the attention display portion 929 becomes difficult to be visually recognized.

Further, the decoration device 18a (top unit) basically shields the wall portion 920 and makes it difficult to visually recognize the warning display portion 929 in an auxiliary manner together with the wall portion 920. But,
In the present embodiment, since the decoration device 18a is large, the decoration device 18a (top unit)
The wall portion 920 can be omitted, provided that it is not removed. As a result, it becomes difficult for at least the player to visually recognize the alert display unit 929 by the decoration device 18a. However, since the outer wall of the wall portion 920 is arranged near the attention display portion 929, the shielding effect is strong, and the angle range in which the attention display portion 929 can be shielded more than the decoration device 18a (the angle range of the line of sight in the front-back direction). ) Tends to increase. Therefore, when the wall portion 920 is omitted, it is advantageous in terms of cost, but there is a possibility that the attention display portion 929 can be easily seen by the player (for example, when the player is tall).

Further, the distance D1 between the front wall 921 of the wall portion 920 and the rear end of the mounting portion 442 can be set to zero, that is, the front wall 921 and the mounting portion 442 can be brought into contact with each other. As a result, the mounting portion 442
It is possible to smoothly flow the game ball from the wall portion 920 to the wall portion 920. In addition, this arrangement (D1 = 0
In), the wall portion 920 can be omitted. The mounting portion 442 of the decoration device 18a (position specifying means) makes it difficult for at least the player to visually recognize the reminder display portion 929 and arranges the reminder display portion 929 at the rear end of the mounting portion 442. Positioning can be performed.

[Modification of wall (1)]
FIG. 121 is a cross-sectional view (a portion surrounded by a dashed ellipse in FIG. 117) showing a modified example of the wall portion 920, and FIG. 121 (a) shows that the inclination angle of the upper surface of the wall portion 920 corresponds to that of the decoration device 18a. 121 (b) shows a case where the inclination angle of the upper surface is lower than the upper surface of the wall portion 920 and the upper surface of the wall portion 920 is lower than the same plane including the upper surface of the decoration device 18a. FIG.
FIG. 121 (c) shows a case where the upper surface of the wall portion 920 has the same inclination angle and the upper surface of the wall portion 920 coincides with the same plane including the upper surface of the decoration device 18a. 1
8a is higher than the inclination angle of the upper surface, the upper surface of the wall portion 920 is lower than the same plane including the upper surface of the decoration device 18a, and the same plane including the upper surface of the wall portion 920 is behind the decoration device 18a. The case where it touches the end part of is shown.

In the wall portion 920 shown in FIG. 121 (a), the height of the side wall 922 (not shown) and the rear end of the side wall 923 of the glass frame 15 (hereinafter referred to as the rear end) from the upper surface 15a is higher. Figure 1
19 is the same as that shown in FIG. 19, but the inclination angle of the inclined surface 920a (β- (π / 2)
) Is lower than the inclination angle (φ- (π / 2)) of the inclined surface 442b. Therefore, the height of the front wall 921 is lower than that of the front wall 921 shown in FIG. 119, and the distance D4 between the inclined surface 442b and the front wall 921 is larger than the distance D3 (FIG. 119). Although illustration is omitted (same below), the interval D1 and the length D2 are the same as those shown in FIG. 119. In the above configuration, the front wall 921 is lower than in the case shown in FIG. 119, and the wall portion 920 is more difficult to visually recognize while maintaining the difficulty of visually confirming the attention display portion 929.

In the wall portion 920 shown in FIG. 121B, the heights of the rear end portions of the side wall 922 (not shown) and the side wall 923 are higher than those shown in FIG. 119, and the inclination angle (γ−
(Π / 2)) is the same as the inclination angle (φ− (π / 2)) of the inclined surface 442b, and the inclined surface 92
0a and the inclined surface 442b form the same plane. In the above configuration, the wall portion 920 has the inclined surface 4
Since it does not intersect the 42b and protrudes above the inclined surface 442b, the visibility of the wall portion 920 is maintained. On the other hand, since the front wall 921 is higher than that shown in FIG. 119, it is difficult to visually recognize the attention display portion 929. Furthermore, the inclined surface 920a and the inclined surface 4
Since 42b forms the same plane, if the distance D3 (FIG. 119) is sufficiently smaller than the diameter D (FIG. 119), the game ball is from the mounting portion 442 to the wall portion 920 (front wall 921, side wall 922).
, The impact received when flowing down to the side wall 923) can be suppressed, and the bouncing of the game ball due to the impact can be reduced.

In the wall portion 920 shown in FIG. 121 (c), the heights of the rear end portions of the side wall 922 (not shown) and the side wall 923 are the same as those shown in FIG. 119, but the inclination angle of the inclined surface 920a. (Δ− (π / 2)) is higher than the inclination angle (φ− (π / 2)) of the inclined surface 442b, and the inclined surface 920a intersects the rear end portion of the inclined surface 442a and the inclined surface 442b. In the above configuration, as in the case shown in FIG. 119, the attention display portion 929 and the wall portion 920 have difficulty in being visually recognized. Further, when the distance D3 (FIG. 119) is close to the diameter D (FIG. 119), the game ball emitted from the inclined surface 442a (emitted so as to draw a parabola) is inclined more than the inclined surface 442a. The wall portion 920 (the front wall 921, having the inclined surface 920a having a large angle,
Since it flows down to the side wall 922, the side wall 923), the mounting portion 442 to the wall portion 920 (the front wall 921,
The impact received when flowing down to the side wall 922, the side wall 923) can be suppressed, and the bouncing of the game ball due to the impact can be reduced. Note that in FIG. 121 (also in FIGS. 119, 120, and 121 (a)), the height of the rear end portions of the side walls 922 and 923 from the upper surface 15a can be zero.

[Modification of wall (2)]
122 is a cross-sectional view (a portion surrounded by an ellipse of a broken line in FIG. 117) showing a modified example of the wall portion 920, and FIG. 122 (a) shows the bottom surface 924 facing rearward in the arrangement shown in FIG. 119. 122 (b), the upper surfaces of the front wall 921 and the side walls 922, 923 are flush with the upper surface 15a of the glass frame 15 (front frame) in the arrangement shown in FIG. 122 (a). Shows the case where

In the wall portion 920 illustrated in FIG. 122A, the bottom surface 924 is different from that in the case of FIG. 119.
Is inclined downward toward the rear of the glass frame 15. As a result, the game ball flowing down to the bottom surface 924 can be quickly discharged toward the upper tank 448.

Compared with the case of FIG. 122 (a), the wall 920 shown in FIG. 122 (b) has a mode in which the entire wall 920 is embedded in the glass frame 15, and the front wall 921 and the side wall 922 (FIG. 1) are provided.
22 (b) (not shown), the upper surface of the side wall 923 is flush with the upper surface 15a of the glass frame 15. As a result, the side wall 922 (not shown in FIG. 122 (b)), the game ball abuts against the outer corner of the side wall 923, and the game ball is prevented from bouncing in the left-right direction, and the bottom surface 92 is also formed.
The game ball flowing down to 4 can be quickly discharged toward the upper tank 448. In addition,
Although the upper surface 15a of the glass frame 15 is horizontal, it may be slightly inclined rearward. As a result, the game ball flowing down to the upper surface 15a can be promptly discharged toward the upper tank 448.

[Modification of wall (3)]
FIG. 123 is a back view showing a modified example of the wall portion 920. In the wall portion 920 shown in FIG. 123, the side wall 922 is arranged to be higher than the side wall 923. Also, the front wall 921
The side walls 922 and the side walls 923 form substantially the same plane (the inclined surface 920a (not shown in FIG. 123)). However, the substantially same plane is not only inclined downward toward the rear of the glass frame 15, but also the glass frame. In the width direction of 15 (left-right direction), it inclines downward toward the direction away from the hinge 16a. Similarly, the bottom surface 924 is not only inclined downward toward the rear of the glass frame 15,
The glass frame 15 is inclined in the width direction (left-right direction) and away from the hinge 16a. With the above structure, the side wall 922 and the wall portion 92 that are higher than the side wall 923 are disposed.
It is possible to reduce the number of game balls that jump out of 0. On the contrary, the side wall 923 and the side wall 92
By being arranged lower than 2, the number of game balls that jump out from the side wall 923 to the outside of the wall portion 920 is larger than the number of game balls that jump from the side wall 922 to the outside of the wall portion 920. But the upper tank 4
When 48 (FIG. 116) is unevenly distributed in the left-right direction with respect to the wall portion 920 and away from the hinge 16a, the bottom surface 92 is equivalent to the game sphere jumping out from the side wall 923 to the outside of the wall portion 920.
In addition to reducing the overflow of the game ball in 4, the game ball jumping out of the side wall 923 flows down to the upper tank 448, so that the game ball can reliably flow down to the upper tank 448 (FIG. 116). Although not shown, it is preferable that the height of the upper surface of the front frame 12 that contacts the rear surface of the glass frame 15 be equal to or lower than the height of the rear end of the bottom surface 924. Alternatively, when the height of the upper surface of the front frame 12 is substantially the same as the height of the upper surface 15a of the glass frame 15, the height of the upper surface of the portion of the front frame 12 facing the bottom surface 924 is equal to or lower than the height of the rear end portion of the bottom surface 924. Is preferred. As a result, the game ball flowing down the bottom surface 924 is the front frame 12
Can be discharged to the upper tank 448 via the upper surface of the.

[Modification of wall (4)]
FIG. 124 is a plan view (a view from directly above) showing a modified example of the wall portion 920. On the bottom surface 924 of the wall portion 920 shown in FIG. 124, positioning portions 925, 926, 927 for positioning the placement position of the alert display portion 929 are arranged. Positioning parts 925, 926, 92
7 has a shape following the outer shape of the alert display unit 929, and can be arranged at, for example, a position in contact with (or adjacent to) the front wall 921 and the side wall 923 of the bottom surface 924, but a position closer to the front wall 921. Any position will do.

The positioning unit 925 is arranged, for example, at a position adjacent to (or in contact with) the short side on the side wall 922 side of the alert display unit 929. The positioning portion 926 has, for example, an L shape,
The inside corner of the L-shape is arranged behind (at the upper tank 448 side (FIG. 116)) the attention display portion 929 and at a position adjacent to (or in contact with) the corner on the side wall 922 side. The positioning unit 927 is
For example, behind the alert display unit 929 (on the side of the upper tank 448 (FIG. 116)) and on the side wall 92.
It is arranged at a position adjacent to (or in contact with) the long side on the third side.

The positioning portions 925, 926, 927 may be formed as convex portions protruding from the bottom surface 924, or may be displayed in a color different from that of the bottom surface 924 (for example, yellow, white, etc.). It should be noted that the alert display unit 929 may be peeled from the bottom surface 924 for some reason or reason, and a part of the back surface of the alert display unit 929 may be left behind as a peel-off residue. I can recognize that

Further, a recess (not shown) may be formed in a region of the bottom surface 924 surrounded by the positioning portions 925, 926, 927, that is, a region in which the alert display unit 929 is arranged. The concave portion is formed, for example, in a manner that the bottom surface 924 is dug in accordance with the shape of the character “Note”. Therefore, the operator can recognize that the place where the letter (recess) is displayed is the place where the alert display unit 929 should be arranged. Next, the attention display portion 929 is set to the positioning portions 925, 926, 9
When it is arranged in a region surrounded by 27 (including a recess), the alert display unit 929 covers the recess, but the region overlapping the recess does not contact the bottom surface 924. After that, the alert display section 9
When 29 is peeled off, a part of the back surface of the alert display unit 929 may remain as a peeling-off residue. In this case, a region without peeling-off will appear inside the peeling-off as a character "Note". Therefore, the operator can see the letters “Note” by looking at the warning display unit 929.
Can be recognized that was placed. Further, since the inner contour portion forming the character "NOTE" that is left unpeeled serves as a starting point for the operator to peel off the left unpeeled portion, it is possible to easily peel off the left unpeeled portion.

It is also possible to form a convex portion (not shown) in the same shape instead of the concave portion. In this case, the height of the convex portion is such that the warning display portion 929 is hardly deformed in a plan view when the caution display portion 929 is arranged on the positioning portions 925, 926, 927 (including the convex portion). Preferably. Thereby, the operator can recognize that the place where the letter “Note” that is raised from the bottom surface 924 is displayed is the place where the alert display unit 929 should be arranged.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 124, a caution display portion is provided in a region opposite to the front wall 921 of the bottom surface 924, that is, a region behind the positioning portions 926 and 927 (on the side of the upper tank 448 (FIG. 116)). A prohibited area display unit 928 indicating an area for which display (pasting) of 929 is prohibited is arranged. The prohibited area display portion 928 can be formed by, for example, a plurality of grooves extending in parallel in the width direction (horizontal direction) of the glass frame 15. As a result, it is possible to prevent the caution display unit (caution display unit 929) from being erroneously arranged at a position separated from the front wall 921 of the bottom surface 924. In particular, when the prohibited area display portion 928 is formed by a groove, the contact area between the groove and the attention display portion 929 is small and a sufficient joining force cannot be obtained.
It is possible to make the operator easily recognize that it is an area where the placement (pasting) of is prohibited.

It should be noted that, on the bottom surface 924, the alert display portion 929, the positioning portions 925, 926, 92
7. Arrange (attach) an optional display part 930 (sticker) at a position different from the prohibited area display part 928.
can do. The arbitrary display section 930 displays arbitrary information such as the type and model number of the decoration device 18a. The background color of the optional display portion 930 is the alert display portion 929.
It is not necessary to use yellow as described above, and any color such as white can be selected. In this way, by arranging the arbitrary display section 930 on the bottom surface 924, at least the player cannot easily see the arbitrary display section 930 like the alert display section 929.

[Caution display displayed on the display device]
By the way, an alert display regarding the adjustment of the gaming machine 10, such as an alert display in the alert display unit 929, can be displayed on the display device 41 during the adjustment of the gaming machine 10, for example. Further, the alert display displayed on the display device 41 includes not only the alert display for the operator who adjusts the gaming machine 10 but also the alert display for the player. As a warning display to the player, there is a warning display to correct the hit (left hit, right hit) if it is wrong, and a warning prompt to forget to remove the prepaid card for purchasing the loan ball. is there. The hitting caution display can be displayed by the player's erroneous operation of the operation handle 24, and the caution display prompting to forget to remove the prepaid card is displayed after the jackpot is over.

However, during the adjustment of the gaming machine 10, not only the alert display for the operator but also the alert display for the player can be displayed on the display device 41. In this case, the warning display for the player is not necessary for the worker, but when it is displayed on the display device 41, the worker may mistake it for the warning display for the worker. There is a possibility that the efficiency of the inspection work of the gaming machine 10 may be reduced.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the player's attention display is displayed on the display device 41 during the adjustment of the gaming machine 10, the movable accessory (the movable accessory 820 and the falling accessory 810 shown in FIG. 35) is displayed.
It is preferable to move the shielding means) to shield the portion of the display device 41 displaying the caution display to make it difficult for the operator to visually recognize the caution display. At this time, the caution display is displayed on the display device 41 at a position included in the movable range of the movable accessory, but the movable accessory operates to shield part or all of the caution display. It will be. As a result, it becomes difficult for the operator who is adjusting the gaming machine to visually recognize the player's attention display displayed on the display device 41, so that it is possible to avoid a decrease in the efficiency of the inspection work of the gaming machine 10.

It should be noted that at the time of setting the hall, the above-mentioned caution display for the player is generated at an arbitrary timing of the hall setting. Further, the warning display for prompting the user to forget to take out the prepaid card is generated at an arbitrary timing of the hall setting or during the initial operation when a power failure occurs during a big hit and the power is immediately restored. Therefore, when the player's attention display is displayed during the adjustment of the gaming machine 10 including the hall setting and the initial operation, the movable accessory moves to shield the player's attention display. It is possible to avoid a decrease in the efficiency of the inspection work of the gaming machine 10.

[Sheet that can be attached to decoration device]
FIG. 125 is a diagram showing an example of the sheet 435 attached to the decoration device 18a. Figure 1
As shown in 25, a seat 435 is attached to the front surface of the decoration device 18a. The display content of the sheet 435 is changed every time the model is changed, and the decoration device 1 is sandwiched between the transparent cover 434 attached to the decoration device 18a and the front surface of the decoration device 18a.
It is attached to 8a. Therefore, the sheet 435 is visible through the transparent cover 434.

A model for displaying the model name of the gaming machine 10 (arbitrary model name such as “CR tiger”) and a character related to the model name (arbitrary character such as “tiger face”) in the center of the seat 435. An equal display area 435a is arranged, and a related information display area 435b for displaying information related to the model displayed in the model etc. display area 435a is arranged at the lower right of the sheet 434.

In the related information display area 435b, the two-dimensional code 4 for accessing the site dedicated to the model related to the model displayed in the model display area 435a or the home page of the manufacturer of the model is displayed.
35c (QR code (registered trademark)) is arranged and read by the camera attached to the high-performance mobile phone (smartphone (registered trademark)) owned by the player, so that the display screen of the high-performance mobile phone is associated with the model. Information (game information such as specifications of the model) can be displayed. Further, in the related information display area 435b, the character information 435d for prompting the reading of the two-dimensional code 435c and the two-dimensional code 43 indicating the line of sight of the player are displayed by an arbitrary expression such as "Click here for model information".
A graphic 435e (arrow) for directing it to 5c is displayed.

In FIG. 125, the related information display area 435b is arranged at the lower right, but it may be arranged at the upper right, upper left, or lower left. In particular, when the related information display area 435b is arranged in the lower left (or upper left), it is possible to operate the high-performance mobile phone with the left hand and read the two-dimensional code 435c while operating the operation handle 24 (FIG. 112) with the right hand. It can be done easily. This allows
Check the game information while playing the game when you do not know how to hit it at the first hit, such as when the game state changes such as during big hits or during the support of normal electric power, or when the effect on the display device 41 (FIG. 35) changes significantly. it can. The related information display area 435b may overlap the model display area 435a, but it is more preferable that the related information display area 435b is arranged so as not to overlap.

[Operation / Effect of Sixth Embodiment]
According to the sixth embodiment, in the gaming machine 10 capable of executing a game (variable display game) when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a warning display means (a warning display unit 929) capable of displaying a predetermined warning display. And position specifying means (wall 920, decoration device 18a) capable of specifying the position of the attention display means (attention display unit 929), the position specifying means (wall 920, decoration device 18a), It is characterized in that the attention display means (attention display unit 929) is made difficult to visually recognize from the front of the gaming machine 10. As a result, it is possible to avoid a decrease in aesthetic appearance due to the alert display (attention display unit 929) arranged on the gaming machine 10.

In the sixth embodiment, the position specifying means (wall portion 920) is arranged on the upper surface 15a of the front frame (glass frame 15, part of the opening / closing frame) of the gaming machine 10, and the alert display means (attention display portion 92).
9) is arranged in the position specifying means (wall portion 920). As a result, it becomes difficult for at least the player who is executing the game to visually recognize the caution display means (the caution display unit 929), and it is possible to avoid a decrease in the player's interest. In addition, in the sixth embodiment, an example in which the position specifying means (the wall portion 920) is provided on the upper surface 15a of the glass frame 15 among the open / close frames configured by the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 has been shown. If the upper surface of the above is wide, the position specifying means (the wall portion 920) may be provided in the front frame 12 (a part of the open / close frame).

In the sixth embodiment, the position specifying means (wall portion 920) includes a front wall 921 extending along the width direction of the front frame (glass frame 15), and a front frame (glass) from the end portion of the front wall 921 in the width direction. Frame 15
), A pair of side walls 922 and 923, and a front wall 921 and a pair of side walls 922 and 92.
A bottom surface 924 surrounded by 3 and a warning display unit (a warning display portion 929) are arranged on the bottom surface 924. Thereby, the position specifying means (wall 920) can be constructed with a simple configuration.

In the sixth embodiment, the length D2 in the front-rear direction of the front frame (glass frame 15) of the bottom surface 924 is
It is longer than the diameter D of the game ball. As a result, the game balls can be temporarily retained (stored) on the bottom surface 924, and, for example, the game balls hit the rear side edge of the glass frame 15 of the bottom surface 924 and greatly jump backward to jump over the upper tank 448. You can prevent going.

In the sixth embodiment, positioning portions 925, 926, 927 are arranged at positions on the bottom surface 924 that are close to the front wall 921, and the positioning portions 925, 926, and 927 indicate the arrangement positions of the attention display means (attention display portion 929). Thereby, the arrangement position of the alert display means (attention display unit 929) can be easily determined.

In the sixth embodiment, a prohibited area display unit 928 is arranged on the side of the bottom surface 924 opposite to the front wall 921, the prohibited area display unit 928 indicating an area in which the disposition of the caution display means (caution display unit 929) is prohibited. As a result, it is possible to prevent the caution display unit (caution display unit 929) from being erroneously arranged at a position separated from the front wall 921 of the bottom surface 924.

In the sixth embodiment, the position specifying means (decoration device 18a) is attached to the upper surface 15a of the front frame (glass frame 15), and the decoration device 18a capable of specifying the position of the caution display means (caution display portion 929). The height of the decoration device 18a includes the front wall 921 and the side wall 922.
, 923. As a result, the attention display unit (attention display unit 929) is arranged so as to be difficult to visually recognize from the front of the gaming machine 10, and the aesthetic appearance of the gaming machine 10 and a decrease in the player's interest can be avoided.

In the sixth embodiment, the upper surface of the decoration device 18a includes an inclined surface 442a inclined toward the rear of the front frame (glass frame 15), and the front wall 921 and the side walls 922 and 923 include the inclined surface 442a, respectively. It is arranged so as not to intersect the same plane (sloping surface 442b).
Accordingly, the wall portion 920 (the front wall 921, the side wall 922, and the side wall 923) can be made difficult to visually recognize, and the appearance of the gaming machine 10 can be maintained.

In the sixth embodiment, the distance D1 between the decoration device 18a (mounting portion 442) and the front wall 921 is arranged to be shorter than the diameter D of the game ball. As a result, the game ball that has flowed down from the mounting portion 442 (decoration device 18a) does not fit into the interval D1, and the game ball can be reliably flowed down to the wall portion 920.

In the sixth embodiment, the bottom surface 924 is inclined rearward of the front frame (glass frame 15). Thereby, the game ball flowing down to the bottom surface 924 can be promptly discharged toward the rear (upper tank 448) of the front frame (glass frame 15).

In the sixth embodiment, the bottom surface 924 is inclined toward the direction away from the hinge 16a that rotatably supports the open / close frame including the front frame (glass frame 15). As a result, the upper tank 448 (FIG. 116) that stores the game balls is in the left-right direction with respect to the wall portion 920 and is the hinge 16a.
When it is unevenly distributed in the direction away from the wall portion 920 (the front wall 921, the side wall 922, and the side wall 92).
3, the game ball flowing down to the bottom surface 924) can be reliably supplied to the upper tank 448 (FIG. 116).

In the sixth embodiment, the front wall 921 and the side walls 922 and 923 are the front frame (glass frame 15).
It is arranged so as to be lower than the upper surface of the hinge 16a that rotatably supports the opening / closing frame including. Thereby, from the side surface where the hinge 16a of the gaming machine 10 is arranged, the hinge 16
The wall portion 920 (the front wall 921, the side wall 922, and the side wall 923) can be seen from the height position of a.
) Can be made difficult to see, and the appearance of the gaming machine 10 is not spoiled.

In the sixth embodiment, of the pair of side walls 922 and 923, one side wall 922 is arranged closer to the hinge 16a than the other side wall 923, and is arranged to be higher than the other side wall 923. ing. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of game balls that jump out of the wall portion 920 from the side wall 922 that is arranged higher than the side wall 923. On the contrary, since the side wall 923 is arranged lower than the side wall 922, the number of game balls jumping from the side wall 923 to the outside of the wall part 920 is larger than the game balls jumping from the side wall 922 to the outside of the wall part 920. However, the upper tank 448 (FIG. 116) is in the left-right direction with respect to the wall portion 920, and the hinge 16a
In the case of being unevenly distributed in the direction away from the side wall 923, the number of game balls jumping from the side wall 923 to the outside of the wall portion 920 is reduced, and the overflow of the game balls on the bottom surface 924 is reduced.
Since the game ball that jumps out of the game tank flows down to the upper tank 448, the upper tank 448 (
It is possible to reliably perform the flow down to (FIG. 116).

Further, according to the sixth embodiment, in the gaming machine 10 capable of executing a game (variable display game) when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a caution display means (a caution display unit 929) capable of displaying a predetermined caution display. , The display device 41) and the shielding means (the wall portion 920, the decoration device 18a, the movable accessory) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the display contents of the attention display means (the attention display unit 929, the display device 41) from the front of the gaming machine 10. And. As a result, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the interest of the player and a decrease in the work efficiency of the worker by appropriately hiding the caution display unnecessary for the player or the caution display unnecessary for the worker.

Further, according to the sixth embodiment, in the gaming machine 10 that can execute the game (variable display game) when the predetermined condition is satisfied, a caution display means (display on the display device 41) that can display a predetermined caution display. And a position specifying means capable of specifying the position of the warning display means (an image (a rectangle, an ellipse, etc.) surrounding (shielding) the character indicating the warning)
And, the position specifying means makes it difficult to visually recognize the attention display means from the front of the gaming machine 10. As a result, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the work efficiency of the worker by appropriately hiding the warning display that is unnecessary for the worker. It should be noted that the position specifying means (an image (a rectangle, an ellipse, etc.) surrounding (shielding) a character representing an alert is displayed at the time of setting a hall, etc., and is not displayed during the game.

The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and changes can be made within the scope of the technical idea thereof, and it is clear that they are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. Is. For example, it is possible to combine a plurality of embodiments. Further, for example, the present invention can be applied to other types of gaming machines (slot machines, etc.). The scope of the present invention is defined by the claims, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope of equivalents of the claims.

10 Gaming Machine 12 Front Frame (Game Frame)
25 Production Button 30 Game Board 32 Game Area 36 First Start Winning Port (First Start Winning Area)
37 Ordinary variable winning device 38 First special variable winning device 39 Second special variable winning device 40 Center case 41 Display device 44 Board production device 46 Board decoration device 50 Collective display device (LED)
93 setting key switch 100 game control device (main board)
200 payout control device 300 production control device (sub-board)
400 power supply device 806 large winning a prize unit 808 general winning a prize unit 812 RUSH lamp 815 seal 817 related information 819a position information 819b position information 820a character lamp 822 virtual line 841 sub board box 841
841a Internal space 842 Box lower member 843 Box upper member 858 Fastening screw 859 Cover member 906a Movable member 920 Wall part 929 Reminder display part

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine that can execute a game when a predetermined condition is met,
A warning display means capable of displaying a predetermined warning display,
A game machine comprising: a position specifying device capable of specifying the position of the alert display device.